ALPs User`s Manual.book

ALPs (Automated
Labware Positioners)
User’s Manual
Beckman Coulter PN 987836
Revision AC
September 2004
Beckman Coulter, Inc
4300 N. Harbor Boulevard, Fullerton, CA 92834-3100
Copyright © 2004 Beckman Coulter, Inc. Printed in U.S.A.
ii
Except as provided in writing signed by an officer to Beckman Coulter, Inc., this system and any related
documentation are provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, including that the system is
“error free.” This information is presented in good faith, but Beckman Coulter, Inc. does not warrant, guarantee, or
make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of this system and related documentation in terms
of correctness, accuracy, reliability, currentness, omissions, or otherwise. The entire risk as to the use, results, and
performance of this system and related documentation is assumed by the user.
Except as expressly provided herein, Beckman Coulter, Inc. makes no other warranty, whether oral or written,
expressed or implied, as to any matter whatsoever, including but not limited to those concerning merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose, nor is freedom from any patent owned by Beckman Coulter, Inc. or by others to be
inferred.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
Beckman Coulter, Inc. shall not be liable, to any extent whatsoever, for any damages resulting from or arising out of
the use or performance of this system and related documentation or the procedures specified in this manual,
regardless of foreseeability or the form of action, whether in contract, tort (including negligence), breach of warranty,
strict liability or otherwise, and including but not limited to damages resulting from loss of data, loss of anticipated
profits, or any special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages. In no event shall Beckman Coulter, Inc.’s
liability to the user exceed the amount paid by the user to Beckman Coulter, Inc. hereunder. The user assumes full
responsibility for the results obtained from the use of this system and related documentation and for application of
such results.
Beckman Coulter, SAGIAN Operations
Indianapolis, Indiana
www.beckmancoulter.com
SILAS is a trademark and Biomek, SAMI and ORCA are registered trademarks of Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other
trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies.
Copyright 2004 by Beckman Coulter, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or
otherwise, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
iii
Warranty and Returned Goods Requirements
All standard Beckman Coulter, Inc. policies governing returned goods apply to this
product. Subject to the exceptions and upon the conditions stated below, the Company
warrants that the products sold under this sales agreement shall be free from defects in
workmanship and materials for one year after delivery of the products to the original
Purchaser by the Company, and if any such product should prove to be defective
within such one year period, the Company agrees, at its option, either (1) to correct by
repair or at the Company’s election by replacement, any such defective product
provided that investigation and factory inspection discloses that such defect
developed under normal and proper use, or (2) to refund the purchase price. The
exceptions and conditions mentioned above are as follows:
a. Components or accessories manufactured by the Company which by their
nature are not intended to and will not function for one year are warranted only to
reasonable service for a reasonable time. What constitutes a reasonable time and a
reasonable service shall be determined solely by the Company. A complete list of
such components and accessories is maintained at the factory.
b. The Company makes no warranty with respect to components or accessories
not manufactured by it. In the event of defect in any such component or accessory, the
Company will give reasonable assistance to Purchaser in obtaining from the
manufacturer’s own warranty.
c. Any product claimed to be defective must, if required by the Company, be
returned to the factory, transportation charges prepaid, and will be returned to
Purchaser with transportation charges collect unless the product is found to be
defective, in which case the product must be properly decontaminated of any
chemical, biological, or radioactive hazardous material.
d. The Company shall be released from all obligations under all warranties,
either expressed or implied, if any product covered hereby is repaired or modified by
persons other than its own authorized service personnel, unless such repair by others
is made with the written consent of the Company.
e. If the product is a reagent or the like, it is warranted only to conform to the
quantity and content and for the period (but not in excess of one year) stated on the
label at the time of delivery.
It is expressly agreed that the above warranty shall be in lieu of all warranties of
fitness and of the warranty of merchantability, and that the company shall have no
liability for special or consequential damages of any kind or from any cause
whatsoever arising out of the manufacture, use, sale, handling, repair, maintenance, or
replacement of any of the products sold under the sales agreement.
Representatives and warranties made by any person, including dealers and
representatives of the Company, which are consistent or in conflict with the terms of
this warranty, shall not be binding upon the Company unless reduced in writing and
approved by an expressly authorized officer of the Company.
Parts replaced during the warranty period are warranted to the end of the instrument
warranty.
Note: Performance characteristics and specifications are only warranted when
Beckman Coulter replacement parts are used.
ALPs User’s Manual
v
Safety Information
All Warnings and Cautions in this document include an exclamation point, a lightning
bolt, or a light burst symbol framed within a triangle. Please pay special attention to
the specific safety information associated with these symbols.
WARNING: If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by
Beckman Coulter, Inc., the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
Warning and Caution Definitions
The exclamation point symbol is an international symbol which serves as a reminder
that all safety instructions should be read and understood before installation, use,
maintenance, and servicing is attempted.
When this symbol is displayed in this manual, pay special attention to the specific
safety information associated with the symbol.
WARNING
A WARNING calls attention to a condition or possible situation that
could cause injury to the operator.
CAUTION
A CAUTION calls attention to a condition or possible situation that could
damage or destroy the product or the operator’s work.
ALPs User’s Manual
vi
Safety Information
Electrical Safety
To prevent electrically related injuries and property damage, properly inspect all
electrical equipment prior to use and immediately report any electrical deficiencies.
Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Representative for any servicing of equipment
requiring the removal of covers or panels.
High Voltage
This symbol indicates the potential of an electrical shock hazard existing from a high
voltage source and that all safety instructions should be read and understood before
proceeding with the installation, maintenance, and servicing of all modules.
Do not remove system covers. To avoid electrical shock, use supplied power cords
only and connect to properly grounded (three-holed) wall outlets. Do not use
multiplug power strips.
Laser Light
This symbol indicates that a potential hazard to personal safety exists from a laser
source. When this symbol is displayed in this manual, pay special attention to the
specific safety information associated with the symbol.
Laser Specifications
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Laser Type:
Class II Laser Diode
Maximum Output:
1mW
Wavelength:
670 nm
Safety Information
vii
Chemical and Biological Safety
Normal operation of labortory equipment may involve the use of materials that are
toxic, flammable, or otherwise biologically harmful. When using such materials,
observe the following precautions:
•
Handle infectious samples according to good laboratory procedures and
methods to prevent the spread of disease.
•
Observe all cautionary information printed on the original solutions
containers prior to their use.
•
Dispose of all waste solutions according to your facility’s waste disposal
procedures.
•
Operate the Automated Labware Positioners (ALPs) in accordance with the
instructions outlined in this manual, and take all the necessary precautions
when using pathological, toxic, or radioactive materials.
•
Objects dropped onto plates, accidental tool release, or other accidental
collisions may result in splashing of liquids; therefore, take appropriate
safety precautions, such as using safety glasses and wearing protective
clothing, when working with potentially hazardous liquids.
•
Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous
materials.
•
Observe the appropriate cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using flammable solvents in or near a powered-up instrument.
•
Observe the appropriate cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathological, or radioactive materials.
Note: Observe all warnings and cautions listed for any external devices attached or
used during operation of the instrument. Refer to applicable external device user’s
manuals for operating procedures of that device.
Moving Parts
To avoid injury due to moving parts, observe the following:
•
Never attempt to exchange labware, reagents, or tools while the instrument
is operating.
•
Never attempt to physically restrict any of the moving components of any of
the Automated Labware Positioners (ALPs).
ALPs User’s Manual
viii
Safety Information
Cleaning
Observe the cleaning procedures outlined in this user’s manual for each specific
Automated Labware Positioner (ALP). Prior to cleaning equipment that has been
exposed to hazardous material:
•
Appropriate Chemical and Biological Safety personnel should be contacted.
•
The Chemical and Biological Safety information contained in this user’s
manual should be reviewed.
Maintenance
Perform only the maintenance described in this manual. Maintenance other than that
specified in this manual should be performed only by Beckman Coulter Service
Representatives.
Important
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
It is your responsibility to decontaminate Automated Labware Positioners (ALPs)
before requesting service by a Beckman Coulter Service Representative or returning
parts to Beckman Coulter for repair. Beckman Coulter will NOT accept any items
which have not been decontaminated where it is appropriate to do so. If any parts are
returned, they must be enclosed in a sealed plastic bag stating that the contents are
safe to handle and are not contaminated.
Safety Information
ix
Warnings and Cautions Found in this Manual
Please read and observe all cautions and instructions. Remember, the most important
key to safety is to operate these Automated Labware Positioners (ALPs) with care.
The WARNINGs and CAUTIONs found within this document are listed below.
WARNING: If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by
Beckman Coulter, Inc., the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
CAUTION: Do not kink the drainage or supply hose.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
CAUTION: Make sure the end of the tubing going into the waste container
is no more than 6 inches from the top of the container. If the end of tubing
is near the bottom, excessive pressure may cause liquid to overflow onto
the deck.
WARNING: Always wear protective gloves when draining the 8-Channel
Active Wash ALP of fluid.
WARNING: The waste fluid may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: The cleaning wells and reservoir of the 8-Channel Active
Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals and fluids. Follow the
appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer
to dispose of the fluid.
Bar Code Reader ALP
WARNING: CLASS II LASER PRODUCT THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS TO
APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF 21 CFR 1040 AT THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE.
WARNING: Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam. Never look directly
into the laser beam, and never leave the laser on, open, or unattended.
ALPs User’s Manual
x
Safety Information
WARNING: Always have the laser module access cover, located on the
Bar Code Reader, in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser
module.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: If labware other than that specified in the Labware Type
Editor is used, an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur.
WARNING: If a label is applied by any means other than the SAGIAN™
Print & Apply device, an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur.
CAUTION: Do not use the Bar Code Reader step under the SILAS
category in the Step Palette Builder. The Bar Code Reader Step from the
Integrated Devices step palette must be used to ensure the Bar Code
Reader operates properly.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
WARNING: The Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP may be contaminated
from method solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination and
cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the Biomek instrument.
Clean up any spills immediately according to the procedures defined by
the laboratory safety officer.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Safety Information
xi
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
WARNING: When using the Half-Position Disposal ALP, do not overfill
the disposal bag. Tips may spill over onto the deck, possibly
contaminating the deck with hazardous materials.
CAUTION: The Half-Position Disposal ALP must be mounted on the
outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
WARNING: Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are
recommended for hazardous applications. The waste bags shipped with
the Half-Position Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags. Contact the
laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures.
CAUTION: Make sure the bag is tight to tops of the flanges. The gripper
tool must have enough room to move over the ALP.
WARNING: The waste bag may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
CAUTION: The Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted
in the left or right outside columns of the Biomek NX deck to avoid
collisions.
WARNING: The Half-Position Disposal ALP may be contaminated. Follow
the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
ALPs User’s Manual
xii
Safety Information
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
WARNING: Do not stick objects through the fan guards.
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD.
WARNING: Do not kink the hoses.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: Do not overflow the reservoir.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to access a 96-Channel or 384-Channel Tip
Wash ALP with a Multichannel Pod equipped with an HDR Tool Body. The
gripper may crash and damage the pod, HDR Tool Body, or Tip Wash
ALP.
CAUTION: Do not access labware positioned on a 1 x 5 Passive ALP with
the HDR Tool Body. The gripper may crash with the ALP.
CAUTION: Do not access labware on a Stirring ALP with the HDR Tool
Body. The magnetic stirrer may bend the pins or interfere with the liquid
transfer performance of the pins.
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek FX instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
Heating and Cooling ALP
WARNING: The Heating and Cooling ALP can reach extremely high
temperatures. Allow the Heating and Cooling ALP to cool before
removing it from the deck.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Safety Information
xiii
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: Do not detach the hoses over the Biomek deck. Immediately
wipe up any spills with a soft cloth.
High-Density Passive ALPs
WARNING: High-Density ALPs may be contaminated from method
solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined
by the laboratory safety officer.
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
WARNING: The NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP may be contaminated from
method solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures
outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
Magnetic Bead ALP
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable (1 meter [39.37 in.], Part
Number 717781) can be used in each chain of ALPs. If more than one long
CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN communication errors may occur.
CAUTION: A maximum of one device can be chained to a Magnetic Bead
ALP. If more than one device is chained to a Magnetic Bead ALP, the
Biomek instrument may not be able to supply sufficient electrical current
to operate all devices on the chain.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Pinch Point! The clamps used to secure a microplate to the
Magnetic Bead ALP could cause personal injury. Avoid interference with
the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP.
CAUTION: The Magnetic Bead ALP may be damaged if liquid is
dispensed into an ALP that does not have labware positioned on it.
CAUTION: Make sure the labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP matches the
labware type specified. The clamps raise to a height set for the labware
type before clamping and incorrect settings may result in inaccurate
clamping.
ALPs User’s Manual
xiv
Safety Information
Microplate Shaking ALP
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
CAUTION: Set the shaking speed at the lowest setting and increase
slowly to the desired setting. This helps prevent spills or splashing.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
WARNING: When using the self-contained Multichannel Disposal ALP
without the slide, do not overfill the disposal bag. Tips can spill over onto
the deck, possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous materials.
CAUTION: When using the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide, remove
the bagging extension to avoid collisions between the pod and the
Multichannel Disposal ALP.
CAUTION: The self-contained Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide
must be mounted on the back row of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
CAUTION: Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the
Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span-8 Disposal ALP. Each Disposal
ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP.
WARNING: Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are
recommended for hazardous applications. The waste bags shipped with
the Multichannel Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags. Contact the
laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures.
CAUTION: The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted in
the 2nd or 3rd row in the left and right outside columns of the Biomek FX
deck to avoid collisions.
WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury, operate only with all
protective shields in place.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Safety Information
xv
WARNING: The waste bag may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: The Multichannel Disposal ALP may be contaminated. Follow
the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD.
WARNING: Do not kink the hoses.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: Orient the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs so the in and out
connections face the back of the Biomek instrument.
CAUTION: Use the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 96 disposable
tip head.
CAUTION: Use the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 384
disposable tip head.
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck.
ALPs User’s Manual
xvi
Safety Information
WARNING: Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame
cable. If the light curtain is violated, the framing process halts
immediately.
WARNING: Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod
movement.
WARNING: Always wear protective gloves when draining the tip wash
fluid.
Orbital Shaker ALP
CAUTION: Clamp all labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even
when using the ALP as a standard deck position, such as a
1 x 1 or a swap space.
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
WARNING: Do not chain Orbital Shaker ALPs together or to any other
ALP.
CAUTION: A maximum of four (4) Orbital Shaker ALPs may be used on a
deck at one time.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing the AccuFrame.
CAUTION: Make sure there are no tips on the head.
CAUTION: When creating a method with an Orbital Shaker and a stack of
labware, first move the labware to another ALP, preferably a passive
ALP, and then move it to the Orbital Shaker. The offsets allowed with
stacking may cause the labware to be gripped off center; however,
moving labware from a passive ALP ensures it is gripped properly.
CAUTION: Only labware compliant with the Society for Biomolecular
Screening (SBS) proposed microplate standards is recommended for
use on the Orbital Shaker ALP. Non-compliant labware may not be
securely grasped by the ALP or may cause physical damage to the ALP.
WARNING: Do not shake tip boxes, tip box lids, or reservoirs on the
Orbital Shaker ALP. The clamps on the ALP cannot hold tip boxes, tip
box lids, or reservoirs securely during a shaking procedure.
WARNING: To ensure labware stays securely clamped on the Orbital
Shaker ALP, do not exceed the recommended maximum shaking speed.
WARNING: Always observe appropriate cautionary procedures as
defined by your safety officer when using flammable solvents or toxic,
pathological, or radioactive materials.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Safety Information
xvii
WARNING: The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the
maximum shaking speed for all types of labware. Conduct testing
according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to
determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of
liquid.
CAUTION: If using Biomek FX Software version 2.1c or prior, crashes
may occur when executing a Continuation method. To avoid crashes,
delete any partially completed Orbital Shaker ALP steps and reinsert
them into the Continuation method.
Positive Position ALP
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
CAUTION: Orient the Positive Position ALP so the CAN connections are
to the right of the ALP and the clamp is in the front right corner of the ALP
when facing the Biomek instrument.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Pinch Point! The clamps used to secure a microplate to the
Positive Position ALP could cause personal injury. Avoid interference
with the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP.
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck.
WARNING: Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame
cable. If the light curtain is violated, the framing process halts
immediately.
ALPs User’s Manual
xviii
Safety Information
WARNING: Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod
movement.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
CAUTION: Older versions of the Span-8 Disposal ALP must be modified
with the new bagging extension when upgrading to Biomek Software
3.2. Failure to modify the ALP could result in Span-8 Pod crashes.
WARNING: When using the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide, do not
overfill the disposal bag. Tips may spill over onto the deck, possibly
contaminating the deck with hazardous materials.
CAUTION: The Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted on the
outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions.
CAUTION: The self-contained Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide must
be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid
collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
CAUTION: Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the
Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span-8 Disposal ALP. Each Disposal
ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP.
WARNING: Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are
recommended for hazardous applications. The waste bags shipped with
the Span-8 Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags. Contact the laboratory
safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures.
CAUTION: The Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted in the
left and right outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions.
WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury, operate only with all
protective shields in place.
WARNING: The waste bag may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
‘safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Safety Information
xix
WARNING: The Span-8 Disposal ALP may be contaminated. Follow the
appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
WARNING: Do not kink the drainage hose.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
WARNING: Always wear protective gloves when draining the Span-8 Tip
Wash ALP of fluid.
WARNING: The waste fluid may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer to dispose of the fluid. The cleaning wells and
reservoir of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals
and fluids.
Standard Passive ALPs
WARNING: Standard Passive ALPs may be contaminated from method
solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined
by the laboratory safety officer.
Stirring ALP
CAUTION: The Stirring ALP continues to stir during a light curtain
violation even though the method stops.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
ALPs User’s Manual
xx
Safety Information
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
CAUTION: Adjust the stirring speed using the software. Set the stirring
speed only as high as absolutely necessary to avoid splashing.
WARNING: Setting the stirring speed too high, or setting the speed too
high with an inadequate amount of liquid in the reservoir, or ramping the
stirring speed up too fast in a high viscosity liquid may force the stir bar
off center. The stir bar would then have to be reset to the center position.
CAUTION: The reservoir and stir bar may be contaminated following use.
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: Clean the reservoir before storing or filling with another
substance.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
CAUTION: Different sizes of test tubes must not be mixed in one test tube
rack. To avoid a collision between the pod and Test Tube Rack ALP, all
of the test tubes in the Test Tube Rack must be a uniform height.
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck.
WARNING: Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame
cable. If the light curtain is violated, the framing process halts
immediately.
WARNING: Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod
movement.
WARNING: Test Tube Rack ALPs may be contaminated from method
solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined
by the laboratory safety officer.
Tip Loader ALP
CAUTION: Clean, dry air must be provided for proper operation of the Tip
Loader ALP.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Safety Information
xxi
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
WARNING: Stay clear of the pinch point when locking rods are moving
up into the head/pod.
Device Controller
WARNING: To prevent electrical shock, use standard electrical
precautions when plugging the Device Controller into the power supply.
WARNING: Do not remove the cover of the Device Controller.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before connecting
CAN communication cables.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
Source/Waste Sensor
WARNING: Do not place the controller or the source or waste containers
on the Biomek instrument deck.
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
ALPs User’s Manual
xxi
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Warning and Caution Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
High Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Laser Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Laser Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Chemical and Biological Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Moving Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Warnings and Cautions Found in this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxi
List of Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
1 Introduction to ALPs
1.1
1.2
1.3
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1
Related User’s Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALPs Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing and Configuring ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
ALPs User’s Manual
xxii
Table of Contents
2 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Mounting the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.1
Installing the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP on the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.2
Routing Tubing for the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.3
Adding a WashPump in Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.4
Adding and Configuring the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
in the Deck Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.3.1
Using the Graphic Alignment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.3.2
Using the Delta Value and Directional Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.3.3
Framing the Z-Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Using an 8-Channel Active Wash ALP in a Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.4.1
Configuring Multiple 8-Channel Active Wash ALPs on an Instrument 2-20
Removing the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
3 Bar Code Reader ALP
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1
Deck Positions for the Bar Code Reader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2
Mounting the Bar Code Reader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.3
Aligning the Bar Code Reader ALP Laser Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Applying Labels to Labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using the Bar Code Reader ALP in a Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.5.1
Configuring a Method Where Bar Codes are Read for Decision Making3-9
Removing the Bar Code Reader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4 Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Installing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1
Installing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir on the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2
Setting up the Automatic Reservoir Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Using the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.4.1
Configuring an Instrument Setup Step for a
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.4.2
Configuring a Device Action Step for a
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Table of Contents
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Controlling the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP Outside a Method. . . . . . .
4.5.1
Filling the Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.2
Draining the Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.3
Checking the Sensor State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP From the Deck . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiii
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-19
5 Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Half-Position Disposal ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1
Mounting a Half-Position Disposal ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2
Removing a Half-Position Disposal ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.1
Mounting the Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide to the Deck . . . . 5-8
5.3.2
Removing a Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide ALP . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
6 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1
HDR Pin Drying ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.1.2
Reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.1
Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.2.2
Installing the HDR Circulating Reservoir on the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Installing and Configuring Devices Associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP
and Circulating Reservoir in Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.3.1
Installing Digital Devices for the HDR ALP
and Circulating Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.3.2
Configuring Digital Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.3.3
Removing Digital Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Adding the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir to the Deck
in Biomek Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4.1
Adding an HDR Pin Drying ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.4.2
Adding a Circulating Reservoir to the Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Using the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.6.1
Using the HDR Tool Cleaning Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.6.2
Using the Device Action Step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir
Outside a Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
ALPs User’s Manual
xxiv
Table of Contents
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir from the Deck
6.8.1
Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2
Removing the Circulating Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.1
Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.2
Storing the Circulating Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP
and Circulating Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.1 Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10.2 Preventive Maintenance for the Circulating Reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir . . . . . . .
6.11.1 Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2 Troubleshooting the Circulating Reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
6-41
6-41
6-42
6-42
6-42
6-43
6-43
6-43
6-44
6-44
6-44
7 Heating and Cooling ALP
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Heating and Cooling ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Mounting the Heating and Cooling ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Circulator Bath Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Heating and Cooling ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-3
7-3
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
High-Density Passive ALPs
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1
4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2
4 x 3 High-Density ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing High-Density Passive ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1
Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 3 ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2
Mounting a 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3
Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 4 ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4
Mounting the 4 x 4 ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing High-Density Passive ALPs from the Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-6
8-6
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8
9 High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Liquid Level Sensing (LLS) Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP from the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Framing the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
9-1
9-3
9-5
9-7
9-7
9-7
9-7
Table of Contents
xxv
10 Magnetic Bead ALP
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
10.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2.1 Mounting the Magnetic Bead ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2.2 Using Interchangeable Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.4.1 Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup 10-8
10.4.2 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck Editor . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.4.3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP . . . 10-17
10.4.4 Understanding How the Magnetic Bead ALP
Performs Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.4.5 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Magnetic Bead ALP . . . . 10-21
Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.5.1 Homing the Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10.5.2 Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10.5.3 Determining Magnet Engage Height for Labware Types. . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.5.4 Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Magnetic Bead ALP . . . . . . 10-30
10.5.5 Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP
Recognizes a Labware Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Removing the Magnetic Bead ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
11 Microplate Shaking ALP
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 Mounting the Microplate Shaking ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Microplate Shaking ALP in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.1 Turning On the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method . . . . . . . .
11.5.2 Timing a Shaking Operation Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5.3 Turning Off the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method . . . . . . .
11.5.4 Clamping or Unclamping a Plate Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Microplate Shaking ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11-3
11-3
11-5
11-5
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-8
11-9
11-9
11-9
11-9
ALPs User’s Manual
xxvi
Table of Contents
12 Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
12.7
12.8
12.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1.1 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.1.2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Multichannel Disposal ALP
without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.2.2 Mounting a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.3.1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Multichannel Disposal ALP
with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.4.1 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.4.2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.4.3 Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both L2 and L3 . . . . . . . 12-13
12.4.4 Disposal ALP in R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12.4.5 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.4.6 Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both R2 and R3 . . . . . . . 12-14
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.6.1 Removing the Bagging Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
13 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
13.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.2.1 Choosing a Deck Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.2.2 Mounting Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on an Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Removing the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
14 Orbital Shaker ALP
14.1
14.2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Installing the Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.2.1 Mounting an Orbital Shaker ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Table of Contents
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
xxvii
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.1 Installing the Framing Fixture, Homing the Axes,
and Installing the AccuFrame Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.3.2 Homing the Microplate Platform and Actuating the Clamps . . . . . . . . 14-8
14.3.3 Framing the Deck Position with the Deck Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14.3.4 Removing the AccuFrame from the ALP and the Framing Fixture
from the Biomek Instrument Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.4.1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.4.2 Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the
Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
14.4.3 Controlling the Actions of an Orbital Shaker ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14.4.4 Stopping and Restarting a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
14.5.1 Manually Controlling a Standard Shaking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39
14.5.2 Manually Controlling a Shaking Procedure of a
Specific Length of Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
14.5.3 Manually Executing a Previously Defined Shaking Profile . . . . . . . . 14-41
14.5.4 Manually Controlling a Pulsing Shake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
14.5.5 Manually Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process . . . . . . 14-44
14.5.6 Manually Clamping and Unclamping Labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45
14.5.7 Manually Homing the Microplate Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Removing the Orbital Shaker ALP from the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
15 Positive Position ALP
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Installing the Positive Position ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.2.1 Mounting a Positive Position ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.2.2 Leveling the Positive Position ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.2.3 Aligning the Top of the Positive Position ALP with the
Multichannel Head or Span-8 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Using the Positive Position ALP in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.5.1 Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Positive Position ALP . . . . 15-11
15.5.2 Verifying the Sensor on the Positive Position ALP
Operates Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15.5.3 Verifying the Positive Position ALP Recognizes a Type of Labware 15-13
Removing the Positive Position ALP from the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
ALPs User’s Manual
xxviii
Table of Contents
16 Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.1.1 Components of the SPE ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Installing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
16.2.1 Choosing Deck Positions for the SPE ALP and Collar Stand . . . . . . . 16-5
16.2.2 Mounting the SPE ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
16.2.3 Mounting the SPE Collar Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
16.3.1 Special Framing for the SPE ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
16.3.2 Special Framing for the SPE Collar Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Using the SPE ALP in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
16.4.1 Configuring the SPE Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Removing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
17 Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
17.1.1 Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
17.1.2 Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
17.2.1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide 17-5
17.2.2 Mounting a Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
17.3.1 Deck Positions for the Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
17.3.2 Mounting a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15
17.4.1 Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
17.4.2 Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
17.4.3 Span-8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both L2 and L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
17.4.4 Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
17.4.5 Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18
17.4.6 Span-8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both R2 and R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18
Removing the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19
17.6.1 Removing the Bagging Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19
Removing a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-20
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Table of Contents
xxix
18 Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Installing the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.2.1 Deck Positions for the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
18.2.2 Mounting the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Removing the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
19 Standard Passive ALPs
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
19.1.1 1 x 1 Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.1.2 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
19.1.3 1 x 3 Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
19.1.4 1 x 5 Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Installing Standard Passive ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
19.2.1 Choosing a Deck Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
19.2.2 Mounting Standard Passive ALPs to the Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
20 Stirring ALP
20.1
20.2
20.3
20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
20.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Stirring ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.2.1 Mounting the Stirring ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Stirring ALP in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Stirring ALP Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Stirring ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-1
20-3
20-3
20-4
20-4
20-5
20-6
20-6
20-6
20-7
21 Storage ALPs (FX-only)
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Configuring Storage ALPs in the Deck Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
21.2.1 Adding a Storage ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
21.2.2 Setting Storage ALP Position Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
21.2.3 Adding Other ALPs to the Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
Framing Storage ALPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
ALPs User’s Manual
xxx
Table of Contents
22 Test Tube Rack ALPs
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
22.7
22.8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22.1.1 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.2 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Installing Test Tube Rack ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
22.2.1 Selecting the Deck Positions for a Test Tube Rack ALP . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
22.2.2 Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Adding Test Tube Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks
to Tube Rack ALPs (NX-S8 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
22.5.1 Adding Septum Piercing Tube Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-11
22.5.2 Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Removing Test Tube Rack ALPs from the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
22.6.1 Removing the Septum Piercing Adaptor
from Test Tube Rack ALPs (NX-S8 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-16
23 Tip Loader ALP
23.1
23.2
23.3
23.4
23.5
23.6
23.7
23.8
23.9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
23.1.1 Tip Loader Air Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Installing the Tip Loader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
23.2.1 Choosing a Deck Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
23.2.2 Mounting the Tip Loader ALP to the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
Framing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Using the Tip Loader ALP in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
23.4.1 Loading Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6
Controlling the Tip Loader ALP Locking Rods Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
Removing the Tip Loader ALP from the Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Appendix A: Device Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
A.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.1
Device Controller Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.2 Installing a Device Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.3 Setting Address Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.4 Connecting Devices to the Device Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.4.1
Connecting High-Voltage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.4.2
Connecting Digital Device Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.4.3
Connecting Digital Device Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.5 Using Advanced Manual Control to Manually Control Device Controllers . . . . . . A-9
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Table of Contents
xxxi
A.6 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.6.1
Replacing the Power Input Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.6.2
Replacing the High-Voltage Output Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Appendix B: Source/Waste Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
B.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2 Installing a Source/Waste Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.2.1
Calibrating the Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
B.3 Using the Source/Waste Sensor in a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.3.1
Using the Device Setup Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.3.2
Associating the Source/Waste Sensor with a Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
B.3.3
Error Messages for the Source/Waste Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.4 Controlling the Source/Waste Sensor Outside a Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.5 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxix
ALPs User’s Manual
xxxi
List of Figures
Figure 1-1. New Devices displaying all detected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 2-1. 8-Channel Active Wash ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-2. Tube routing for 8-Channel Active Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-3. New Devices displaying all detected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-4. WashPump configuration in Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-5. Position Properties for 8-Channel Active Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-6. Expanded Position Properties for the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-7. Framing targets on 8-Channel Active Wash ALP (top view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-8. Deck Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-9. Position Properties for an 8-Channel Active Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-10. Manual Framing Wizard — Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-11. Manual Framing Wizard if tips are not already loaded.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-12. Manual Framing Wizard if tips are loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-13. Manual Framing Wizard — Teach X, Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-14. Manual Teaching the X- and Y-axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-15. Manual Teaching the X- and Y-axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-16. Manual Teaching (Teach Z). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-17. Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 3-1. Bar Code Reader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-2. Bar Code Reader — Laser beam position over bar code label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-3. Bar Code Reader — Label positioning on a microplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-4. The Integrated Devices step palette shown in the main editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-5. Bar Code Reader step inserted in the Method View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 4-1. Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP mounted on a 1x1 Passive ALP. . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-2. Mounting the peristaltic pump head on the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-3. Tubing routed correctly through pump head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Figure 4-4. Automatic Reservoir Controller ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5. Fiber cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-6. Identifying the fiber optic leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-7. Calibrating the sensor amplifier sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
ALPs User’s Manual
xxxii
List of Figures
Figure 4-8. Configuring an Instrument Setup step for a
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4-9. Labware Properties for a drainable/refillable reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-10. Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable/Refillable
Reservoir ALP with Fill selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-11. Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable/Refillable
Reservoir ALP with Drain selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-12. Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable/Refillable
Reservoir ALP with AssertSensor selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 5-1. Half-Position Disposal ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-2. Half-Position Disposal ALP rubber band placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Figure 5-3. Half-Position Disposal ALP with correct bag placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-4. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-5. Removing bottom panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-6. Adding the slide to the Half-Position Disposal ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Figure 5-7. Adding the chute to Half-Position Disposal ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 6-1. HDR Pin Drying ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Figure 6-2. Circulating reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Figure 6-3. HDR Pin Drying ALP and collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Figure 6-4. Quick disconnect fittings on the HDR circulating reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-5. Tubing connections between circulating reservoir and pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Figure 6-6. New Devices displaying all detected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Figure 6-7. Hardware Setup showing the configuration for a digital device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-8. Position Properties for deck positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Figure 6-9. Expanded Position Properties for deck positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Figure 6-10. Instrument Setup step configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Figure 6-11. Position Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Figure 6-12. Expanded Position Properties for deck positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Figure 6-13. Instrument Setup step configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Figure 6-14. Labware Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Figure 6-15. HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Figure 6-16. HDR Tool Cleaning step — new cleaning operation configuration . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Figure 6-17. HDR Tool Cleaning step — configuration for a wash operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Figure 6-18. Dipping Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Figure 6-19. Custom Height prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Figure 6-20. HDR Tool Cleaning step — new cleaning operation configuration . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Figure 6-21. HDR Tool Cleaning step — configuration for a drying operation . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Figure 6-22. Custom Height prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Figure 6-23. Device Action step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Figure 6-24. Device Action step for the Circulating Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Figure 6-25. Device Action step for the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Figure 6-26. Advanced Manual Control for a Device Controller with Fan on . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Figure 7-1. Heating and Cooling ALP — top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-2. Heating & Cooling Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-3. Heating and Cooling Unit mounting — bottom view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 8-1. 4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
List of Figures
xxxiii
Figure 8-2. 4 x 3 High-Density Passive ALP with a microplate being placed
in a labware position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-3. LLS Plate (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Figure 8-4. Installing an LLS Plate on an High-Density 4 x 3 ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-5. High-Density Passive 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed. . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-6. Thumbscrew positioning on the base of the 4 x 3 ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Figure 9-1. Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Figure 9-2. LLS Plate (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Figure 9-3. Installing an LLS Plate on an NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-4. NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-5. Thumb screw positioning on the base of the NX-S8
High-Density 4 x 3 ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Figure 10-1. Magnetic Bead ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Figure 10-2. Magnetic Bead ALP CAN connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-3. Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-4. Attaching magnet to mounting plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Figure 10-5. Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Figure 10-6. Hardware Setup — Magnetic Bead ALP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Figure 10-7. Warning appears because an ALP is about to be placed
where it overlaps another ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Figure 10-8. Position Properties for Deck Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Figure 10-9. Miniskirted labware on closed- and open-centered deck positions . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Figure 10-10. Position Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Figure 10-11. Per-Labware Offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Figure 10-12. Labware Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Figure 10-13. Basic Information for the selected labware type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Figure 10-14. Magbead configuration for the selected labware type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Figure 10-15. Device Action step and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Figure 10-16. Device Action step for the Magnetic Bead ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Figure 10-17. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Disengage Magnet selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Figure 10-18. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Manual Engage Magnet selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Figure 10-19. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Move Magnet selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Figure 10-20. Magbead configuration for the selected labware type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Figure 10-21. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Manual Clamp selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Figure 10-22. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Verify Labware selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Figure 10-23. Error indicating labware not found at sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Figure 11-1. Microplate Shaking ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Figure 11-2. Microplate Shaking ALP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Figure 11-3. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Microplate Shaking ALP . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Figure 11-4. Advanced Manual Control for a Microplate Shaking ALP
with Timed Shake choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
ALPs User’s Manual
xxxiv
List of Figures
Figure 12-1. Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Figure 12-2. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Figure 12-3. Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide - exploded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Figure 12-4. Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide grounding tab and screw . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-5. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 12-6. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews (bottom view) . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-7. Multichannel Disposal ALP slide attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-8. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide ground screw placement . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Figure 12-9. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-10. Left side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Figure 12-11. Right side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Figure 13-1. 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Figure 13-2. 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Figure 13-3. Tip wash reservoir and tip wash stand to create the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP 13-6
Figure 13-4. Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Figure 13-5. AccuFrame, Framing Tool Adaptor, and the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP . . . . . 13-9
Figure 13-6. Tip and offset explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Figure 13-7. Per-Labware Offsets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Figure 14-1. Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Figure 14-2. Orbital Shaker ALP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Figure 14-3. Confirms Manual Control is connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Figure 14-4. Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Figure 14-5. Warning that appears when homing all axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Figure 14-6. Framing fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Figure 14-7. Advanced Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Figure 14-8. Advanced Manual Control for an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Figure 14-9. Using Advanced Manual Control to unclamp an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . 14-9
Figure 14-10. Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamp
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Figure 14-11. Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Figure 14-12. Position Properties for the selected Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Figure 14-13. Teaching Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Figure 14-14. Labware Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Figure 14-15. Basic Information for the selected labware type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Figure 14-16. Orbital Shaking configuration for the selected labware type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
Figure 14-17. Device Action step and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Figure 14-18. Device Action step configured for a continuous shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Figure 14-19. Device Action step configured for a timed shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
Figure 14-20. Device Action step configured to run a previously designed
shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Figure 14-21. Device Action step configured for a pulsing shake motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Figure 14-22. Device Action step configured to stop all shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
List of Figures
xxxv
Figure 14-23. Device Action step configured to actuate the clamps
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
Figure 14-24. Device Action step configured to home the
microplate shaking platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Figure 14-25. Confirms Manual Control is connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Figure 14-26. Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Figure 14-27. Selecting an Orbital Microplate Shaking in Advanced Manual Control . . . . . 14-38
Figure 14-28. Using Advanced Manual Control for a continuous shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39
Figure 14-29. Using Advanced Manual Control to control a timed shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-40
Figure 14-30. Using Advanced Manual Control to run a previously defined
shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
Figure 14-31. Using Advanced Manual Control for a pulsing shake motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
Figure 14-32. Using Advanced Manual Control to stop all shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44
Figure 14-33. Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamps
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45
Figure 14-34. Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform
on an Orbital Shaker ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Figure 15-1. Positive Position ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Figure 15-2. Leveling screws for the Positive Position ALP (top-down view) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Figure 15-3. Rotational adjustment screw for the Positive Position ALP (left side view). . . . 15-6
Figure 15-4. Device Action Step for the Positive Position ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Figure 15-5. Advanced Manual Control for a Positive Position ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Figure 15-6. Labware not found at sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Figure 15-7. Labware found at sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Figure 16-1. SPE ALP with Collar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Figure 16-2. SPE Collar (Manifold), SPE ALP Base, and SPE ALP Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Figure 16-3. SPE Collar placed on the SPE Collar Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Figure 16-4. SPE Collar Stand locating holes and thumbscrews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Figure 16-5. Placing the Framing Tool Adaptor and AccuFrame on the SPE Collar Stand . . 16-8
Figure 16-6. SPE step and configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Figure 17-1. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Figure 17-2. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Figure 17-3. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide — exploded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Figure 17-4. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide showing grounding tab and screw . . . . . . . 17-7
Figure 17-5. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide rubber band placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Figure 17-6. Span-8 Disposal ALP with correct bag placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Figure 17-7. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews (bottom view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
Figure 17-8. Attaching the slide to the Span-8 Disposal ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
Figure 17-9. Span-8 Disposal ALP - ground screw placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13
Figure 17-10. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions for a Biomek FX . . . . . . . . . 17-15
Figure 17-11. Left side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Figure 17-12. Right side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
ALPs User’s Manual
xxxvi
List of Figures
Figure 18-1. Span-8 Tip Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Figure 18-2. Position Properties for the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Figure 18-3. Manual Teaching (Warning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Figure 18-4. Manual Teaching (Setup). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Figure 18-5. Manual Teaching (Teach X,Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Figure 18-6. Manual Teaching (Teach Z). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Figure 19-1. 1 x 1 Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Figure 19-2. LLS Plate (Top View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Figure 19-3. Installing an LLS Plate on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
Figure 19-4. 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the LLS plate option installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Figure 19-5. 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Figure 19-6. 1 x 3 Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Figure 19-7. 1 x 5 Passive ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Figure 20-1. Stirring ALP (side view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Figure 20-2. Stir bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Figure 20-3. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Stirring ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Figure 21-1. 1x1 Storage ALP deck positions on a Biomek FX deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Figure 21-2. 1 x 3 Storage ALP deck position on a Biomek FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Figure 21-3. Warning indicating that an ALP is about
to be placed in a position overlapping another ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Figure 21-4. Position Properties for a 1 x 3 Storage ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Figure 21-5. Position Properties after More is chosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-6
Figure 21-6. Three 1 x 1 Storage ALPs and three Standard 1 x 1 ALPs
added to a Biomek FX deck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
Figure 21-7. Framing Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Figure 21-8. Adaptor Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Figure 21-9. Teaching Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Figure 21-10. Integrated Devices step palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
Figure 21-11. Storage ALP Move step inserted into the Method View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Figure 21-12. Storage ALP Move with Advanced Controls selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
Figure 22-1. 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Figure 22-2. 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (right facing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Figure 22-3. Framing for the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Figure 22-4. Framing for the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6
Figure 22-5. Labware positioning screws on a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing) . . . . . 22-7
Figure 22-6. Labware positioning screws on a 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (right facing) . . . . 22-8
Figure 22-7. Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing) . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
Figure 22-8. Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (Left facing). . . . . . . . . . 22-10
Figure 22-9. Septum Piercing Tube Rack positioned on ALP (left facing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12
Figure 22-10. Septum Piercing Tube Rack with side plates (left facing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
Figure 22-11. Septum Piercing Tube Rack with top adapter plate (left facing) . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Figure 23-1. Tip Loader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Figure 23-2. Tip Loader ALP Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Figure 23-3. Tip Loader ALP — Pneumatic Connections on the Biomek FX Towers . . . . . . 23-5
Figure 23-4. Tip Loader ALP with locking rods extended. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7
Figure 23-5. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Tip Loader ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
List of Figures xxxvii
Figure A-1. Front of Device Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Figure A-2. Back of Device Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Figure A-3. Digital connections - attach devices here . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Figure A-4. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller with channel HV3 onA-9
Figure B-1. Source/Waste Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Figure B-2. Source/Waste Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Figure B-3. Source/Waste Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Figure B-4. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Figure B-5. Deck Editor with wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Figure B-6. Position Properties for selected wash ALP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Figure B-7. SourceWasteSensor selected in Sensor Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Figure B-8. Source/Waste Sensor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Figure B-9. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Source/Waste Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
ALPs User’s Manual
xxxix
List of Tables
Table 3-1. Example of a Method Where Bar Codes are used for Decision Making ................. 3-10
Table 3-2. Troubleshooting the Bar Code Reader ALP............................................................. 3-12
Table 4-1. Troubleshooting the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP ....................................... 4-19
Table 6-1. Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP ............................................................. 6-44
Table 6-2. Troubleshooting the Circulating Reservoir .............................................................. 6-44
Table 7-1. Minimum specifications for a Circulator Bath........................................................... 7-5
Table 7-2. Troubleshooting the Heating and Cooling ALP......................................................... 7-6
Table 10-1. Troubleshooting the Magnetic Bead ALP............................................................ 10-34
Table 11-1. Troubleshooting the Microplate Shaking ALP ...................................................... 11-9
Table 13-1. Troubleshooting the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP .............................................. 13-14
Table 14-1. Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking Speeds ........................................... 14-15
Table 14-2. Troubleshooting the Orbital Shaker ALP............................................................. 14-48
Table 15-1. Troubleshooting the Positive Position ALP ......................................................... 15-14
Table 16-1. Troubleshooting the SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP............................................... 16-12
Table 20-1. Troubleshooting the Stirring ALP .......................................................................... 20-7
Table 23-1. Troubleshooting the Tip Loader ALP ................................................................. 23-10
Table A-1. Device Controller Specifications.............................................................................. A-4
Table A-2. Troubleshooting a Device Controller ..................................................................... A-11
Table B-1. Troubleshooting a Source/Waste Sensor .................................................................B-10
ALPs User’s Manual
1-1
1
1.1
Introduction to ALPs
About This Manual
This ALPs (Automated Labware Positioners) User’s Manual provides information on
using and configuring ALPs on a Biomek Laboratory Automation Workstation. This
chapter contains information general on all ALPs, while the individual ALP chapters
contain specific hardware and software information applicable to the specific ALP.
Generally the individual chapters provide the following information:
•
Overview of the ALP
•
Installing the ALP to the deck
•
Any special hardware information on using the ALP in a method
•
Framing instructions
•
Specific information on using the ALP in a method
•
Specific information on using the ALP outside a method
•
Removing the ALP from the deck
•
Storage
•
Preventive maintenance
Since several ALPs and devices, such as a wash pump or fan, associated with ALPs
require an Device Controller to operate, an appendix on the Device Controller is
included.
1.1.1
Related User’s Manuals
The following related user’s manuals for accessing more in-depth information on the
Biomek Software and Biomek Laboratory Automation Workstations are provided as
links to this ALPs (Automated Labware Positioners) User’s Manual:
•
Biomek Software User’s Manual
•
Biomek® FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User’s Manual
•
Biomek® NX Multichannel Laboratory Automation Workstation User’s
Manual
•
Biomek® NX Span-8 Laboratory Automation Workstation User’s Manual
ALPs User’s Manual
1-2
1.2
Introduction to ALPs
ALPs Overview
Automated Labware Positioners (ALPs) are removable and interchangeable platform
structures that are installed on the Biomek deck to allow automated assays to be
performed.
ALPs are either:
•
Passive ALPs — some hold labware in place on the deck while others act as
receptacles for by-products from methods, such as system fluid and disposed
tips, tip boxes, and labware.
OR
•
Active ALPs — contain mechanisms that may hook to power and/or air
sources for mechanical operation, such as tip loading, tip washing, mixing/
stirring, shaking, and precisely positioning labware.
Note: Addresses are manually set on some active ALPs to allow the
instrument to identify the specific ALP being used. Address switches for
ALPs use hexidecimal numbering (refer to Section A.3, Setting Address
Switches).
The sections in this chapter include:
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
•
Installing and Configuring ALPs (Section 1.3)
•
Accessing ALPs in a Biomek® FX Core System Integration (Section 1.4)
•
About This Manual (Section 1.1)
Introduction to ALPs
1.3
1-3
Installing and Configuring ALPs
Each ALP requires a specific procedure for installation and configuration. This
procedure includes:
•
Physically mounting the ALP to the deck or ALP base — Instructions for
mounting each type of ALP on a deck position and for completing the
appropriate electrical, air, waste, communications, and liquid connections
are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual.
Note: The Deck Editor indicates through dashed, blue lines on which
deck positions a specific ALP may be placed (refer to the Biomek Software
User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
•
Setting up the ALP in the Biomek Software for operation — After physically
installing an ALP on the deck, some ALPs are detected on the Biomek
instrument and must be properly installed and configured in Hardware
Setup (refer to Section 1.3.1, Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup).
Note: Only Tip Loader, Stirring, Shaking, Positive Position, Orbital
Shaker, and Magnetic Bead ALPs are detected on the Biomek instrument
and must be installed in Hardware Setup. For some ALPs, devices such as
pumps or fans are also installed in Hardware Setup. Any necessary specific
configuration for these ALPs or devices is provided in the individual ALP
chapters in this manual.
•
Associating the ALP with a position — After configuring Hardware Setup
for the new ALP, the software must be told where the ALP is located on the
deck using the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
•
Framing the ALP — Using the Deck Editor, the exact coordinates of the
position of the ALP on the deck are set. Instructions for framing each type of
ALP are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual.
Note: Refer to the user’s manual for the specific Biomek instrument, for
general information on framing.
•
Configuring an ALP within a method — Using the Biomek Software, ALPs
are configured to complete required operations at specified times within a
method. Any special instructions to configure ALPs within a method are
provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manuals.
•
Controlling an ALP outside a method — Instructions for using Manual
Control to control a specific ALP outside a method are provided in the
individual ALP chapters in this manual.
Note: Initial installation and configuration of ALPs is completed by a Beckman
Coulter Service Engineer when the Biomek instrument is installed.
ALPs User’s Manual
1-4
Introduction to ALPs
1.3.1
Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup
Hardware Setup tells the Biomek Software what ALPs, devices, pods, and heads
configured on the instrument by providing a connection between the software and the
instrument. This information is established by installing, configuring and removing
devices in Hardware Setup.
After physically installing an ALP on the deck, the ALP is detected on the Biomek
instrument and must be properly installed and configured in Hardware Setup.
Note: Only Tip Loader, Stirring, Shaking, Positive Position, Orbital Shaker, and
Magnetic Bead ALPs and some devices, such as pumps and fans, must be installed in
Hardware Setup.
Most ALPs require only installation in Hardware Setup; however, some ALPs, such
as the Magnetic Bead ALP, require some configuration. The configurations required
for specific ALPs are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual.
Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup may be accomplished in two ways.
1. In Hardware Setup, right-click Devices or any device under Devices and
choose Add Device.
Note: The devices detected, but not already installed, are available to add.
2. Select the desired ALP. The ALP is added to the installed devices under Devices
in the left pane.
OR
1. Choose Add Device from the top of Hardware Setup. New Devices appears
(Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-1. New Devices displaying all detected devices
Note: All the devices detected, but not already installed, are available to add in
New Devices. Right-click on an available device and choose Select All to
select all of the available devices or Clear Selection to disregard the selection.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Introduction to ALPs
1-5
2. Select the desired detected device or devices and choose Install. The device is
added to the installed devices under Devices in the left pane.
Note: An asterisk next to a device indicates the device has been modified since the
workspace was loaded.
A blue question mark before the installed device indicates the device has not been
fully configured.
A red X before the installed device indicates the device is not detected. Make sure the
device is properly connected to a CAN port.
Note: For more information about Hardware Setup, refer to the specific user’s
manual for the instrument.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-1
2
2.1
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Overview
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP is an active ALP that washes fixed or disposable
tips on the probes of a Span-8 Pod. The ALP provides a flow of wash fluid from a
source reservoir for tip washing. A peristaltic pump circulates the fluid through the 8Channel Active Wash ALP from a source reservoir to a waste reservoir.
Information in this chapter includes the following:
•
Mounting the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP (Section 2.2).
•
Framing Instructions (Section 2.3).
•
Using an 8-Channel Active Wash ALP in a Method (Section 2.4).
•
Removing the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP (Section 2.5).
•
Storage (Section 2.6).
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 2.7).
•
Troubleshooting (Section 2.8).
ALPs User’s Manual
2-2
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Waste port
Source port
Figure 2-1. 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.2
2-3
Mounting the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
When mounted on the Biomek deck, the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP occupies 1/2 of
a standard deck position. The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP can also occupy the
remaining 1/2 ALP position that occurs when a Test Tube Rack ALP (refer to Chapter
22, Test Tube Rack ALPs) or Half-Position Disposal ALP (refer to Chapter 5, HalfPosition Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)) is installed on the Biomek deck .
Installing the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP and configuring it in Biomek Software
includes:
•
Installing the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP on the Deck (Section 2.2.1).
•
Routing Tubing for the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP (Section 2.2.2).
•
Adding a WashPump in Hardware Setup (Section 2.2.3).
•
Adding and Configuring the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP in the Deck Editor
(Section 2.2.4).
2.2.1
Installing the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
on the Deck
To mount an 8-Channel Active Wash ALP to the deck:
1. Position the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP so the locating pin on the bottom of the
ALP slips into a locating hole on the deck. Make sure the Source and Waste ports
are pointing towards the back of the instrument for easier tube routing.
2. Fasten the ALP to the deck using the Phillips mounting screw located on the base
of the ALP (Figure 2-1).
ALPs User’s Manual
2-4
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.2.2
Routing Tubing for the 8-Channel Active
Wash ALP
CAUTION: Do not kink the drainage or supply hose.
.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
CAUTION: Make sure the end of the tubing going into the waste
container is no more than 6 inches from the top of the container. If the
end of tubing is near the bottom, excessive pressure may cause liquid
to overflow onto the deck.
Tubing must be routed properly to circulate system fluid from the source container
through the syringes, tubing, and probes on the Span-8 Pod into the 8-Channel Active
Wash ALP and to the waste container. The system fluid container for the Span-8 Pod
or a separate container may be used as the source container.
Source tubing
Source port
Source container
8-Channel
Active
Wash ALP
Pump head
Waste port
Waste container
Waste tubing
Figure 2-2. Tube routing for 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Opaque PharMed® tubing is routed from the source container through the pump to
the ALP. A clear Tygon® tubing is routed from the ALP to the waste container.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2-5
To route the tubing to the peristaltic pump and 8-Channel Active Wash ALP:
1. Position the peristaltic pump at an off-deck location near the ALP.
Note: The peristaltic pump must be connected to a Device Controller (refer to
Appendix A: Device Controller).
2. Unlock the pump head by rotating the locking lever counterclockwise (from the
front of the pump).
3. Ensure that the supply container contains the desired system (cleaning) fluid.
4. Attach the source tubing to the source port on the ALP.
5. Route the source tubing off the deck by passing it through either the access holes
between the towers at the back of the instrument, or between the light curtain and
the deck on the side of the Biomek instrument.
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument or the light curtain.
6. Route the source tubing through the pump head from right to left (facing the front
of the pump).
7. Cut the source tubing to the desired length.
8. Route the source tubing from the pump head to the system fluid or source
container.
9. Lock the pump head by rotating the locking lever clockwise (from the front of
the pump).
10. Place the waste container under the lab bench or in an accessible space lower
than the instrument deck height.
11. Attach the drainage tube to the waste port on the ALP (Figure 2-1).
12. Run the opposite end of the drainage tube to the waste container by passing the
tube through either the access holes between the towers at the back of the
instrument, or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the
instrument.
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument or the light curtain.
13. Cut the drainage tube to the appropriate length to ensure there is no excess that
could cause a ‘rise’ or ‘bump’ in the drainage tubes route from the ALP to the
waste container and place it in the waste container ensuring the end of the tubing
is no more than 6 inches from the top of the container.
Note: Since the ALP is gravity fed, it is crucial that the drainage tube run
down-hill without any rises between the ALP and the waste container.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-6
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.2.3
Adding a WashPump in Hardware Setup
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP uses a peristaltic pump to wash tips. This pump
must be added in Hardware Setup as a digital device and configured with the
appropriate Device Controller.
To add a WashPump in Hardware Setup:
1. From Biomek Software, choose Instrument>Hardware Setup. Hardware
Setup appears.
2. In Hardware Setup, right-click Digital Devices or any device under Digital
Devices and choose Add Device, then select WashPump.
OR
Choose Add Device from the top of Hardware Setup. New Devices appears
(Figure 2-3). Select WashPump and choose Install. The WashPump is added
to the installed digital devices under Digital Devices in the left pane.
Figure 2-3. New Devices displaying all detected devices
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2-7
3. Select the WashPump under Digital Devices to configure it. The configuration
screen for the WashPump appears to the right in Hardware Setup (Figure 2-4).
Figure 2-4. WashPump configuration in Hardware Setup
4. In Box, select the Device Controller to which the WashPump is connected.
5. In Line, select to which high voltage (HV) port on the selected Device Controller
the WashPump is connected.
6. Choose Accept to save the changes and close Hardware Setup.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-8
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.2.4
Adding and Configuring the 8-Channel
Active Wash ALP in the Deck Editor
After adding and configuring the WashPump in Hardware Setup, the 8-Channel
Active Wash ALP must be added to the deck in the Deck Editor and the WashPump
associated as a device with the position.
To add and configure the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP in the Deck Editor:
1. In Biomek Software, choose Instrument>Deck Editor. Deck Editor appears.
2. From the ALPs Type List, select either the Span8ActiveWashRight or
Span8ActiveWashLeft.
3. Drag the selected ALP to the desired available deck position to add the ALP to
the deck.
4. Double-click the ALP to open Position Properties (Figure 2-5).
Figure 2-5. Position Properties for 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2-9
5. Choose More to display additional configuration options for the ALP (Figure 26).
Figure 2-6. Expanded Position Properties for the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
6. In Device, select the WashPump that is connected to the ALP.
7. If a Source/Waste Sensor is configured for the source and/or waste containers,
select the Sensor Device.
Note: Refer to Appendix B: Source/Waste Sensor, for more information on the
Source/Waste Sensor.
8. Choose OK to save changes and close Position Properties.
9. Choose Save to save changes and close Deck Editor.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-10
2.3
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Framing Instructions
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP must be manually framed to ensure that the tips and
probes on the Span-8 Pod access the cleaning wells of the ALP without causing any
damage to the tips, probes, pod, or ALP. Since the cleaning wells of the ALP are
relatively small, it is crucial that the tips on the probes be framed as accurately as
possible.
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP is framed using Biomek® NX Manual Framing
Wizard, which is accessed through Position Properties in the Deck Editor. This
process involves:
¾
FX — The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP on a Biomek FX instrument is
framed using the Biomek® FX Manual Framing Wizard. The instructions
are the same.
•
loading disposable tips to the probes, if necessary
•
aligning disposable or fixed tips with the framing targets on the 8-Channel
Active Wash ALP (Figure 2-7).
Framing targets
Align the tips to
these small white
dots on the ALP.
Figure 2-7. Framing targets on 8-Channel Active Wash ALP (top view)
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2-11
To frame using Biomek® NX Manual Framing Wizard:
¾
FX — The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP on a Biomek FX instrument is
framed using the Biomek® FX Manual Framing Wizard. The instructions
are the same.
1. Choose Start>Programs>Beckman Coulter>Biomek Software to open
Biomek Software.
2. From the Instrument menu, choose Deck Editor. Deck Editor appears (Figure
2-8).
Figure 2-8. Deck Editor
3. Open Position Properties for the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP by doubleclicking on the deck position. Position Properties appears (Figure 2-9).
Figure 2-9. Position Properties for an 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
4. In Name, verify that the ALP is assigned a unique name.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-12
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
5. Choose Manual Teach. Biomek® NX Manual Framing Wizard opens with a
Warning (Figure 2-10).
Note: On the left side of Manual Framing Wizard, a list of steps required to
complete the teaching process is displayed. As the steps of Manual Framing
Wizard are accessed, the steps are highlighted on the left.
Figure 2-10. Manual Framing Wizard — Warning
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2-13
6. Choose Next. Biomek® NX Manual Framing Wizard — Setup displays
either Figure 2-11 or Figure 2-12, depending on whether or not tips are already
loaded onto the pod.
Figure 2-11. Manual Framing Wizard if tips are not already loaded.
Figure 2-12. Manual Framing Wizard if tips are loaded
ALPs User’s Manual
2-14
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
7. If no tips are loaded, in Load tips from the, select the type of tips to load and the
position on which the tip box is located (Figure 2-13).
8. Choose Next to continue to the next screen. Biomek NX Manual Framing
Wizard — Teach X,Y appears (Figure 2-13).
Figure 2-13. Manual Framing Wizard — Teach X, Y
9. To align the tips in the X- and Y-axes with the framing target on top of the ALP,
lower the tips in the Z-axis until they are approximately 1 mm above the top of
the ALP.
Note: Since tip height is set in the next step in the Manual Teaching process, it
is safe to move the pod to any height to make aligning the tips with the
microplate easier.
10. Visually verify the physical position of the tips in relation to the framing targets
on top of the ALP.
11. Adjust the position of the tip to align it with the framing target by either:
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
•
Using the Graphic Alignment Tool (Section 2.3.1).
•
Using the Delta Value and Directional Buttons (Section 2.3.2).
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.3.1
2-15
Using the Graphic Alignment Tool
The graphic alignment tool (Figure 2-14) is used to instruct Biomek Software of the
current position of the tips in relation to the framing target on top of the ALP. Biomek
Software uses the information it is given to move the pod so the tips are directly
above the target position.
Graphic alignment tool
The graphic alignment tool is a visual representation of
the tip (small circle) and the framing target on the top
of the ALP. The small circle is moved until it
represents the tip’s current physical location in relation
to the framing target on the top of the ALP.
Figure 2-14. Manual Teaching the X- and Y-axes
To use the graphic alignment tool:
1. Drag the small circle until it represents the tip’s physical position in relation to
the framing target on top of the ALP, represented by the intersection of the two
lines in the graphical display.
Note: The small circle represents the tip on the pod. The objective is to provide
the software with a representation of the tip’s position in relation to the framing
target on top of the ALP. The software uses this graphical representation to know
approximately how far in any direction the pod must move to align the tips with
the framing target on top of the ALP.
2. Select Go. The pod moves in accordance with the position of the small circle in
relation to the intersection of the two lines.
Note: When the move is completed, the small circle resets itself to the center of
the graphical display. The values displayed in Total Moved from Start (cm)
changes each time steps 1 and 2 are completed. If desired, the values in Total
Moved from Start (cm) can be reset to zero by selecting Reset.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-16
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
3. Visually verify the position of the tips on the pod in relation to the framing target
on top of the ALP. If the tips are still not accurately positioned above the framing
target, repeat steps 1 and 2 until they are accurately positioned above the framing
target.
Note: The tips may also be aligned with the framing target using the delta value
and directional buttons (refer to Section 2.3.2, Using the Delta Value and
Directional Buttons).
4. Once the tip is aligned with the framing target on top of the ALP, choose Next to
continue. Biomek® NX Manual Framing Wizard displays Teach Z (refer to
Section 2.3.3, Framing the Z-Axis).
2.3.2
Using the Delta Value and Directional
Buttons
The tip can be positioned manually using the delta values and directional buttons to
align it with the framing target on top of the ALP. Pressing one of the directional
buttons moves the pod in that direction by the distance specified in Delta. Position
the tips above the framing target on top of the ALP.
Delta value
The magnitude of change applied to the tips
each time a directional button is selected.
Directional buttons
The directional buttons move the
head assembly by the amount
shown in Delta with each press of
a button.
Figure 2-15. Manual Teaching the X- and Y-axes
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2-17
To use the delta value and directional buttons to position the tip:
1. In Delta, select the magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a
directional button is selected (Figure 2-15).
Note: The default Delta value is 0.05 cm. If the tips are a considerable distance
from the desired location, increase the distance traveled by increasing the Delta
value (maximum setting is 1.0 cm). If the tips are almost to the desired location,
reduce the Delta value to fine tune the position (minimum setting is 0.005 cm).
2. Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically
move the tips into position over the framing target on top of the ALP (Figure 215).
Note: Each time a directional button is selected, the pod and tips move the
distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction.
Note: The tips can be physically positioned over the framing target using:
•
•
•
the directional buttons in Manual Teach.
the directional keys on the keyboard.
the directional keys on the numeric keypad.
The directional buttons displayed in Manual Teach parallel the keys on the
numeric keypad. More specifically, Fwd. correlates to the ‘1’ on the numeric
keypad, while Down is found on the ‘2’, Left is found on the ‘4’, Right on ‘6’,
Up on ‘8’, and Back on ‘9’.
3. Visually verify the position of the tips on the pod in relation to the framing target
on top of the ALP. If the tips are still not accurately positioned above the framing
target on top of the ALP, repeat steps 1 and 2 until they are accurately positioned
above the framing target.
Note: The tips may also be aligned with the framing target using the graphic
alignment tool (refer to Section 2.3.1, Using the Graphic Alignment Tool).
4. Once the tips are aligned with the framing target, choose Next to continue.
Biomek® NX Manual Framing Wizard displays Teach Z (refer to Section
2.3.3, Framing the Z-Axis).
ALPs User’s Manual
2-18
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.3.3
Framing the Z-Axis
After the X- and Y-axes are framed, the Z-axis must be framed to ensure tips are
washed at the desired height. The final screen in Biomek® NX Manual Framing
Wizard is for framing the Z-axis (Figure 2-16).
Figure 2-16. Manual Teaching (Teach Z)
1. In Delta, select the magnitude of change applied to the pod each time a
directional button is selected (Figure 2-16).
Note: The default Delta value is 0.05 cm. If the tip is a considerable distance
above the position, increase the distance traveled by increasing the Delta value
(maximum setting is 1.0 cm). If the tip is almost to the desired location, reduce
the Delta value (minimum setting is 0.005 cm).
Note: Since the X- and Y-axes were framed previously, it is safe to move the
pod in the X- and Y-axes if it makes framing the pod in the Z- axis easier.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2-19
2. Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically
move the pod down until the tip just touches the framing target on top of the ALP.
Note: Each time a directional button is selected, the pod and tips move the
distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction.
Note: The tip can be can physically positioned over the framing target on top of
the ALP:
•
•
•
the directional buttons in Manual Teach.
the directional keys on the keyboard.
the directional keys on the numeric keypad.
The directional buttons displayed in Manual Teach parallel the keys on the
numeric keypad. More specifically, Fwd. correlates to the ‘1’ on the numeric
keypad, while Down is found on the ‘2’, Left is found on the ‘4’, Right on ‘6’,
Up on ‘8’, and Back on ‘9’.
3. Once the tip is just touching the framing target, select Finish. The pod moves up
to its maximum height in the Z-axis, Manual Teaching closes, and Position
Properties appears (Figure 2-9).
4. Choose OK to save the framing information and close Position Properties.
5. If more than one 8-Channel Active Wash ALPs are installed on the deck, repeat
the procedure to frame any additional 8-Channel Active Wash ALPs using
Manual Teach.
6. Choose Save to save framing information for all positions and close the Deck
Editor (Figure 2-8).
Note: Choosing Cancel loses all changes to the deck, including framing
information, since the Deck Editor was opened.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-20
2.4
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Using an 8-Channel Active Wash ALP in a
Method
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP is used automatically when the a Transfer or
Combine step is configured to wash tips in the Tip Handling configuration, or a
Span-8 Wash Tips step is inserted into the method. However, if multiple wash ALPs
are installed on the deck, some extra steps are required to ensure the desired wash
ALP is used for each wash operation.
2.4.1
Configuring Multiple 8-Channel Active
Wash ALPs on an Instrument
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALPs are referred to as wash ALPs in the Biomek
Software. To ensure that the correct wash ALP is used on an instrument with two or
more wash ALPs, each wash ALP must be configured to use a unique liquid type.
To configure a unique liquid type for a wash ALP:
1. In the Liquid Type Editor, create a new liquid type or copy an existing liquid
type for the wash ALP; for example, create a new liquid type called
WS1_Liquid.
Note: Each liquid type must have a unique name; for example, WS1_Liquid or
WS2_Liquid.
Note: Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 8.2, Creating New
Liquid Types, for more information on creating new liquid types, and Section 8.4,
Copying and Pasting Liquid Types Within a Project File, for more information on
copying liquid types.
2. In the Instrument Setup step, double-click the desired wash ALP. Labware
Properties for the wash ALP appears (Figure 2-17).
Figure 2-17. Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP
3. In Liquid Type:, select the unique liquid type created for that wash ALP; for
example, WS1_Liquid.
4. Choose OK to save the change and close Labware Properties.
5. For each additional wash ALP, repeat steps 2 through 4, selecting the appropriate
liquid type for each wash ALP.
Note: Each wash ALP must use a unique liquid type.
6. In any steps where tips are washed, such as Transfer or Combine, select a
specific wash ALP by selecting the appropriate liquid type in Wash tips in.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
2.5
2-21
Removing the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
WARNING: Always wear protective gloves when draining the 8-Channel
Active Wash ALP of fluid.
WARNING: The waste fluid may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
To remove the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP:
1. Turn the waste and source ports on the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP up so that no
fluid leaks from the ALP onto the deck.
2. Detach the drainage tube from the waste port on the ALP.
3. Raise the drainage tube until the fluid in the tube drains into the waste container.
4. Remove the tubing from the Biomek NX instrument deck and the waste
container.
5. Detach the source tubing from the source port on the ALP.
6. Remove the source tubing from the deck carefully so no liquid remaining in the
tubing spills onto the deck.
7. Unlock the pump head by rotating the locking lever counterclockwise (from the
front of the pump).
8. Remove the source tubing from the pump head.
9. Drain any fluid remaining in the source tubing into an approved waste container
or back into the source container.
10. Loosen the Phillips screws on the ALP base from the deck.
11. Remove the ALP from the deck by lifting until the locating pin clears the
locating hole on the deck.
WARNING: The cleaning wells and reservoir of the 8-Channel Active
Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals and fluids. Follow the
appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety
officer to dispose of the fluid.
12. Carefully empty the ALP of fluids by turning it over and pouring the waste into
an approved waste container.
ALPs User’s Manual
2-22
2.6
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
Storage
Return the 8-Channel ActiveWash ALP to the original packing materials and store in
a dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: Allow the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP to air-dry before returning it to the
original packing materials.
Store the peristaltic pump and source and waste tubing according to the instructions
from the manufacturer.
2.7
Preventive Maintenance
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety
officer. Observe the following guidelines:
•
Periodically clean the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP by filling the supply
container with a bleach solution and running it through the ALP.
•
Check with tubing manufacturer for chemical compatibility information.
•
Periodically inspect the tubing for wear and stress fractures.
•
Periodically inspect the tubing connections for leakage.
•
Replace tubing periodically, or as needed.
Note: Refer to the pump and tubing manufacturer user manuals for their
recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
2.8
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
Table 2-1. Troubleshooting the 8-Channel Active Wash ALP
IF
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
THEN
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP is
not functioning correctly
Make sure that the hoses and cables
are attached to the ALP properly.
The 8-Channel Active Wash ALP is
not draining waste fluid
Look into the wells and reservoir and
verify they are not clogged.
3-1
3
3.1
Bar Code Reader ALP
Overview
WARNING: CLASS II LASER PRODUCT THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS TO
APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF 21 CFR 1040 AT THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE.
The Biomek Bar Code Reader ALP (Figure 3-1) is an active ALP that scans bar code
labels applied to the narrow sides of labware. The Biomek Bar Code Reader is
powered through an external power supply.
Note: Due to the bar code reader weight and its extension beyond the edge of the
Biomek deck, a counterweight has been added to the opposing side of the Bar Code
Reader ALP.
The following bar codes are supported by the Bar Code Reader:
•
Code 39
•
Codabar
•
I 2 of 5
•
UPC/EAN
•
Code 128
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP (Section 3.2)
•
Applying Labels to Labware (Section 3.3)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 3.4)
•
Using the Bar Code Reader ALP in a Method (Section 3.5)
•
Removing the Bar Code Reader ALP (Section 3.6)
•
Storage (Section 3.7)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 3.8)
ALPs User’s Manual
3-2
Bar Code Reader ALP
Bar code
reader unit
Labware is
positioned here
Counterweight
Thumbscrews
Figure 3-1. Bar Code Reader ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Bar Code Reader ALP
3.2
3-3
Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP
Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP includes choosing the deck position on the deck,
mounting the ALP to the deck, and properly aligning the laser.
3.2.1
Deck Positions for the Bar Code Reader
ALP
Because of its size, the Bar Code Reader ALP is mounted on one of the outside deck
positions, so that the Bar Code Reader itself extends beyond the edge of the Biomek
deck. Use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine available deck positions
when mounting the Bar Code Reader ALP on the Biomek instrument.
3.2.2
Mounting the Bar Code Reader ALP
WARNING: Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam. Never look directly
into the laser beam, and never leave the laser on, open, or unattended.
WARNING: Always have the laser module access cover, located on the
Bar Code Reader, in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser
module.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To mount the Bar Code Reader ALP, complete the following:
Note: The Bar Code Reader ALP uses a cable that splits into two destinations:
power and communications.
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before adding the Bar Code Reader
ALP to the deck.
2. Position the Bar Code Reader ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP
slip into locating holes on the deck.
3. Fasten the Bar Code Reader ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base
of the ALP.
4. Connect the power line of the split cable to a power supply using the included
power cord.
5. Connect the power supply to an AC outlet.
Note: Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
6. Connect the serial communication cable to a communication port on the back of
the PC.
ALPs User’s Manual
3-4
Bar Code Reader ALP
3.2.3
Aligning the Bar Code Reader ALP Laser
Beam
WARNING: Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam. Never look directly
into the laser beam, and never leave the laser on, open, or unattended.
WARNING: Always have the laser module access cover, located on the
Bar Code Reader, in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser
module.
Appropriate alignment of the Bar Code Reader ALP laser beam accommodates
scanning of slightly skewed labels and requires little adjustment to the Bar Code
Reader itself.
To align the laser beam correctly, complete the following:
1. Position a piece of labware labeled with a bar code on the Bar Code Reader ALP.
2. Visually verify that the red laser beam is scanning across the bar code. If not, the
Bar Code Reader position needs to be adjusted.
3. The laser beam should pass over all vertical bars on the bar code label
simultaneously. Correct and incorrect laser/label alignments are shown below
(Figure 3-2). In the graphic, the top laser is aligned correctly, while the bottom
laser is not.
Correct Laser
Alignment
Incorrect Laser
Alignment
Figure 3-2. Bar Code Reader — Laser beam position over bar code label.
4. Turn the height adjustment screw under the bar code reader on Bar Code Reader
ALP until the laser beam is correctly aligned on the bar code.
WARNING: If labware other than that specified in the Labware Type
Editor is used, an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur.
WARNING: If a label is applied by any means other than the SAGIAN™
Print & Apply device, an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Bar Code Reader ALP
3.3
3-5
Applying Labels to Labware
Incorrect label positioning or poor quality labels can result in inaccurate reading of
bar codes; therefore, the use of an automated bar code application instrument, such as
the SAGIAN™ Print & Apply or prelabeled microplates, is recommended. Increasing
the vertical height of the bars on the label is also suggested to enhance the accuracy of
the bar code reader.
Note: If a label needs to be applied to the microplate, it is recommended that a
SAGIAN™ Print & Apply device be used to properly position the label on the
microplate (Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-3. Bar Code Reader — Label positioning on a microplate.
3.4
Framing Instructions
Frame the Bar Code Reader ALP according to the framing instructions in the user’s
manual for the Biomek instrument upon which the ALP is installed.
ALPs User’s Manual
3-6
3.5
Bar Code Reader ALP
Using the Bar Code Reader ALP in a Method
To read bar code labels in a method, a Bar Code Reader step must be configured.
Move Labware steps move labware with bar code labels to read to and from the bar
code reader as needed.
The Bar Code Reader step is available on the Integrated Devices step palette
immediately after performing the Bar Code Reader software installation (Figure 3-4).
Integrated Devices
step palette
The steps available on this
palette depend on which
integrated devices are
installed on the system.
Figure 3-4. The Integrated Devices step palette shown in the main editor
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Bar Code Reader ALP
3-7
To read bar code labels in a method:
1. To move labware to the Bar Code Reader ALP, insert a Move Labware step into
the Method View and configure as desired (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Section 15.4, Move Labware Step).
CAUTION: Do not use the Bar Code Reader step under the SILAS
category in the Step Palette Builder. The Bar Code Reader Step from the
Integrated Devices step palette must be used to ensure the Bar Code
Reader operates properly.
2. Insert a Bar Code Reader step into the Method View (Figure 3-5).
Figure 3-5. Bar Code Reader step inserted in the Method View
3. In Using the Bar Code Reader at position, select the bar code reader to scan
bar codes.
ALPs User’s Manual
3-8
Bar Code Reader ALP
4. Select the desired bar code reading option:
•
Initialize — establishes communication between Biomek Software and
the ALP only; no bar code is read. To read bar codes, insert another Bar
Code Reader step into the method and configure it with the desired bar
code reading option.
Note: By default, Biomek Software is configured to establish
communication with the ALP automatically at the start of each method
run. Initializing the ALP with a Bar Code Reader step is required only
when the default configuration has been manually changed to disable
automatic loading of the BarcodeReader SILAS module.
•
Read bar code for logging — the bar code is saved in the pipetting
logs (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Sections 26.2.3,
Pipetting Log, 26.2.4, Span8Pipetting Log (FX, NX-S8 only), and
26.3.6, UnifiedPipetting Log Contents).
•
Read bar code for decision making — the results of the bar code
read determine the next operation performed in the method. Refer to
Section 3.5.1, Configuring a Method Where Bar Codes are Read for
Decision Making, for an example of how this option may be used in a
method.
5. When Read bar code for logging or Read bar code for decision making is
selected, select Flag error and stop when bar code is not read to stop the
method immediately and notify users that the bar code was not read successfully.
6. When Read bar code for decision making is selected, in Use. . .for method
validation, enter a substitute bar code value to be used during method validation.
Validation can be performed satisfactorily only when a substitute value is
entered. Refer to Section 3.5.1.1, Validating Methods When Read Bar Codes for
Decision Making is Selected, for detailed information.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Bar Code Reader ALP
3.5.1
3-9
Configuring a Method Where Bar Codes are
Read for Decision Making
When Read bar code for decision making is selected in a Bar Code Reader step,
the results of the bar code read determine which operations that follow in the method
are performed. The example method shown in Figure 3-6 is configured to transfer
liquid from source plates to destination plates only when both plates have the correct
bar codes.
Bar codes are read for both plates and then compared using an expression configured
in an If step. When the bar codes are correct, the transfer is performed. When they are
incorrect, the method pauses and displays a message that tells users the bar codes do
not match. Table 3-1 provides a detailed description of the example method
configuration broken down by the numbered sections shown in Figure 3-6.
Note: Because reading bar codes for decision making creates a dependent operation
based on the results of the bar codes read, the validation process during method
building will stop while waiting for the results of the read before continuing. Since
bar codes are not read during validation, the software does not know which operation
to validate next.
To ensure validation completes satisfactorily, the Bar Code Reader step provides
the option to enter a value that is substituted in place of actual bar codes during
validation (refer to Section 3.5.1.1, Validating Methods When Read Bar Codes for
Decision Making is Selected).
1
2
Bar Code Reader
ALP (BR1)
3
Destination
plate (P4)
Source
plate (P5)
Figure 3-6. A method configured to read bar codes for decision making
ALPs User’s Manual
3-10
Bar Code Reader ALP
Table 3-1. Example of a Method Where Bar Codes are used for Decision Making
Step
Description
Actions
1
Move the source plate to the Bar
Code Reader ALP, read the bar code,
then move the plate back to the
original deck position.
1. Configure a Move Labware step to move the
plate Source from P5 to the Bar Code Reader
ALP (BR1) (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Section 15.4, Move Labware Step).
2. Configure a Bar Code Reader step to Read
bar code for decision making.
3. Configure a Move Labware step to move the
source plate from BR1 back to P5.
2
Move the destination plate to the Bar
Code Reader ALP, read the bar code,
then move the plate back to the
original deck position.
1. Configure a Move Labware step to move the
plate Dest A from P4 to the Bar Code Reader
ALP (BR1).
2. Configure a Bar Code Reader step to Read
bar code for decision making.
3. Configure a Move Labware step to move the
destination plate from the BR1 back to P4.
3
Configure an If step to evaluate the
bar codes. In this method, the source
and destination plates must have the
same base bar code; for example,
1000. All destination plates must end
with _A; for example 1000_A.
When the bar codes match, a
Transfer substep within the If step
transfers liquid from the source plate
to the destination plate. When the bar
codes do not match, A Pause
substep stops the method and
displays a message prompt to users.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
1. Configure an If step with the VBScript
expression: Properties("P5").Barcode =
Properties("P4").Barcode & "_A". (refer to the
Biomek Software User’s Manual, Section 17.7, If
Step).
2. Under the Then substep, insert a Transfer step
and configure as desired (refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Section 15.3,
Configuring Transfer and Combine Steps).
3. Under the Else substep, insert a Pause step
configured to pause the instrument for an
indefinite period of time and display a message
prompt (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Section 15.5.2, Pausing the Whole
System and Displaying a Message).
Bar Code Reader ALP
3.5.1.1
3-11
Validating Methods When Read Bar Codes for
Decision Making is Selected
Reading bar codes for decision making creates a dependent operation based on the
results of the bar codes read. Since bar codes are not read during the validation
process during method building, the process will stop because the software does not
know which operation to validate next.
To ensure validation completes satisfactorily, the Bar Code Reader step provides
the option to enter a value that is substituted in place of actual bar codes during
validation.
To configure a substitute value used during validation:
1. In Use. . .for method validation, enter a substitute bar code value to be used
during method validation; for example, ABCD.
2. In an If step, enter a VBScript expression that checks for the substitute bar code;
for example:
•
= (Labware(“BR1”).Properties.Barcode = “ABCD”) checks for
an exact match to ABCD.
•
= (Left (Labware(“BR1”).Properties.Barcode,3) = “ABC”)
checks for any barcode beginning with ABC. In this expression, Left
instructs the software to begin the match from the first (leftmost)
character in the substitute bar code; “3” instructs the software to look at
only the first three characters in the substitute barcode.
Note: An If step has two branches: Then and Else. Because both example
expressions used in this section result in “true,” only the substeps in the Then
branch are validated. To validate the substeps in the Else branch, enter an
expression, such as = (Labware(“BR1”).Properties.Barcode = “WXYZ”),
that results in “false,” then perform a second validation run.
ALPs User’s Manual
3-12
3.6
Bar Code Reader ALP
Removing the Bar Code Reader ALP
WARNING: Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam. Never look directly
into the laser beam, and never leave the laser on, open, or unattended.
WARNING: Always have the laser module access cover, located on the
Bar Code Reader, in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser
module.
To remove the Bar Code Reader ALP, complete the following:
1. Power down the Biomek instrument before removing the Bar Code Reader ALP
2. Disconnect the interface cable from the back of the PC attached to the Biomek
system.
3. Disconnect the power line of the split cable from a wall outlet.
4. Detach the split cable from the cable extending from the back of the Bar Code
Reader unit.
5. Remove any labware from the Bar Code Reader ALP, being careful not to spill
any residual liquid.
6. Loosen the thumbscrew s on the base of the ALP.
7. Lift the Bar Code Reader ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins
from the locating holes on the deck.
3.7
Storage
Return the Bar Code Reader ALP to the original packing materials, and store in a dry,
dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Bar Code Reader ALP to air-dry before returning it
to the original packing materials.
3.8
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the Bar Code Reader ALP without first contacting a
Beckman Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 3-2. Troubleshooting the Bar Code Reader ALP
IF
The Bar Code Reader ALP is not
functioning correctly
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
THEN
Make sure the power and
communication cables are attached to
the Bar Code Reader ALP properly.
4-1
4
4.1
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir
ALP
Overview
The Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP is an active ALP featuring a reservoir that
can be drained and refilled automatically using steps in a Biomek Software method or
manually using Advanced Manual Control (Figure 4-1). The ALP includes the
reservoir, which may be placed in any standard position on the Biomek instrument
deck, and the Automatic Reservoir Controller, which sits off deck. The controller
houses the peristaltic pump head and connections between the ALP and the Biomek
instrument.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP (Section 4.2).
•
Framing Instructions (Section 4.3).
•
Using the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP in a Method (Section 4.4).
•
Controlling the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP Outside a Method
(Section 4.5).
•
Removing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP From the Deck
(Section 4.6).
•
Storage (Section 4.7).
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 4.8).
•
Troubleshooting (Section 4.9).
ALPs User’s Manual
4-2
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
Sensor window
(inside reservoir chamber;
not visible in this view)
Sensor
Inlet/outlet
fitting
Figure 4-1. Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP mounted on a 1x1 Passive ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.2
4-3
Installing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
Installing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP includes:
•
Installing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir on the Deck (Section 4.2.1).
•
Setting up the Automatic Reservoir Controller (Section 4.2.2).
4.2.1
Installing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir
on the Deck
A reservoir stand is not included with the ALP. The reservoir may be placed on a
standard passive ALP, such as a 1 x 1, in any standard deck position. The reservoir
has no specified left and right orientation, which allows it to be positioned facing
either direction.
To install the reservoir on the deck:
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting
any ALP.
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument.
2. Place the reservoir on an existing passive ALP in any standard deck position.
3. When placed on a high-density 4 x 3 passive ALP, the reservoir must occupy one
of the outside positions to allow space for the tubing and sensor leads to be
routed off the deck.
4. Attach the tubing to the inlet/outlet fitting on the reservoir (Figure 4-1).
5. Route the tubing and sensor leads off the deck through one of the access holes in
the back of the instrument.
¾
FX — The tubing may also be routed between the light curtain and deck
along the front of the instrument. Be sure the tubing does not interfere with
the light curtain or the movement of a Biomek FX bridge.
CAUTION: Do not place the Automatic Reservoir Controller or the
supply container on the Biomek instrument deck.
6. Place the Automatic Reservoir Controller at an off-deck location near the ALP.
7. Place the supply container at an off-deck location near the controller, in an
accessible position lower than the Biomek instrument height.
4.2.2
Setting up the Automatic Reservoir
Controller
The Automatic Reservoir Controller houses the peristaltic pump head, sensor
amplifier, and connections between the ALP and Biomek instrument.
Setting up the Automatic Reservoir Controller includes:
•
Mounting the Peristaltic Pump Head and Routing the Tubing (Section
4.2.2.1).
•
Connecting the CAN Communications Cables and Sensor Leads (Section
4.2.2.2).
•
Calibrating the Sensor Amplifier Sensitivity (Section 4.2.2.3).
ALPs User’s Manual
4-4
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.2.2.1
Mounting the Peristaltic Pump Head and Routing
the Tubing
The pump head must be installed on the controller before routing the tubing. No tools
are required to mount the pump head.
To mount the pump head and route the tubing:
WARNING: Turn off the pump drive and disconnect the CAN cables
before installing or removing the pump head or tubing.
1. Place the controller on the back side so that the ports and mounting holes are
facing upward.
2. Insert the thumbscews into the pump head (Figure 4-2). The thumbscrews
protrude from the back of the pump head.
Motor shaft
Locking
lever
Pump
head
Pump
rotor
Mounting
holes
Thumbscrews
Figure 4-2. Mounting the peristaltic pump head on the controller
3. Align the thumbscrews with the mounting holes on the controller.
4. Turn the thumbscrews until the threads catch in the mounting holes, but do not
tighten them further.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4-5
5. Push the locking lever to the left to open the pump, and rotate the rotor slowly in
either direction until it aligns with the notch in the motor shaft. The pump head
rests flush against the controller when the pump rotor and motor shaft are
properly aligned.
Note: Refer to the pump head manufacturer’s instructions for more information.
6. Tighten the thumbscrews until the pump head is firmly attached to the controller.
7. Place the controller back on the base.
8. Push the locking lever to the left to open the pump, if necessary.
9. Route the tubing so that it runs right to left from the reservoir to the supply
container (Figure 4-3).
Tubing
retainers
Locking lever in
closed position
Figure 4-3. Tubing routed correctly through pump head
10. Push the locking lever to the right to lock the pump head closed (Figure 4-3).
11. If necessary, adjust the tubing retainers by pushing them into the pump head body
slightly, and then down until firmly in contact with the tubing.
Note: Refer to the pump manufacturer’s instructions for more information.
12. Attach the free end of the tubing to the fitting on the container.
ALPs User’s Manual
4-6
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.2.2.2
Connecting the CAN Communications Cables
and Sensor Leads
The Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP uses a CAN communications connection to
communicate with and draw power from the Biomek instrument. The sensor leads
from the reservoir connect to the transmitter and receiver ports on the sensor
amplifier.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before connecting
CAN communication cables.
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
2. Plug one end of the CAN communications cable into either of the two connectors
labeled “CAN PORT” on the controller (Figure 4-4).
Note: When possible, short CAN cables should be used when connecting
devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument.
CAN ports
Address
switches
Sensor
amplifier
Amplifier
receiver port
Amplifier
transmitter port
Figure 4-4. Automatic Reservoir Controller ports
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4-7
3. Verify the ADR1 address switch is set to 1.
4. Set ADR2 to a unique address between zero (0) and F, if multiple Drainable/
Refillable Reservoir ALPs are on the deck.
Note: ADR2 is set to a default address of zero (0). If only one Drainable/
Refillable Reservoir ALP is on the deck, leave the setting at zero (0).
5. Connect the other end of the CAN cable to a CAN port on the Biomek instrument
or another active ALP to create a chain.
6. Insert both sensor leads about 1/2” (13 mm) into the 2.2 mm holes in the supplied
fiber cutter (Figure 4-5).
2.2 mm
holes
Press down
to cut leads
Figure 4-5. Fiber cutter
7. Press down on the top of the cutter to cut the leads simultaneously.
8. On the controller, use the supplied screwdriver to loosen the screw to the left of
the sensor amplifier receiver and transmitter ports (Figure 4-4). This screw
secures the sensor leads to the amplifier.
ALPs User’s Manual
4-8
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
9. Identify the transmitter and receiver sensor leads either by the size of the colored
dots printed along the length of the lead, or by the fiber core:
•
Dots printed on leads — The lead with the larger dots connects to
amplifier transmitter port; the lead with smaller dots connects to the
amplifier receiver port.
•
Fiber core — Look at the cut ends of the fiber leads (Figure 4-6). The
lead with a solid core connects to the amplifier transmitter port; the lead
with several fibers (multi-core) connects to the amplifier receiver port.
Receiver port
Receiver lead
(multi-core)
Transmitter lead
(solid core)
Transmitter port
Figure 4-6. Identifying the fiber optic leads
10. Insert the leads into the ports until they stop, and tighten the screw to the left of
the ports until the leads are secured.
11. Turn on power to the Biomek instrument.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.2.2.3
4-9
Calibrating the Sensor Amplifier Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor amplifier must be calibrated before the Drainable/
Refillable Reservoir can be used in a method. Calibrating the sensitivity of the sensor
amplifier is recommended each time a different type of liquid is used in the reservoir
and anytime the draining and refilling process is not working correctly.
Note: The Biomek instrument must be turned on to supply power to the ALP during
calibration.
To calibrate the sensitivity:
1. On the controller, locate the amplifier sensitivity adjustment dial, and use the
supplied screwdriver to slowly turn the dial clockwise until it stops (Figure 4-7).
Sensitivity
indicator LED
Sensitivity
adjustment dial
Figure 4-7. Calibrating the sensor amplifier sensitivity
2. Manually fill the reservoir with the desired liquid until the liquid level covers at
least half of the reservoir sensor window.
3. Use the supplied screwdriver to slowly turn the sensitivity adjustment dial
counterclockwise. When the sensitivity indicator LED turns on, stop turning the
dial immediately (Figure 4-7).
Note: If the LED does not turn on, make sure the sensor leads are connected to
the correct ports on the amplifier (refer to Section 4.2.2.2, Connecting the CAN
Communications Cables and Sensor Leads).
ALPs User’s Manual
4-10
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4. Manually drain the reservoir and observe if the indicator LED turns off.
5. If the indicator LED turned off, manually fill the reservoir again. If the LED turns
on when the liquid level covers at least half the sensor window, the sensitivity
calibration is complete.
OR
If the indicator LED did not turn off when the reservoir was drained, repeat the
steps in this section again.
4.3
Framing Instructions
Frame the passive ALP the reservoir occupies according to the instructions in the
appropriate hardware manual. Biomek Software treats the reservoir as a piece of
labware, and does not require additional framing.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.4
4-11
Using the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP in
a Method
To use the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP in a method, first it must be added to
the list of installed devices in Hardware Setup (refer to Section 1.3.1, Installing an
ALP in Hardware Setup). Once added to the list, no additional configuration is
required in Hardware Setup.
CAUTION: Prior to running a method, make sure there is enough fluid
for the method in the container.
Using the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP in a method includes:
•
Configuring an Instrument Setup Step for a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir
ALP (Section 4.4.1).
•
Configuring a Device Action Step for a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
(Section 4.4.2).
4.4.1
Configuring an Instrument Setup Step for a
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
In a method using a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP, an Instrument Setup step
located at the start of the method is necessary for:
•
Adding a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir to the Deck (Section 4.4.1.1).
•
Configuring Labware Properties for a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir
(Section 4.4.1.2).
ALPs User’s Manual
4-12
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.4.1.1
Adding a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir to the
Deck
To add a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir to the deck:
1. Insert an Instrument Setup step at the start of the method.
OR
Select the first Instrument Setup step found in the method. The Instrument
Setup step configuration appears (Figure 4-8).
Note: The first Instrument Setup step must be located before any pod
movement in a method for obstacle avoidance.
Labware Category
Used to filter labware types
to display only labware in
the selected category.
DrainableRefillableReservoir
labware type
Figure 4-8. Configuring an Instrument Setup step for a
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir
2. In Labware Category, choose Reservoir to display labware in the Reservoir
category only.
3. Drag a DrainableRefillableReservoir labware type onto an available
standard position.
Note: The reservoir should only be mounted on the outside positions of a 4x3
High-Density Passive ALP; the two inner positions do not provide adequate
space to correctly route the tubing and sensor leads.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.4.1.2
4-13
Configuring Labware Properties for a Drainable/
Refillable Reservoir
The Drainable/Refillable Reservoir is a piece of labware and may have parameters
configured using Labware Properties.
To configure Labware Properties:
1. Double-click the DrainableRefillableReservoir labware type.
OR
Right-click on the DrainableRefillableReservoir labware type and choose
Properties from the menu. Labware Properties appears (Figure 4-9).
Figure 4-9. Labware Properties for a drainable/refillable reservoir
2. In Name, enter a name for the reservoir.
Note: When a deck is populated by numerous pieces of labware, naming
labware is recommended. Names should be descriptive of the contents of the
labware or the work being accomplished during the method. Naming labware in a
meaningful fashion may reduce confusion. Names given to pieces of labware
may be entered as variables in other step configurations within the method.
3. In Device, choose the appropriate DrainableRefillableReservoir installed in
Hardware Setup.
4. Choose OK to close Labware Properties and save changes.
OR
Choose Cancel to close Labware Properties without saving changes.
4.4.2
Configuring a Device Action Step for a
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
The ALP is controlled and operating through the Device Action step in Biomek
Software (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Section 22.6.1.3, Configuring
the Device Action Step for a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP (FX, NX only)).
Filling, draining, and configuring the sensor state are all configured using a Device
Action step in a method.
ALPs User’s Manual
4-14
4.5
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
Controlling the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir
ALP Outside a Method
To control the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP outside a method, use Advanced
Manual Control for:
•
Filling the Reservoir (Section 4.5.1).
•
Draining the Reservoir (Section 4.5.2).
•
Checking the Sensor State (Section 4.5.3).
Note: Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed. If a
need for manual control is realized during a method run, stop the method using the
Stop button or Snap Continuation button (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 25.11.2, Snapping a Continuation) before accessing Manual
Control.
4.5.1
Filling the Reservoir
Use Advanced Manual Control to fill the reservoir to the maximum level.
To fill the reservoir:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of the installed pod and devices appears.
3. Select the desired DrainableRefillableReservoir. Advanced Manual
Control for the selected ALP appears.
4. In Command, choose Fill (Figure 4-10).
Figure 4-10. Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable/Refillable
Reservoir ALP with Fill selected
5. Choose Go. The reservoir fills to the maximum level allowed by the sensor.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.5.2
4-15
Draining the Reservoir
Use Advanced Manual Control to drain the contents of the reservoir back into the
supply container.
To drain a Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of the installed pod and devices appears.
3. Select the desired DrainableRefillableReservoir. Advanced Manual
Control for the selected ALP appears.
4. In Command, choose Drain (Figure 4-11).
Figure 4-11. Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable/Refillable
Reservoir ALP with Drain selected
5. Choose Go. The liquid in the reservoir drains back into the supply container.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Note: When air bubbles form at the end of the tubing in the supply container, the
reservoir and tubing are free of liquid.
ALPs User’s Manual
4-16
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.5.3
Checking the Sensor State
Use Advanced Manual Control to check the sensor state. Checking the sensor state
allows method runs to proceed when the liquid level in the reservoir is sufficient.
To check the sensor state:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of the installed pod and devices appears.
3. Select the desired DrainableRefillableReservoir. Advanced Manual
Control for the selected ALP appears.
4. In Command, choose AssertSensor. Sensor State appears (Figure 4-12).
Figure 4-12. Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable/Refillable
Reservoir ALP with AssertSensor selected
5. In Sensor State, choose:
•
On — allows the method run to proceed when sufficient liquid is
detected in the reservoir.
•
Off — allows the method run to proceed when liquid is not detected in
the reservoir.
6. Choose Go. The sensor state is configured.
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.6
4-17
Removing the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir
ALP From the Deck
WARNING: The Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP may be
contaminated from method solutions. Follow the appropriate
decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the Biomek instrument.
Clean up any spills immediately according to the procedures defined by
the laboratory safety officer.
To remove the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP:
1. Drain the reservoir, if necessary (refer to Section 4.5.2, Draining the Reservoir).
2. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument.
3. On the controller, push the pump head locking lever to the left to open it.
4. Remove the tubing from the pump head.
5. Disconnect the CAN cable(s) from the CAN port(s).
6. Using the supplied screwdriver, loosen the screws on the right and left of the
sensor amplifier that fasten the sensor leads, then disconnect the leads from the
amplifier.
7. Loosen the thumbscrews fastening the pump head to the controller, and gently
remove the pump head.
Note: The pump head needs to be removed only if the ALP will be stored in the
original packaging.
8. On the reservoir, disconnect the tubing from the inlet/outlet fitting.
9. Remove the reservoir from the deck.
10. Decontaminate and clean the reservoir following procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
ALPs User’s Manual
4-18
4.7
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
Storage
To store the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP:
1. Remove the ALP from the deck (refer to Section 4.6, Removing the Drainable/
Refillable Reservoir ALP From the Deck).
Note: The ALP should be allowed to air dry before it is repacked for storage.
2. Return the ALP to its original packing materials and store in a dry, dust-free,
environmentally controlled area.
4.8
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: The Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP may be
contaminated from method solutions. Follow the appropriate
decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
The ALP requires minimal maintenance. Observe the following guidelines:
•
Do not overflow the reservoir.
•
Drain any solutions from the reservoir when not in use and follow the
appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
Note: Refer to Section 4.5.2, Draining the Reservoir for more information
about draining the reservoir.
•
Periodically inspect the tubing for wear and stress fractures.
•
Periodically inspect the tubing connections for leakage.
•
Replace tubing when required.
Note: For more information about recommended maintenance procedures and
intervals for the peristaltic pump and tubing, refer to the user manuals provided by the
manufacturers.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
4.9
4-19
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP without first
contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 4-1. Troubleshooting the Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
IF
THEN
The ALP is not operating correctly. Check the CAN connections on the controller
(refer to Section 4.2.2.2, Connecting the CAN
Communications Cables and Sensor Leads).
The sensitivity indicator LED is not
turning on when sufficient liquid is
present in the reservoir.
Calibrate the amplifier sensitivity with the
desired liquid in the reservoir (refer to Section
4.2.2.3, Calibrating the Sensor Amplifier
Sensitivity).
Make sure the sensor leads are connected to the
correct amplifier ports. The lead with the larger
dots printed along the length of the lead
connects to the transmitter port; the lead with
smaller dots connects to the receiver port (refer
to Section 4.2.2.2, Connecting the CAN
Communications Cables and Sensor Leads).
Repeated attempts to calibrate the
amplifier sensitivity fail.
Contact Beckman Coulter Technical Support.
The reservoir is not filling and
draining correctly.
Reverse direction of the tubing through the
pump head. The tubing must run left to right
through the pump head from the container to
the reservoir.
Make sure there are no kinks in the tubing.
Make sure the pump head is properly closed on
the tubing.
Make sure the fitting on the container that
supplies the reservoir is in contact with the
liquid.
ALPs User’s Manual
5-1
5
5.1
Half-Position Disposal ALP
(NX-S8 only)
Overview
The Half-Position Disposal ALP provides a means to dispose of tips during a method.
When the slide is attached, it can be used to dispose of tips, tip boxes, and labware
during a method. Because this ALP only takes a half position, a Span-8 Wash ALP
may be placed on the other half position to conserve space on the Biomek NX deck.
The Half-Position Disposal ALP is used by the Span-8 Pod on the Biomek NX deck
in one of two ways:
•
Half-Position Disposal ALP—The disposed tips are placed into a waste
receptacle positioned inside the ALP base.
OR
•
Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide — A slide that extends beyond the
edge of the Biomek deck is inserted into the ALP. Tips, tip boxes, and
labware placed inside the ALP slide down into a receptacle placed below.
Note: Labware that hangs below the gripper, such as an SPE filter plate or
a tip box lid, cannot be placed inside the ALP.
Note: The Half-Position Disposal ALP is shipped so that either of the two options
above can be assembled and used.
The information in this chapter includes mounting the ALP to the deck, framing,
removing the ALP from the deck, storing, and preventive maintenance for the
following:
•
Half-Position Disposal ALP (refer to Section 5.2, Half-Position Disposal
ALP)
•
Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide (refer to Section 5.3, Half-Position
Disposal ALP with Slide)
ALPs User’s Manual
5-2
5.2
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
Half-Position Disposal ALP
WARNING: When using the Half-Position Disposal ALP, do not overfill
the disposal bag. Tips may spill over onto the deck, possibly
contaminating the deck with hazardous materials.
When the Half-Position Disposal ALP is used as a self-contained waste receptacle
(without the slide), a waste bag is mounted inside the ALP (Figure 5-1). Because this
ALP only takes a half position, a Span-8 Wash ALP may be placed on the other half
position to conserve space on the Biomek deck.
Note: The Half-Position Disposal ALP is used only for collecting shucked tips.
Figure 5-1. Half-Position Disposal ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5.2.1
5-3
Mounting a Half-Position Disposal ALP
CAUTION: The Half-Position Disposal ALP must be mounted on the
outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
The Half-Position Disposal ALP can be mounted on half of a standard deck position
in the outside columns of the Biomek NX deck. Refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck, to learn how to configure the
deck and where to place the ALP on the Biomek NX deck. The Half-Position
Disposal ALP is referred to as HalfTipTrashLeft or HalfTipTrashRight in the Deck
Editor.
The following conditions should be noted before choosing a deck position:
•
If the ALP is placed in the first or second row from the front, the gripper
cannot grip labware on or off an adjacent ALP from the front or behind.
•
If the ALP is placed in the third row from the front, the gripper can grip from
behind the ALP, but not from the front.
•
If the ALP is placed in the back row, it can grip only from the front.
To mount a Half-Position Disposal ALP to the deck:
1. Choose a deck position in the outside column of the deck, then slip the locating
pins on the bottom of the ALP into the locating holes of the desired deck
position.
2. Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the bottom of the ALP.
WARNING: Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are
recommended for hazardous applications. The waste bags shipped with
the Half-Position Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags. Contact the
laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and
procedures.
3. Fold the top of a waste bag over the frame so that the bottom of the bag reaches
the bottom of the ALP base.
4. Smooth out the bag to allow items to drop directly to the bottom of the bag.
5. To hold the bag in place, stretch the rubber band over the top of ALP and use the
notches to position it in the location shown in Figure 5-2. An opening like the one
in Figure 5-2 should be created.
ALPs User’s Manual
5-4
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
CAUTION: Make sure the bag is tight to tops of the flanges. The gripper
tool must have enough room to move over the ALP.
6. Ensure the bag is tight to the tops of the flanges (Figure 5-2).
Tops of flanges
Rubber band
placement
Position the rubber
band so it is secured
using the notches.
Bag
placement
To create an
opening for the
disposed items,
place the bag
inside the
bagging
extension using
the dashed lines
as a guide.
Figure 5-2. Half-Position Disposal ALP rubber band placement
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5-5
7. Pull the bag through the Half-Position Disposal ALP so the opening looks like
the photo in Figure 5-3.
Correct
opening for
disposed
tips
Pull the bag through the
ALP to create the correct
opening for disposed tips.
Figure 5-3. Half-Position Disposal ALP with correct bag placement
ALPs User’s Manual
5-6
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5.2.2
Removing a Half-Position Disposal ALP
WARNING: The waste bag may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
To remove the Half-Position Disposal ALP:
1. Remove the rubber band and waste receptacle from the ALP.
2. Dispose of the bag and contents as specified by the laboratory safety officer.
3. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP.
4. Lift the ALP straight up from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of
the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5.3
5-7
Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide
When the Half-Position Disposal ALP is used with the slide, it extends off the edge of
the deck. The slide is directed through the gap between the deck and Plexiglas shield.
A trash receptacle is placed on the floor at the end of the slide to catch the waste. The
ALP can be used on half of a standard deck position and is particularly effective when
lab space is at a premium.
The Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide allows the disposal of as many used tips
as the trash receptacle is capable of holding. The Span-8 Pod can drop disposable tips
directly into this ALP with the slide. Labware that hangs below the gripper, such as an
SPE filter, cannot be placed inside the ALP.
Note: Tips may stick to the slide, which could cause tips or labware to jam in the
chute. Check the slide periodically during the method run to ensure it is clear of tips.
Figure 5-4. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
ALPs User’s Manual
5-8
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5.3.1
Mounting the Half-Position Disposal ALP
with Slide to the Deck
CAUTION: The Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted
in the left or right outside columns of the Biomek NX deck to avoid
collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
The Half-Position Disposal ALP can be mounted on half of a standard deck position
in the outside columns of the Biomek NX deck. Refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck, to learn how to configure the
deck and where to place the ALP on the Biomek NX deck. The Half-Position
Disposal ALP with Slide is referred to as HalfTrashLeft or HalfTrashRight in the
Deck Editor.
The following conditions should be noted before choosing a deck position:
•
If the ALP is placed in the first or second row from the front, the gripper
cannot grip labware on or off an adjacent ALP from the front or behind.
•
If the ALP is placed in the third row from the front, the gripper can grip from
behind the ALP, but not from the front.
•
If the ALP is placed in the back row, it can grip only from the front.
The bottom panels on the instrument must be removed before mounting the HalfPosition Disposal ALP with Slide to the deck (refer to Section 5.3.1.1, Removing a
Bottom Panel).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5.3.1.1
5-9
Removing a Bottom Panel
After choosing an appropriate deck position, the panel that is adjacent to the chosen
position must be removed to allow the slide to be directed through the gap between
the deck and Plexiglas shield.
To remove a bottom panel:
1. Remove the two screws that attach the bottom panel to the instrument base
(Figure 5-5).
2. While holding the loosen panel, remove the two screws that attach it to the side
bracket where the Plexiglas shields are also attached (Figure 5-5).
3. Store the removed panel in a dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
ALPs User’s Manual
5-10
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
Screws that attach
bottom panel to
instrument base
Side bracket
Screws that attach
bottom panel to
side bracket
Figure 5-5. Removing bottom panels
5.3.1.2
Mounting the ALP to the Deck
To mount a Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide:
1. Attach the slide to the ALP by lowering the into the grooves in the ALP.
2. Insert the grounding screw through the tab on the back of the slide and into the
threaded hole in the ALP.
Note: This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP and to
position the slide.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5-11
Slide
Grounding
screw
Figure 5-6. Adding the slide to the Half-Position Disposal ALP
3. Attach the slide to the ALP using the supplied grounding screw.
4. Position the disposal chute by lining up the holes in the chute with the threaded
holes in the ALP (Figure 5-4).
ALPs User’s Manual
5-12
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5. Attach the disposal chute to the ALP using the four screws supplied (Figure 5-4).
Disposal chute
Screws to attach
chute to the ALP
Figure 5-7. Adding the chute to Half-Position Disposal ALP
6. Choose the desired position and remove the bottom shield that is adjacent to the
position so the trash can fall through to the receptacle.
7. Place the ALP in an outside column of the deck. This allows the slide to extend
downward beyond the left or right side of the deck.
8. Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP into the locating holes on the
deck.
9. Place a trash receptacle at the end of the disposal chute to catch disposed items.
10. Look down through the disposal chute, or drop a test item into the ALP, to make
sure the trash lands in the receptacle. Adjust the placement of the trash receptacle
as required.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
5.3.2
5-13
Removing a Half-Position Disposal ALP
with Slide ALP
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To remove the Half-Position Disposal ALP with Slide:
1. Verify that no labware remains on the slide. If labware remains on the slide,
remove the labware as specified by the laboratory safety officer.
2. Remove the trash receptacle and dispose of the contents as specified by the
laboratory safety officer.
3. Remove the grounding screw from the slide.
4. Lift the slide from the base.
5. Loosen the thumbscrew on the base of the ALP.
6. Lift the ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP
base clear the locating holes on the deck.
7. To detach the chute, remove the four screws attaching the chute to the ALP and
remove the chute.
ALPs User’s Manual
5-14
5.4
Half-Position Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)
Framing Instructions
Framing the Half-Position Disposal ALP occurs when the deck is framed with the
Shift Deck command according to the instructions in the (refer to the Biomek® NX
Span-8 Laboratory Automation Workstation User’s Manual, Chapter 4, Framing
Instructions). It is not necessary to individually frame the Half-Position Disposal
ALP.
5.5
Storage
Return the Half-Position Disposal ALP to its original packing materials and store in a
dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the ALP to air-dry before returning it to its original
packing materials.
5.6
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: The Half-Position Disposal ALP may be contaminated.
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To clean, wipe all surfaces on the Half-Position Disposal ALP with a soft cloth.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
6-1
6
6.1
HDR Pin Drying ALP and
Reservoirs (FX only)
Overview
The HDR Pin Drying ALP (Figure 6-1), an active ALP, and reservoirs (refer to
Section 6.1.2, Reservoirs) are part of a system for washing and drying pins on the
HDR Tool Body between transfers in a method. Pins are washed using a “dunk and
dry” approach.
The HDR Tool Body immerses the pins in one or more reservoirs of wash solutions,
such as bleach, ethanol, or DMSO. Reservoirs may be static or circulating. The
location and liquid type in each reservoir is configured in the Biomek Software using
the Instrument Setup step (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter
15.2, Instrument Setup Step).
After washing the pins in the reservoir(s), the HDR Tool Body moves above the HDR
Pin Drying ALP to dry the pins by fan. The HDR Pin Drying ALP must be configured
in Hardware Setup and placed on the deck in the Deck Editor.
The HDR Pin Drying ALP includes components such as an adaptor plate, fan and
guards, and collar (refer to Section 6.1.1.1, Components of the HDR Pin Drying ALP).
The reservoirs that may be used with the HDR Pin Drying ALP include static (refer to
Section 6.1.2.1, Static Reservoirs) and circulating reservoirs (refer to Section 6.1.2.2,
Circulating Reservoirs).
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (Section 6.2)
•
Installing and Configuring Devices Associated with the HDR Pin Drying
ALP and Circulating Reservoir in Hardware Setup (Section 6.3)
•
Adding the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir to the Deck in
Biomek Software (Section 6.4)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 6.5)
•
Using the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs in a Method (Section 6.6)
•
Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a
Method (Section 6.7)
•
Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir from the
Deck (Section 6.8)
ALPs User’s Manual
6-2
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
•
Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating
Reservoir (Section 6.10)
•
Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir
(Section 6.11)
6.1.1
HDR Pin Drying ALP
The HDR Pin Drying ALP (Figure 6-1) is an active ALP that dries pins on the HDR
Tool Body during a method. A fan provides airflow sufficient to quickly dry pins after
washing in one or more reservoirs. Fan guards are installed on both sides of the fan to
prevent airflow from affecting operation on other ALPs and for safety. The fan is
operated by a Device Controller (refer to Appendix A:, Device Controller).
Figure 6-1. HDR Pin Drying ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.1.1.1
6-3
Components of the HDR Pin Drying ALP
The HDR Pin Drying ALP comes in a preassembled kit with the following
components:
•
1 x 1 Passive ALP — a standard passive ALP with one position.
•
adaptor plate — plate mounted to the 1 x 1 Passive ALP that allows the fan
and fan guard to be fastened to the ALP.
•
fan — active component that provides airflow to dry pins.
WARNING: Do not stick objects through the fan guards.
•
two (2) fan guards — located directly above and below the fan, these prevent
airflow from affecting operation on other ALPs and provide safety.
•
HDR Pin Drying ALP collar — reservoir stand placed on the labware
positioner of the HDR Pin Drying ALP to direct air from the fan upwards for
better drying results.
Note:
The HDR Pin Drying ALP collar is not preassembled.
If desired, the adaptor plate, fan, and fan guards can be removed from the
1 x 1 Passive ALP and mounted onto another ALP with an open-centered position,
such as a 4 x 3 High Density ALP (refer to Section 6.2.1.1, Removing and Installing
the Fan Adaptor Plate, Fan, and Fan Guards).
Note: When the HDR Pin Drying ALP is not used for drying pins in a method, it
may be used as a passive ALP position by removing the collar from the labware
position. Labware can be placed on the HDR Pin Drying ALP by a lab technician, the
ORCA® robot, or the Biomek FX gripper when the HDR Pin Drying ALP is used as
a passive ALP position.
6.1.2
Reservoirs
Reservoirs are used to wash pins before the HDR Tool Body moves to the HDR Pin
Drying ALP. The HDR Tool Body dips the pins into one or more reservoirs to rinse
residue from the pins.
There are two types of reservoirs that may be used with the HDR Pin Drying ALP:
•
static reservoir — labware placed on the deck to hold wash solutions for the
duration of the method (refer to Section 6.1.2.1, Static Reservoirs)
•
circulating reservoir — labware placed on the deck with inlet and outlet
connections to circulate wash solutions through the labware during the
method (refer to Section 6.1.2.2, Circulating Reservoirs)
ALPs User’s Manual
6-4
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.1.2.1
Static Reservoirs
A specially designed, chemically resistant static reservoir is used to store wash
solutions such as bleach, ethanol, or DMSO. The static reservoir may be placed in any
standard deck position and is not gripperable by the Orca® robot or the gripper on the
Multichannel Pod. Wash solutions stored in a static reservoir are used throughout the
method unless changed manually.
Note: When using static reservoirs as part of the HDR Cleaning System, select the
Biomek2000HDRStaticWashReservoir (PN 609443, made of PVC) or
BiomekFXHDRStaticWashReservoir (PN 719890, made of polypropylene),
depending on the reservoir used, in the Instrument Setup step when placing labware
on the deck. Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 15.2, Instrument
Setup Step, for more information on the Instrument Setup step.
6.1.2.1.1
Preventive Maintenance for Static Reservoirs
To ensure optimum operation, perform the following maintenance procedures on the
static reservoirs, as necessary:
•
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
•
Empty any cleaning solutions from the static reservoir(s) when not in use
and rinse the reservoir(s) thoroughly as outlined by the laboratory safety
officer.
•
Make sure the reservoir is dry before storing.
6.1.2.2
Circulating Reservoirs
A circulating reservoir option is provided as an alternative to using the static
reservoirs. A circulating reservoir (Figure 6-2) may be placed on any open-centered
deck position, such as on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP or a 4 x 3 High Density ALP, and
provides a flow of wash fluid from a supply container for pin washing.
The bottom of the circulating reservoir has two connections for flow in and out of the
reservoir. A peristaltic pump, operated by a Device Controller, circulates wash fluid
from the supply container through the reservoir to a waste container.
The circulating reservoir comes in a kit that includes:
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
•
circulating reservoir labware
•
supply container
•
waste container
•
peristaltic pump
•
12 feet of L35 Pharmed tubing
•
12 feet of L36 Pharmed tubing
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-5
Inlet and outlet ports (not pictured) are
on bottom of reservoir (see Figure 6-4).
Figure 6-2. Circulating reservoir
ALPs User’s Manual
6-6
6.2
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and
Reservoirs
Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP includes mounting the ALP to the deck and
installing the fan adaptor plate, fan, and fan guards (refer to Section 6.2.1, Installing
the HDR Pin Drying ALP). Installing the circulating reservoir includes placing it on
the deck and ensuring the tubing connections are correctly attached and routed (refer
to Section 6.2.2, Installing the HDR Circulating Reservoir on the Deck).
6.2.1
Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP
When installed on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP, the HDR Pin Drying ALP can be physically
mounted in any standard deck position.
Note: When the fan is installed on a 4 x 3 ALP, refer to Chapter 8.1.2, 4 x 3 HighDensity ALP for mounting locations and instructions.
To mount the HDR Pin Drying ALP to the Biomek FX deck, complete the following:
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any ALP.
2. Position the HDR Pin Drying ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP
slip into locating holes on the deck.
3. Fasten the HDR Pin Drying ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base
of the ALP.
4. Connect the HDR Pin Drying ALP to one of the low voltage digital outputs on
the Device Controller (refer to Section A.4.2, Connecting Digital Device
Outputs).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-7
5. Place the HDR Pin Drying ALP collar in the labware position directly above the
fan (Figure 6-3).
Note: Operating the HDR Pin Drying ALP without the collar in place allows
the air from the fan to disperse and slows the drying rate of the pins.
Pin Drying ALP collar
Figure 6-3. HDR Pin Drying ALP and collar
ALPs User’s Manual
6-8
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.2.1.1
Removing and Installing the Fan Adaptor Plate,
Fan, and Fan Guards
The adaptor plate, fan, and fan guards on the HDR Pin Drying ALP may be removed
as one unit and placed on any open-centered deck position on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP or
4 x 3 High Density ALP.
To remove the adaptor plate, fan, and fan guards from the ALP:
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
1. Remove the ALP with the fan from the deck (refer to Section 6.8, Removing the
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir from the Deck).
2. Place the ALP upside down.
3. Remove the four (4) mounting screws from the adaptor plate.
4. Lift the adaptor plate, along with the fan and fan guards, and remove it from the
ALP.
To install the adaptor plate, fan, and fan guards to another ALP or position:
1. Remove the ALP with the desired position from the deck, if necessary.
2. Place the ALP upside down.
3. Position the fan adaptor plate assembly on the desired position on the ALP.
4. Fasten the adaptor plate to the position by tightening the four (4) mounting
screws.
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
5. Mount the ALP to the deck as described in the appropriate section of this manual.
6. Place the HDR Pin Drying ALP collar in the labware position directly above the
fan.
Note: Operating the HDR Pin Drying ALP without the collar in place allows
the air from the fan to disperse and reduces drying efficiency.
6.2.1.2
Connections
The HDR Pin Drying ALP requires a Device Controller to operate. Refer to Appendix
A:, Device Controller, for information on setting up a Device Controller.
Note: The Device Controller must be turned on to provide power to attached
devices. The green light on the Device Controller indicates that the Device Controller
is on.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.2.2
6-9
Installing the HDR Circulating Reservoir on
the Deck
The HDR circulating reservoir may be placed on any open-centered deck position,
such as on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP or a 4 x 3 High Density ALP.
To place a circulating reservoir on the deck:
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD.
WARNING: Do not kink the hoses.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
1. Place the circulating reservoir labware on the desired deck position.
Note: The circulating reservoir labware must be placed on an open-centered
deck position to accommodate the inlet and outlet connections on the bottom of
the reservoir.
Note: If adding multiple Circulating Reservoirs to the deck, it is recommended
that all Circulating Reservoirs are placed in the same column, if possible.
2. Connect one end of the smaller (L35 Pharmed) tubing to the inlet quick
disconnect fitting on the bottom of the reservoir (Figure 6-4).
Note: The inlet quick disconnect fitting is located near the center of the
reservoir.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-10
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
3. Connect one end of the larger (L36 Pharmed) tubing to the outlet quick
disconnect fitting on the bottom of the reservoir (Figure 6-4).
Note: The outlet quick disconnect fitting is located along the outer edge of the
reservoir.
Inlet quick disconnect fitting
Outlet quick disconnect fitting
Figure 6-4. Quick disconnect fittings on the HDR circulating reservoir
4. Position the peristaltic pump at an off-deck location near the circulating
reservoir.
5. Place the supply and waste containers in an off-deck position near the peristaltic
pump.
6. Fill the supply container with the desired wash fluid.
7. Run both the inlet and outlet tubing off the Biomek FX deck either through the
access holes on the back of the instrument between the towers, or between the
light curtain and the deck on the side of the Biomek FX.
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek FX.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-11
8. Run the inlet tubing through one of the pump heads from left to right (Figure 65).
Waste
Supply
Figure 6-5. Tubing connections between circulating reservoir and pump
9. Insert the opposite end of the inlet tubing into the hole in the lid of the supply
container and run the tubing to the bottom of the container.
Note: Make sure the inlet tubing is in contact with liquid.
10. Run the outlet tubing through the other pump head from right to left (Figure 6-5).
11. Insert the opposite end of the outlet tubing into the hole in the lid of the waste
container.
12. Connect the peristaltic pump to one of the high voltage outputs on the Device
Controller (refer to Section A.4.1, Connecting High-Voltage Devices).
13. Connect the Device Controller to one of the CAN ports on the Biomek
instrument (refer to Section A.2, Installing a Device Controller).
14. Turn on power to the Biomek FX instrument and Device Controller.
15. Turn on power to the peristaltic pump.
CAUTION: Do not overflow the reservoir.
16. Starting at 0, adjust the pump speed by turning the dial on the front of the pump
clockwise until fluid fills the circulating reservoir and begins to spill over the
inner edges (Figure 6-2).
Note: If fluid spills over the outer edges, slow down the pump.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-12
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.2.2.1
Connections
The inlet tubing for the circulating reservoir is 0.31” inside diameter, while the outlet
tubing is 0.38” inside diameter; however, both the inlet and outlet tubing fit a 3/8”
barbed connection. When the tubing is connected, the outlet tubing must run through
the peristaltic pump in the opposite direction to the inlet tubing and into the waste
reservoir.
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek FX instrument.
6.2.2.2
Operating the Circulating Reservoir
Note: Prior to running a method, make sure there is enough wash fluid for the
method in the supply container and that the waste container does not overflow during
the method.
The circulating reservoir automatically turns off at the end of a method. A Device
Action step may be used to turn the pump on or off at any time in a method (refer to
Section 6.6.2.1, Configuring the Device Action Step for a Circulating Reservoir). The
HDR Tool Cleaning step turns the pump on prior to dipping the pins in the reservoir
and off at a set time after leaving the reservoir (refer to Section 6.6, Using the HDR
Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs in a Method). Once turned on, the pump remains on
until turned off as a part of the HDR Tool Cleaning step, a Device Action step, or
the end of the method.
Note: The circulating reservoir can also be controlled using Manual Control in the
Biomek FX software (refer to Section 6.7, Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and
Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method).
If a Light Curtain violation occurs while the pump is powering on or off, the action is
completed. The state of the pump does not change when the light curtain is violated or
during a pause in a method.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.3
6-13
Installing and Configuring Devices Associated
with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating
Reservoir in Hardware Setup
Devices associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and circulating reservoirs must be
configured in Hardware Setup. A Device Controller must also be installed in
Hardware Setup to add digital devices to the system. Both the fan used in the HDR
Pin Drying ALP and the wash pump used with the circulating reservoir are digital
devices. A separate wash pump is required for each circulating reservoir. For
example, if using three circulating reservoirs, a total of three wash pumps need to be
added in Hardware Setup—one for each circulating reservoir.
Note: Refer to Appendix A: Device Controller, for information on adding and
configuring a Device Controller.
When digital devices, such as a fan or wash pump, are installed, they are displayed
under Digital Devices in the left pane of Hardware Setup. Installed digital devices
must also be configured to the proper Device Controller and proper channel on the
Device Controller in Hardware Setup.
6.3.1
Installing Digital Devices for the HDR ALP
and Circulating Reservoir
Installing Digital Devices may be accomplished in two ways.
1. In Hardware Setup, right-click Digital Devices or any device under Digital
Devices and choose Add Device from the menu.
Note: Fan, Simple or WashPump are the available options.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-14
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
2. Choose Fan to install a fan for the HDR Pin Drying ALP.
OR
Choose WashPump to install a wash pump for a circulating reservoir. The
selected device is added to the list of installed devices under Digital Devices in
the left pane.
Note: The first wash pump added to the system is named WashPump1, and
second is named WashPump2, and so forth.
OR
1. Choose Add Device from the top of Hardware Setup. New Devices appears
(Figure 6-6).
Figure 6-6. New Devices displaying all detected devices
Note: All the devices detected, but not installed, are available to add in New
Devices.
Note: Right-click on an available device and choose Select All to select all of
the available devices or Clear Selection to disregard the selection.
2. Select the desired digital device(s) and choose Install. The device(s) selected are
added to the list of installed devices under Digital Devices in the left pane.
Note: The first wash pump added to the system is named WashPump1, the
second is named WashPump2, and so forth.
Note: In the left pane, an asterisk after a device indicates the device has been
modified since the workspace was loaded. A blue question mark before an installed
device indicates the device has not been fully configured.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.3.2
6-15
Configuring Digital Devices
Configure digital devices to make sure the correct Device Controller and high-voltage
or digital output are selected.
Note: Refer to Appendix A:, Device Controller, for more information on
configuring devices to the proper Device Controller and channel.
1. In Hardware Setup, select the desired digital device. The configuration for the
selected device appears (Figure 6-7).
Figure 6-7. Hardware Setup showing the configuration for a digital device
2. In Box, select the Device Controller the device is connected to for power.
3. In Line, select the high-voltage or digital output to which the device is
connected.
Note: Use a digital output port for a Fan for the HDR Pin Drying ALP and a
high-voltage port for a Wash Pump for the circulating reservoir.
Note: When configuring digital devices, make sure a distinct line on a Device
Controller is used for each digital device.
4. Repeat steps 1-3 to configure any remaining digital devices.
5. Choose Accept. Hardware Setup saves changes and closes.
Note: Accept must be chosen after the digital device has been configured to allow
Hardware Setup to accept the configuration changes. Cancel closes Hardware
Setup without saving any changes.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-16
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.3.3
Removing Digital Devices
Digital devices no longer on the Biomek FX deck can be removed.
Note: If a device is removed from Hardware Setup, it may no longer be used when
creating methods in the Biomek FX software.
To remove a device:
1. In Hardware Setup, right-click on the desired device under Digital Devices.
2. Choose Remove Device. The device is removed from the list of installed
devices under Digital Devices.
OR
1. Select the desired device under Digital Devices.
2. Choose Remove Device from the top of Hardware Setup. The device is
removed from the list of installed devices under Digital Devices.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.4
6-17
Adding the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating
Reservoir to the Deck in Biomek Software
Biomek Software needs to know the location of the HDR Pin Drying ALP and any
circulating reservoirs on the deck before they can be used in a method. The software
representation of the instrument deck is configured in the Deck Editor.
Note: For more information on the Deck Editor, refer to the Biomek Software
User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck.
6.4.1
Adding an HDR Pin Drying ALP to the Deck
An HDR Pin Drying ALP is added to the deck in the appropriate locations using the
Deck Editor and an Instrument Setup step. The fan must be associated with an
open-centered deck position, such as on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP, to provide an air flow to
dry the pins.
Then in the first Instrument Setup step in a method, the fan labware must be added
to the deck in the appropriate deck position for obstacle avoidance.
The fan is activated by turning on the fan using a Device Action step in the method
(refer to Section 6.6.2.2, Configuring the Device Action Step for the HDR Pin Drying
ALP) or Advanced Manual Control outside of a method (refer to Section 6.7,
Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method).
6.4.1.1
Associating a Fan with a Deck Position
To associate a fan with a deck position for an HDR Pin Drying ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Deck Editor. The Deck Editor appears.
2. If necessary, drag and drop the OneByOne or FourByThree ALP from the
ALP Types list to the desired location. The ALP appears and deck positions are
named automatically.
3. Select the desired deck position on which to place the HDR Pin Drying ALP.
Note: The selected deck position must have an open center.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-18
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
4. Select Properties.
OR
Double-click on the deck position.
OR
Right-click on the deck position and select Properties from the menu. Position
Properties appears (Figure 6-8).
Note: The deck position is highlighted with a pink line inside the ALP.
Figure 6-8. Position Properties for deck positions
5. Rename the deck position, if desired.
Note: Names for deck positions must be alphanumeric with no spaces; the only
nonalphanumeric character allowed is “_” (underscore). The first character must
be a letter.
6. Specify the X, Y, and Z Coordinates of the appropriate pod by framing the
ALP.
Note: ALPs are taught indirectly when positions are taught.
Note: If a position is accessible by both pods in a dual-pod system, each pod
must be framed to the position.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-19
7. Select More>> to display the device association and labware offset options.
Figure 6-9. Expanded Position Properties for deck positions
8. In Device, choose the appropriate Fan to associate with the position.
9. If desired, choose Per-labware Offsets to customize the offsets for specific
types of labware (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5.4.3.3,
Changing Per-Labware Offsets).
10. Adjust the Min Safe Height, if necessary. The Min Safe Height is the height at
which the pod(s) move when moving to or passing over the specified ALP, and is
predefined at a height that avoids collisions between the fan and the pod(s).
Note: The Labware Offsets and Position Span are predefined in the
software. Do not modify these properties.
11. Choose OK to save and close Position Properties. Deck Editor appears.
12. Choose Save to close the Deck Editor.
Note: The deck must be framed (taught) using the framing tools after creating
or modifying a deck (refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory Automation
Workstation User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Framing the Biomek® FX).
ALPs User’s Manual
6-20
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.4.1.2
Adding an HDR Pin Drying ALP in Instrument
Setup
After associating the fan with the desired deck position, it is necessary to tell the
software where the HDR Pin Drying ALP is placed on the deck in an Instrument
Setup step for obstacle avoidance.
To add an HDR Pin Drying ALP to the deck:
1. Insert an Instrument Setup step at the start of the method.
OR
Select the first Instrument Setup step found in the method. The Instrument
Setup step configuration appears (Figure 6-10).
Note: The first Instrument Setup step must be located before any pod
movement for obstacle avoidance.
Labware Category
Used to filter labware
types to display only
labware of a selected
category.
Figure 6-10. Instrument Setup step configuration
2. Place the FanShroud labware type on the position(s) that are associated with a
Fan in the Deck Editor.
Note: Use Labware Category to filter the labware types to display only
Reservoirs to locate the Fan labware type quickly.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.4.2
6-21
Adding a Circulating Reservoir to the Deck
A circulating reservoir is added to the deck in the appropriate locations using the
Deck Editor and an Instrument Setup step. The appropriate WashPump must be
associated with an open-centered deck position, such as on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP, to
provide the flow of wash fluid.
Then in the first Instrument Setup step in a method, the
BiomekFXHDRCirculatingWashReservoir must be added to the deck in the
appropriate deck position and configured with the wash fluid type for obstacle
avoidance and pin washing considerations.
The circulating reservoir is activated by turning on the appropriate wash pump using a
Device Action step in the method (refer to Section 6.6.2.1, Configuring the Device
Action Step for a Circulating Reservoir) or Advanced Manual Control outside of a
method (refer to Section 6.7, Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating
Reservoir Outside a Method).
6.4.2.1
Associating a Wash Pump with a Deck Position
To associate a WashPump with a deck position for a circulating reservoir:
1. Choose Instrument>Deck Editor. The Deck Editor appears.
2. If necessary, drag and drop the OneByOne or FourByThree ALP from the
ALP Types list to the desired location. The ALP appears and deck positions are
named automatically.
3. Select the desired deck position to place the circulating reservoir.
Note: The selected deck position must have an open center.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-22
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
4. Select Properties.
OR
Double-click on the deck position.
OR
Right-click on the deck position and select Properties from the menu. Position
Properties appears (Figure 6-11).
Note: The deck position is highlighted with a pink line inside the ALP.
Figure 6-11. Position Properties
5. Rename the deck position, if desired.
Note: Names for deck positions must be alphanumeric with no spaces; the only
nonalphanumeric character allowed is “_” (underscore). The first character must
be a letter.
6. Specify the X, Y, and Z Coordinates of the appropriate pod by teaching the
ALP.
Note: The circulating reservoir acts as a piece of labware. If the deck position
holding the circulating reservoir has been properly framed, it is not necessary to
reframe the position with the circulating reservoir in place. Prior to placing the
circulating reservoir, any deck position that holds a circulating reservoir should
be framed normally according to the framing procedure for that ALP.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-23
7. Select More>> to display the device association and labware offset options
(Figure 6-12).
Figure 6-12. Expanded Position Properties for deck positions
8. In Device, choose the appropriate WashPump to associate with the position.
9. Adjust the Min Safe Height, if necessary. The Min Safe Height is the height at
which the pod(s) move when moving to or passing over the specified ALP, and is
predefined at a height that avoids collisions between the circulating reservoir and
the pod(s).
Note: The Labware Offsets and Position Span are predefined in the
software. Do not modify these properties.
10. Choose OK to save and close Position Properties. Deck Editor appears.
11. Choose Save to close the Deck Editor.
Note: The deck must be framed (taught) using the framing tools after creating
or modifying a deck. Refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory Automation
Workstation User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Framing the Biomek® FX.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-24
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.4.2.2
Adding a Circulating Reservoir in Instrument
Setup
After associating the wash pump with the desired deck position, it is necessary to tell
the software where the circulating reservoir is placed on the deck in an Instrument
Setup step for obstacle avoidance.
To add a circulating reservoir to the deck:
1. Insert an Instrument Setup step at the start of the method.
OR
Select the first Instrument Setup step found in the method. The Instrument
Setup step configuration appears (Figure 6-13).
Note: The first Instrument Setup step must be located before any pod
movement for obstacle avoidance.
Labware Category
Used to filter labware
types to display only
labware of a selected
category.
Figure 6-13. Instrument Setup step configuration
2. Place the BiomekFXHDRCirculatingWashReservoir labware type on the
position(s) that are associated with a WashPump in the Deck Editor (refer to
the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 15.2.4, Populating the Deck with
Labware).
Note: Use Labware Category to filter the labware types to display only
Reservoirs to quickly locate the HDRCirculatingReservoir labware type.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-25
3. Double-click the HDRCirculatingReservoir labware type to configure the
liquid type. Labware Properties appears (Figure 6-14).
Figure 6-14. Labware Properties
4. In Name, enter a name for the labware.
Note: When a deck is populated by numerous pieces of labware, naming
labware is recommended. Names should be descriptive of the contents of the
labware or the work being accomplished during the method. Naming labware in a
meaningful fashion may reduce confusion. Names given to pieces of labware
may be entered as variables in other step configurations within the method.
5. In Bar Code, enter the bar code.
Note: Use the bar code field to identify a specific plate in certain methods, such
as plate replication. This field may be left blank.
6. Make a selection in Labware contains. Options are Unknown, Nominal, and
Known.
Note: For a Multichannel Pod, Known Volume should be supplied whenever
possible. This information is used by many of the techniques supplied with the
Biomek FX software when calculating the height to aspirate or dispense liquid.
These techniques are specified to aspirate and dispense at certain offsets from the
liquid level. If the volume is not supplied, the liquid level cannot be determined
by the Multichannel Pod, and the aspirate and dispense heights must be specified
in the pipetting steps.
Note: A Span-8 Pod has the ability to detect the liquid level if LLS-capable tips
are used.
If Unknown is selected, the liquid level is detected during method run if required
by the technique, and the wells are assumed to be full when validating the
method.
A selection of Nominal also detects the liquid level during method run, but the
volume in the wells is assumed to be the entered value when validating the
method.
If Known is selected, the liquid level is not detected during method run and the
entered value is used during validation and method run.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-26
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
7. Enter the Volume, if Nominal or Known volume is selected.
Note: A value entered in Volume is assigned to each well on the selected
labware.
8. Select the Liquid Type contained in the labware. The liquid type is useful
information when the Biomek FX auto-selects a pipetting technique for any
aspirate and dispense operations acted upon this piece of labware. The pipetting
technique auto-selected to aspirate and dispense the liquid is selected based on
the physical factors of the liquid, as well as the physical attributes of the labware.
For more information on liquid types, (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 8, Understanding and Creating Liquid Types).
9. Select Sense the liquid level the first time a well with Unknown or
Nominal volume is accessed “from the Liquid” to have a Span-8 Pod use
Liquid Level Sensing to determine the liquid level only the first time it accesses a
well with an Unknown or Nominal volume from the liquid. Any instances in
which the same well on the piece of labware is accessed, the liquid level is
calculated internally based on the result of the earlier liquid level sense and the
amount aspirated or dispensed to the well in previous steps.
OR
Select Sense the liquid level every time a well is accessed “from the
Liquid” to have a Span-8 Pod use Liquid Level Sensing to determine the liquid
level every time it accesses a well with an Unknown or Nominal volume from
the liquid.
Note: The liquid level sensing option is only important when using a dual pod
system with a Span-8 Pod.
10. Choose OK to save Labware Properties and return to the Instrument Setup
step configuration.
To turn the circulating reservoir(s) on or off, use a Device Action step to activate the
desired wash pump(refer to Section 6.6.2.1, Configuring the Device Action Step for a
Circulating Reservoir).
6.5
Framing Instructions
Refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Framing the Biomek® FX, for instructions on framing the HDR Pin
Drying ALP.
Note: The circulating reservoir acts as a piece of labware. If the deck position
holding the circulating reservoir has been properly framed, it is not necessary to
reframe the position with the circulating reservoir in place. Prior to placing the
circulating reservoir, any deck position that holds a circulating reservoir should be
framed normally according to the framing procedure for that ALP.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.6
6-27
Using the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs in
a Method
The HDR Pin Drying ALP and reservoirs are operated in a method using the HDR
Tool Cleaning step (refer to Section 6.6.1, Using the HDR Tool Cleaning Step) and
the Device Action step (refer to Section 6.6.2, Using the Device Action Step). The
HDR Pin Drying ALP automatically turns off at the end of a method.
The HDR Tool Cleaning step turns the fan on prior to drying the pins at the HDR Pin
Drying ALP and off at a set time after leaving the HDR Pin Drying ALP. A Device
Action step may be used to turn the fan on or off at any time in a method.
Once turned on, the fan remains on until turned off as a part of the HDR Tool
Cleaning step, a Device Action step, or the end of the method.
Note: Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 19, Using the HDR
Step Palette (FX, 3000 only) for information on using the HDR Transfer, HDR
Combine, and HDR Move Labware steps in a method.
Note: The HDR Pin Drying ALP can also be controlled using Manual Control in
the Biomek Software (refer to Section 6.7, Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and
Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method).
Note: If a Light Curtain violation occurs while the fan is powering on or off, the
action is completed. The state of the fan does not change when the light curtain is
violated or during a pause in a method.
6.6.1
Using the HDR Tool Cleaning Step
The HDR Tool Cleaning step washes pins on the HDR Tool Body. The HDR Tool
Cleaning step uses a “dunk and dry” methodology to wash pins by dipping the pins in
one or more reservoirs with wash solutions and drying the pins at the HDR Pin
Drying ALP.
The HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration is similar to that of the HDR Transfer or
HDR Combine step. Instead of Source and Destination configurations, however, a
series of wash operations — either dipping the pins into a wash reservoir or drying the
pins at the HDR Pin Drying ALP — are configured. Cleaning operations are
performed in the order they are configured.
The HDR Tool Cleaning Step Configuration includes specifying:
•
Pod that performs the cleaning operations.
•
Cleaning operation configuration(s).
ALPs User’s Manual
6-28
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
To configure an HDR Tool Cleaning step:
1. Insert an HDR Tool Cleaning step into the Method View (Figure 6-15).
Pod selection
Click this button to add Source
Labware and open the Source
Labware configuration.
Figure 6-15. HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration
2. In Use Pod, specify the pod with the HDR Tool Body used to perform the
transfer operations.
3. Configure Cleaning Operations as described in Section 6.6.1.1, Configuring
Cleaning Operations.
6.6.1.1
Configuring Cleaning Operations
The HDR Tool Cleaning step is configured through a series of cleaning operations.
There are two types of Cleaning Operations:
•
Wash Operations — pins are dipped in wash solution in a reservoir, deepwell microplate, or other labware type (refer to Section 6.6.1.1.1,
Configuring a Wash Operation).
•
Drying Operations — pins are air-dried by a fan at the HDR Drying ALP
(refer to Section 6.6.1.1.2, Configuring a Drying Operation).
As many Cleaning Operations as desired can be configured in the HDR Tool
Cleaning step.
Note: Cleaning Operations are performed in the order they appear in the step
configuration.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.6.1.1.1
6-29
Configuring a Wash Operation
A Wash operation dips pins in a piece of labware a specified number of times for a
specified length of time.
Note: Usually a reservoir is used as wash labware, but pins can be dipped in any
labware type.
To configure a wash operation for the HDR Tool Cleaning step:
CAUTION: Do not attempt to access a 96-Channel or 384-Channel Tip
Wash ALP with a Multichannel Pod equipped with an HDR Tool Body.
The gripper may crash and damage the pod, HDR Tool Body, or Tip
Wash ALP.
CAUTION: Do not access labware positioned on a 1 x 5 Passive ALP
with the HDR Tool Body. The gripper may crash with the ALP.
CAUTION: Do not access labware on a Stirring ALP with the HDR Tool
Body. The magnetic stirrer may bend the pins or interfere with the liquid
transfer performance of the pins.
1. Select Click here to add a cleaning/drying operation (Figure 6-15). The
Cleaning Operation configuration appears.
Figure 6-16. HDR Tool Cleaning step — new cleaning operation configuration
ALPs User’s Manual
6-30
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
2. Click on the piece of labware with the desired wash solution in the Current Deck
Display. Information for that piece of labware is entered automatically into the
Cleaning Operation configuration (Figure 6-15).
OR
Select a Cleaning Labware type (Figure 6-15).
Note: Subsequent labware selections modify the active Cleaning Operation
configuration. To configure additional Cleaning Operations, select Click here
to add a cleaning/drying operation, or select outside a cleaning operation
configuration, and then select another piece of labware from the Current Deck
Display. If an incorrect piece of labware is selected, right-click on the labware
title and select Delete on the menu that appears.
Additional Cleaning
Operations
Continue adding
Cleaning Operations
by clicking this button,
or by selecting more
labware in the Current
Deck Display.
Cleaning Operation
configuration for washing
with a circulating reservoir
Current Deck Display
Displays the status of the
deck upon completion of the
previous step. Also useful for
labware selection.
Figure 6-17. HDR Tool Cleaning step — configuration for a wash operation
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-31
3. If the Cleaning labware selected is a static reservoir or microplate, verify the
labware type and deck position of the labware.
Note: A bright yellow outline appears in the Current Deck Display around the
labware designated for a Cleaning Operation.
OR
If the Cleaning labware selected is a circulating reservoir (Figure 6-15):
•
In Turn pump on for, enter the length of time in seconds to turn the
wash pump on before the HDR Tool Body moves to the circulating
reservoir.
Note:
•
In Leave pump on for, enter the length of time in seconds to leave the
wash pump on after the HDR Tool Body moves away from the
circulating reservoir.
Note:
•
The default value for Turn pump on for is 2 seconds.
The default value for Leave pump on for is 2 seconds.
Select Run pump during wash operation to leave the pump
running continuously during the wash operation, if desired.
4. To specify the quadrants of a microplate to access, double-click the source
labware in the step configuration to zoom in on the labware.
Note: To call up a menu for Zoom and a Specify Selection as Text option,
right-click on the labware.
Specify Selection as Text allows selection of quadrants as targets for aspirate
and dispense operations. Specify Selection as Text may also be used to enter
variables or expressions (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter
13, Using Variables and Expressions in a Method).
Note: Specify Selection as Text is not applicable for 96-well microplates,
reservoirs, or 384-well microplates accessed by a 384-pin plate.
5. Select the desired quadrant(s) on the zoomed-in graphic of the labware.
Note: Selecting any well automatically selects all wells in that quadrant.
Note: To select multiple quadrants, click and drag over the desired quadrants or
hold down Ctrl or Shift and select the desired quadrants.
6. Choose Zoom Out to return to the step configuration screen.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-32
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
7. Choose Dipping Configuration to configure the wash operation. Dipping
Configuration appears (Figure 6-18).
Note: The Dipping Configuration is similar to a pipetting technique. It
specifies the method in which pins are washed.
Figure 6-18. Dipping Configuration
8. In Dip Cycles, enter the number of times the pins should descend into the wells.
Note: For Dip Cycles greater than 1, Move up to must be configured.
9. In Move down to, specify the height the pins descend to for each dipping cycle.
Note: By default, Move down to is measured from bottom of the well. To
measure from top of the well or from liquid, right click the graphic of the pin in
the well and make the desired selection from the menu.
Note: The Move down to height can go as much as 2 mm below the bottom of
the well as long as the pod can descend that far. Descending below the bottom of
the well potentially corrects for any slight imperfections in the labware or ALP
heights and can be done safely because the pin push plate is in a floating position,
allowing the pins to move up and down freely without resistance. To specify a
height below the bottom of the well, right-click the graphic of the pin in the well
and select Custom Height. Enter a negative value in Custom Height to move
the pins below the bottom of the well.
10. In Move down at, enter the speed of the descent of the HDR Tool Body as a
percentage of the maximum speed of the pod.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-33
11. In Move up to, specify the height the pins ascend to between each dipping cycle.
Note: If Dip Cycles is set to 1, Move up to is disabled.
Note: By default, Move up to is measured from bottom of the well. To
measure from top of the well or from liquid, right click the graphic of the pin in
the well and make the desired selection from the menu.
12. In Move up at, enter the speed at which the HDR Tool Body moves up as a
percentage of the maximum speed of the pod.
13. In Pause for, enter the length of time the pod pauses at the down position for
each Dip Cycle to wash pins.
14. Choose OK to save the Dipping Configuration and return to the source labware
configuration.
15. Leave the height as is to use the settings for the Move down to height specified
in the Dipping Configuration.
OR
Set the aspirate height manually using one of the following methods:
•
Position the cursor over the graphic of a pin inside a well. Click and
drag the graphic up or down. The pin moves with the cursor, and the
height displayed below the graphic is adjusted as the graphic is
manipulated.
Note: The cursor changes to a hand when positioned over the
graphic.
•
Selecting the graphic of a pin inside a well, and use the ↑ and ↓ keys.
The textual representation of the height, which is displayed below the
graphic, adjusts in 0.1 millimeter (mm) increments.
•
Right-click on the graphic of a pin inside a well, and a menu appears.
Select Custom Height, and Custom Height appears (Figure 6-19).
Insert the Height in millimeters (mm) and, in from, select a reference
point from the drop-down list. Choose OK.
Figure 6-19. Custom Height prompt
16. Configure additional Cleaning Operations following the procedures in Sections
6.6.1.1.1, Configuring a Wash Operation and 6.6.1.1.2, Configuring a Drying
Operation.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-34
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.6.1.1.2 Configuring a Drying Operation
To configure a drying operation for the HDR Tool Cleaning step:
1. Select Click here to add a cleaning/drying operation. The Cleaning
Operation configuration appears (Figure 6-20).
Figure 6-20. HDR Tool Cleaning step — new cleaning operation configuration
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6-35
2. Click on the HDR Pin Drying ALP in the Current Deck Display. Information for
the fan is entered automatically into the Cleaning Operation configuration.
Note: Subsequent labware selections modify the active Cleaning Operation
configuration. To configure additional Cleaning Operations, select Click here
to add a cleaning/drying operation, or select outside a cleaning operation
configuration, and then select another piece of labware from the Current Deck
Display. If an incorrect piece of labware is selected, right-click on the labware
title and select Delete on the menu that appears.
Cleaning Operation
configuration for drying
Additional Cleaning
Operations
Continue adding
Cleaning Operations
by clicking this button,
or by selecting more
labware in the Current
Deck Display.
Current Deck Display
Displays the status of the
deck upon completion of the
previous step. Also useful for
labware selection.
Figure 6-21. HDR Tool Cleaning step — configuration for a drying operation
3. In Turn fan on for, enter the length of time in seconds to turn the fan on before
the HDR Tool Body moves to the HDR Pin Drying ALP.
Note: The default value for Turn fan on for is 2 seconds.
4. In Dry for, enter the length of time in seconds to keep the HDR Tool Body at the
HDR Pin Drying ALP to dry.
Note: The default value for Dry for is 5 seconds.
5. In Leave fan on for, enter the length of time in seconds to leave the fan on after
the HDR Tool Body moves away from the HDR Pin Drying ALP.
Note: The default value for Leave fan on for is 2 seconds.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-36
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6. Leave the pin height as is to use the default setting.
OR
Set the pin height manually using one of the following methods:
•
Position the cursor over the graphic of a pin inside a well. Click and
drag the graphic up or down. The pin moves with the cursor, and the
height displayed below the graphic is adjusted as the graphic is
manipulated.
Note: The cursor changes to a hand when positioned over the graphic.
•
Selecting the graphic of a pin inside a well, and use the ↑ and ↓ keys.
The textual representation of the height, which is displayed below the
graphic, adjusts in 0.1 millimeter (mm) increments.
•
Right-click on the graphic of a pin inside a well, and a menu appears.
Select Custom Height, and Custom Height appears (Figure 6-22).
Insert the Height in millimeters (mm) and, in from, select a reference
point from the drop-down list. Choose OK.
Figure 6-22. Custom Height prompt
7. Configure additional Cleaning Operations following the procedures in Sections
6.6.1.1.1, Configuring a Wash Operation and 6.6.1.1.2, Configuring a Drying
Operation.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.6.2
6-37
Using the Device Action Step
The Device Action step can be used to configure the actions of the HDR Cleaning
System on the deck during a method, such as turning the fan in the HDR Drying ALP
on and off or turning wash pumps for the circulating reservoir(s) on and off.
Note: An HDR Pin Drying ALP and/or circulating reservoir must be configured in
Hardware Setup (refer to Section 6.3, Installing and Configuring Devices
Associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir in Hardware
Setup) and placed on the deck in the Deck Editor (refer to Section 6.4, Adding the
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir to the Deck in Biomek Software)
prior to using the Device Action step to operate components of the HDR Cleaning
System.
Insert a Device Action step into the Method View (Figure 6-23).
Note: The Device Action step is located on the Devices Step Palette. Refer to the
Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 22.2, Displaying the Devices Step Palette,
to display the Devices Step Palette.
Figure 6-23. Device Action step
ALPs User’s Manual
6-38
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.6.2.1
Configuring the Device Action Step for a
Circulating Reservoir
To configure the Device Action step for a Circulating Reservoir (Figure 6-24):
1. Insert a Device Action step into the Method View.
2. In Device, select the WashPump performing the required operation.
OR
Click on the desired circulating reservoir in the Current Deck Display to select it.
The configuration for the Wash Pump appears (Figure 6-24)
Note: The deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck Display.
Deck Position
Indicates the location of the
device performing the
action on the deck.
Method View
The Device Action
caption indicates the
device and its status.
Device Action Step Configuration
The Device Action step configuration
specifies an operation performed on a
wash station ALP.
Figure 6-24. Device Action step for the Circulating Reservoir
3. In Command, indicate the desired state for the Wash Pump: On or Off.
Note: The Wash Pump automatically stops when the Finish step is executed.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.6.2.2
6-39
Configuring the Device Action Step for the HDR
Pin Drying ALP
To configure the Device Action step for the HDR Pin Drying ALP (Figure 6-24):
1. Insert a Device Action step into the Method View.
2. In Device, select the Fan performing the required operation.
OR
Click on the HDR Pin Drying ALP in the Current Deck Display to select it. The
configuration for the HDR Pin Drying ALP appears (Figure 6-24)
Note: The deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck Display.
Deck Position
Indicates the location of the device
performing the action on the deck.
Method View
The Device Action
caption indicates the
device and its status.
Device Action Step Configuration
The Device Action step configuration
specifies an operation performed on a
wash station ALP.
Figure 6-25. Device Action step for the fan
3. In Command, indicate the desired state for the fan on the HDR Pin Drying
ALP: On or Off.
Note: The fan automatically stops when the Finish step is executed.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-40
6.7
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and
Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method
The HDR Pin Drying ALP and circulating reservoir are both controlled by a Device
Controller. Use Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller to:
•
Turn the output channels on or off manually.
•
Monitor input channels.
When opened, Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller displays
which channels are on and which channels are off.
To manually control Device Controller channels:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the devices installed on the Biomek
FX instrument appears.
3. Select the desired Device Controller. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Device Controller appears (Figure 6-26).
4. To toggle the HDR Drying ALP fan on or off, click the desired Fan On/Off
button (Figure 6-26).
OR
To toggle the wash pump for the circulating reservoir on or off, click the desired
WashPump On/Off button (Figure 6-26).
Note: Channels that are on are highlighted with a bright green color.
Figure 6-26. Advanced Manual Control for a Device Controller with Fan on
5. When adjustment of channels has been completed as desired, choose Close.
Note: Choose Update to view which digital inputs are on or off.
6. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.8
6-41
Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and
Circulating Reservoir from the Deck
6.8.1
Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP
The HDR Pin Drying ALP can be used as a standard deck position when not in use
during a method.
To remove the HDR Pin Drying ALP from the deck:
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek FX instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
1. Turn off power to the Biomek FX instrument and Device Controller before
removing any ALP.
2. Unplug the fan from the Device Controller.
3. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the HDR Pin Drying ALP.
4. Lift the unit in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the locating
holes on the deck.
6.8.2
Removing the Circulating Reservoir
The circulating reservoir needs to be carefully dismantled prior to removing it from
the deck. To dismantle and remove the circulating reservoir from the deck:
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
1. Remove the outlet tubing from the peristaltic pump head.
2. Run the peristaltic pump in reverse until the reservoir is sufficiently drained.
3. Replace the outlet tubing in the peristaltic pump head.
4. Remove the inlet tubing from the peristaltic pump head.
5. Run the peristaltic pump forward to empty excess fluid in the bottom of the
reservoir.
6. Detach the inlet and outlet tubing from the circulating reservoir.
7. Drain and dispose of excess liquid in the inlet and outlet tubing according to
procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
8. Remove the circulating reservoir labware from the deck.
9. Dispose of waste fluid in the waste container as described by the laboratory
safety officer.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-42
6.9
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating
Reservoir
6.9.1
Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP
Return the HDR Pin Drying ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry,
dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: The HDR Pin Drying ALP can be used as a standard 1 x 1 Passive ALP when
not in use during a method.
6.9.2
Storing the Circulating Reservoir
Return the circulating reservoir and its accessories to the original packing materials
and store in a dry, dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the circulating reservoir to air dry before returning it to
the original packing materials.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
6.10
6-43
Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying
ALP and Circulating Reservoir
6.10.1
Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin
Drying ALP
Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
6.10.2
Preventive Maintenance for the Circulating
Reservoir
To ensure optimum operation, perform the following maintenance procedures as
necessary:
•
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
•
Do not overflow the reservoir.
•
Empty any cleaning solutions from the reservoirs when not in use and rinse
them thoroughly as outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
•
Make sure the reservoir is dry before storing.
ALPs User’s Manual
6-44
6.11
HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs (FX only)
Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP and
Circulating Reservoir
6.11.1
Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP
Do not attempt to repair the HDR Pin Drying ALP without first contacting a Beckman
Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 6-1. Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP
IF
The HDR Pin Drying ALP is not
functioning correctly
6.11.2
THEN
Make sure the Device Controller is
properly connected to the fan and the
Biomek FX instrument.
Troubleshooting the Circulating Reservoir
Do not attempt to repair the circulating reservoir without first contacting a Beckman
Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 6-2. Troubleshooting the Circulating Reservoir
IF
THEN
The circulating reservoir is not
functioning correctly.
Make sure the circulating reservoir,
peristaltic pump, and Device
Controller are all properly connected
to the Biomek FX instrument.
The circulating reservoir is not
filling.
Make sure that the tubing is properly
attached to the circulating reservoir
and pump and there are no kinks in
the line.
Make sure the inlet tubing is in
contact with the wash solution.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
7-1
7
7.1
Heating and Cooling ALP
Overview
The Heating and Cooling ALP (Figure 7-1) is an active ALP that heats or cools a
reservoir, microplate, or other standard labware. It is connected to an external
refrigeration and/or heating device using nylon fittings attached to a hose which
circulates cold or hot water through the Heating and Cooling ALP.
This ALP is created using a Standard 1 x 1 Passive ALP, a heating and cooling unit,
and a user-supplied circulating bath.
Note: The Heating and Cooling ALP is usually dedicated to a deck position since it
cannot be turned on and off via Biomek Software and must be controlled from the
circulating bath.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Heating and Cooling ALP (Section 7.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 7.3)
•
Removing the Heating and Cooling ALP (Section 7.4)
•
Storage (Section 7.5)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 7.6)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 7.7)
ALPs User’s Manual
7-2
Heating and Cooling ALP
WARNING: The Heating and Cooling ALP can reach extremely high
temperatures. Allow the Heating and Cooling ALP to cool before
removing it from the deck.
Heating & cooling
unit mounted to an
ALP stand
In/out hose fittings
Figure 7-1. Heating and Cooling ALP — top view
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Heating and Cooling ALP
7.2
7-3
Installing the Heating and Cooling ALP
Installing the Heating and Cooling ALP includes choosing any standard deck position
on the deck and mounting the ALP to the deck.
7.2.1
Mounting the Heating and Cooling ALP to
the Deck
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To install the Heating and Cooling ALP:
1. Turn a 1 x 1 Standard Passive ALP upside down and mount the heating &
cooling unit (Figure 7-2) to the underside of the ALP stand using the four screws
provided (Figure 7-3).
2. Position the Heating and Cooling ALP on the deck so the locating pins on the
bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck.
3. Attach the Heating and Cooling ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the
base of the ALP.
4. Attach the in and out hoses to the fittings (Figure 7-1).
Note: The hoses can be attached to either fitting, since the fluid circulation in
the Heating and Cooling ALP is not directionally specific.
Note: Make sure the hose routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
5. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for hooking up the circulating bath (refer
to Section 7.2.2, Circulator Bath Specifications).
ALPs User’s Manual
7-4
Heating and Cooling ALP
6. Apply power to the circulating bath.
Top of Heating and
Cooling ALP
Bottom of Heating and Cooling ALP
Figure 7-2. Heating & Cooling Unit
Bottom of 1 x 1 ALP
Locating pins
Thumbscrew
Thumbscrew
Screw placement
Top of 1 x 1 Standard Passive ALP
Figure 7-3. Heating and Cooling Unit mounting — bottom view
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Heating and Cooling ALP
7.2.2
7-5
Circulator Bath Specifications
The user-supplied circulator bath which heats or cools water to a specified
temperature to heat or cool the heating & cooling unit on top of the Heating and
Cooling ALP requires minimum specifications (see Table 7-1).
While the obtainable temperature range is dependent on the particular bath used; the
nominal temperature range for the Biomek heating & cooling unit is 4° C to 25° C.
Table 7-1. Minimum specifications for a Circulator Bath
Capacity
Specification
Temperature Range
4° C (min) to 25° C (max)
Flow
7 to 15 Liters per minute
Reservoir
6 Liters
Heating
1,000 W
Cooling
120 W at zero (0)°C
Note: The temperature difference of approximately 5° to 15° C between the
circulator bath and the heating & cooling unit should be considered when choosing a
circulator bath.
7.3
Framing Instructions
Frame the Heating and Cooling ALP according to the instructions in the specfic
user’s manual for the instrument.
7.4
Removing the Heating and Cooling ALP
CAUTION: Do not detach the hoses over the Biomek deck. Immediately
wipe up any spills with a soft cloth.
To remove the Heating and Cooling ALP:
1. Power down the circulating bath.
2. Loosen the mounting screws.
3. Remove the ALP from the deck.
4. Remove the hoses over a sink or reservoir container.
ALPs User’s Manual
7-6
7.5
Heating and Cooling ALP
Storage
Return the Heating and Cooling ALP to the original packing materials and store in a
dry, dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Heating and Cooling ALP to air-dry before
returning it to the original packing materials.
7.6
Preventive Maintenance
Lime deposits may be removed from the Heating and Cooling ALP using an acidic
solution of 0.1M Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Flush liberally with water when done.
7.7
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the Heating and Cooling ALP without first contacting a
Beckman Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 7-2. Troubleshooting the Heating and Cooling ALP
IF
THEN
The Heating and Cooling ALP is not
functioning correctly
Make sure that the hoses are attached
properly.
Contact the circulating bath
manufacturer.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-1
8
8.1
High-Density Passive ALPs
Overview
The High-Density Passive ALPs are open structures that hold multiple pieces of
labware, allowing more labware on the Biomek deck at one time while using as few
deck positions as possible.
The High-Density Passive ALPs increase deck flexibility when a method requires
access to large amounts of labware, but still requires access to other ALPs, such as the
Tip Wash ALPs or the Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP. These
ALPs are also useful when running the Plate Replication Wizard or when running
high-throughput screening methods.
High-Density Passive ALPs include:
•
4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP (refer to Section 8.1.1, 4 x 4 High-Density
Passive ALP).
•
4 x 3 High-Density Passive ALP (refer to Section 8.1.2, 4 x 3 High-Density
ALP).
Note: An LLS plate can be installed in any or all labware positions on the
4 x 3 High-Density ALP.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing High-Density Passive ALPs (Section 8.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 8.3)
•
Removing High-Density Passive ALPs from the Deck (Section 8.4)
•
Storage (Section 8.5)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 8.6)
ALPs User’s Manual
8-2
High-Density Passive ALPs
8.1.1
4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP
The 4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP can hold up to sixteen pieces of labware.
Microplates can be added to the ALP by a lab technician or by the Biomek gripper.
Note: Labware positioned on the 4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP is gripper
accessible and stackable (Figure 8-1).
4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP
Labware positions
Thumbscrews
Four thumbscrews are used to
secure the 4 x 4 High-Density
Passive ALP to the deck. (There are
two more thumbscrews on the
opposite side of the ALP.)
Figure 8-1. 4 x 4 High-Density Passive ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
High-Density Passive ALPs
8.1.2
8-3
4 x 3 High-Density ALP
The 4 x 3 High-Density ALP (Figure 8-2) is a Passive ALP that can hold up to twelve
pieces of labware. Microplates can be added to the 4 x 3 High Density ALP by a lab
technician or by the Biomek gripper.
Note: Labware positioned on the 4 x 3 ALP High-Density Passive ALP is gripper
accessible and stackable.
4 x 3 High-Density
Passive ALP
labware positions (Three
labware positions are
indicated here.)
Front of the
ALP
Thumbscrews
Four of the six thumbscrews on the base of the 4 x 3 HighDensity Passive ALP are used at any one time to secure the
ALP to the deck. (Five of the six thumbscrews are shown on
this graphic. The sixth thumbscrew is partially visible on the
top right corner of the ALP base.)
Figure 8-2. 4 x 3 High-Density Passive ALP
with a microplate being placed in a labware position
ALPs User’s Manual
8-4
High-Density Passive ALPs
8.1.2.1
Adding a Liquid Level Sensing (LLS) Plate to the
4 x 3 High-Density Passive ALP
The 4 x 3 High-Density Passive ALP stand supports an LLS plate option (Figure 8-3)
which when installed improves liquid level sensing capabilities in labware positioned
on the ALP. An LLS plate can be installed in any or all labware positions on the ALP.
Note: Labware positioned on a 4 x 3 High-Density Passive ALP with the LLS plate
option installed is gripper accessible and stackable.
LLS plate mounting
screw holes
Four mounting screws are
used to secure the LLS
plate to the ALP. (There
are two more screw holes
on the opposite side.)
Figure 8-3. LLS Plate (Top View)
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
High-Density Passive ALPs
8.1.2.1.1
8-5
Installing the LLS Plate Option on a 4 x 3 HighDensity Passive ALP
To install an LLS plate, complete the following:
1. Turn the High-Density Passive 4 x 3 ALP upside down.
2. Position the LLS plate upside down in the desired position on the ALP stand
(Figure 8-4).
LLS plate mounting
screws
Bottom of
LLS plate
Top of ALP
Bottom of
ALP
Figure 8-4. Installing an LLS Plate on an High-Density 4 x 3 ALP
3. Attach the LLS plate to the ALP with the four mounting screws provided by
turning the screws clockwise until finger tight. The LLS plate is now installed
(Figure 8-5).
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP with
LLS plate option installed
Labware rests on top of the LLS plate.
Installed LLS plate
Figure 8-5. High-Density Passive 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed
ALPs User’s Manual
8-6
8.2
High-Density Passive ALPs
Installing High-Density Passive ALPs
Installing High-Density Passive ALPS includes choosing the deck position and
mounting the ALP to the deck. The 4 x 3 ALP (Sections 8.2.1, Choosing a Deck
Position for the 4 x 3 ALP and 8.2.2, Mounting a 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck) and the 4 x 4
ALP (Sections 8.2.3, Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 4 ALP and 8.2.4, Mounting
the 4 x 4 ALP to the Deck) have different deck locations and slightly different
instructions for mounting the ALP to the deck.
8.2.1
Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 3 ALP
The 4 x 3 ALP occupies four columns and three rows on the Biomek deck. The 4 x 3
ALP can be placed in two separate positions on the Biomek deck, although only one
4 x 3 ALP can appear on the deck at a time. Use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to
determine available positions when mounting a 4 x 3 ALP on a Biomek Laboratory
Automation Workstation.
Note: When the 4 x 3 ALP is mounted on the Biomek deck, enough space is
available in the remaining open row for larger ALPs such as the Tip Wash ALPs or
the Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
8.2.2
Mounting a 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck
To mount the 4 x 3 ALP to the Biomek deck, complete the following:
1. Choose an appropriate deck location to mount the ALP to the deck (refer to
Section 8.2.1, Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 3 ALP).
2. Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip into
locating holes on the deck. Make sure the front of the ALP faces the front of the
Biomek deck.
Note: The front of the 4 x 3 ALP is indicated with the word “FRONT” etched
on the base of the ALP stand.
Note: Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning a 4 x 3 ALP on
the deck.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
High-Density Passive ALPs
8-7
3. Fasten the ALP to the deck using four of the six thumbscrews on the base of the
ALP (Figure 8-6) as follows:
Note: The 4 x 3 ALP has two base plates like the one displayed in
Figure 8-6. When fastening the ALP to the deck, two thumbscrews on each base
plate must be used.
•
When positioning the ALP along the front of the Biomek deck, use the
1st (front) thumbscrew and the 3rd thumbscrew.
•
When positioning the ALP along the back of the Biomek deck, use the
2nd thumbscrew and the 3rd thumbscrew.
3rd
thumbscrew
2nd
thumbscrew
1st
thumbscrew
Figure 8-6. Thumbscrew positioning on the base of the 4 x 3 ALP
8.2.3
Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 4 ALP
The 4 x 4 ALP occupies four columns and four rows on the Biomek deck. The 4 x 4
ALP can be placed in one location on the deck. When mounting a 4 x 4 ALP on a
Biomek instrument, use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine the available
deck position.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
ALPs User’s Manual
8-8
High-Density Passive ALPs
8.2.4
Mounting the 4 x 4 ALP to the Deck
To mount the 4 x 4 ALP to the Biomek deck, complete the following:
1. Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip into
locating holes on the deck.
Note: Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning a 4 x 4 ALP on
the deck.
2. Fasten the ALP to the deck using the four thumbscrews on the base of the ALP.
Note: The 4 x 4 ALP does not have a front or back side.
8.3
Framing Instructions
Frame High-Density Passive ALPs according to the instructions in the specific user’s
manuals for the instruments.
8.4
Removing High-Density Passive ALPs from the
Deck
To remove High-Density ALPs from the Biomek FX deck:
1. Remove labware from the ALP.
2. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP.
3. Lift the ALP straight up and off the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom
of the ALP clear the locating holes on the deck.
8.5
Storage
Return the High-Density Passive ALP to its original packing materials and store in a
dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the High-Density Passive ALP to air-dry before
returning it to the original packing materials.
8.6
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: High-Density ALPs may be contaminated from method
solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined
by the laboratory safety officer.
To clean, wipe all surfaces on the High-Density Passive ALP with a soft cloth.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
8-10
High-Density Passive ALPs
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
9-1
9
9.1
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive
ALP (NX-S8 only)
Overview
The Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP (Figure 9-1) can hold up to twelve
stacks of labware, allowing more labware on the Biomek NX Span-8 deck at one time
while using as few deck positions as possible. It is accessible by the Span-8 Pod on
the Biomek NX deck.
This ALP increases deck flexibility when a method requires access to large amounts
of labware, but still requires access to other ALPs, such as the Tip Wash ALPs or the
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP. It is also useful when running
high-throughput screening methods.
Microplates can be added to the Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP by a lab
technician or by the Biomek NX Span-8 gripper. Labware positioned on the HighDensity 4 x 3 ALP is gripper accessible and stackable.
The information in this chapter includes the following:
•
Adding a Liquid Level Sensing (LLS) Plate (Section 9.2).
•
Mounting the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck (Section 9.3).
•
Removing the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP from the Deck (Section 9.4)
•
Storage (Section 9.5).
•
Framing the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP (Section 9.6).
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 9.7).
ALPs User’s Manual
9-2
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
Biomek NX High-Density 4 x 3 ALP
There are 12 labware positions on the
NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP (Four
labware positions are indicated here.).
Thumb Screws
Two of the three thumbscrews on the base of the Biomek NX Span-8
High-Density 4 x 3 ALP are used to secure the ALP to the deck. The ALP
can be rotated; therefore, three thumb screws locations are available.
Figure 9-1. Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
9.2
9-3
Adding a Liquid Level Sensing (LLS) Plate
The Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP stand supports an LLS plate option
(Figure 9-2) which, when installed, improves liquid level sensing capabilities in
labware positioned on the ALP. An LLS plate can be installed in any or all labware
positions on the Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP.
Note: Labware positioned on a Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP with
the LLS Plate option installed is gripper accessible and stackable.
LLS Plate Mounting
Screw Holes
Four mounting screws are
used to secure the LLS
Plate to the NX-S8 HighDensity 4 x 3 ALP. (There
are two more screw holes
on the opposite side.)
Figure 9-2. LLS Plate (Top View)
To install an LLS plate:
1. Turn ALP upside down.
2. Position the LLS plate upside down in the desired position on the ALP stand
(Figure 9-3).
ALPs User’s Manual
9-4
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
3. Attach the LLS plate to the ALP with the four mounting screws provided by
turning the screws clockwise until finger tight. The LLS plate is now installed
(Figure 9-4).
LLS Plate Mounting
Screws
Bottom of
LLS Plate
Bottom of
NX-S8 HighDensity 4 x 3
ALP
Top of NX-S8 HighDensity 4 x 3 ALP
Figure 9-3. Installing an LLS Plate on an NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP
NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP with
LLS Plate Option Installed
Labware rests on top of the LLS plate.
Installed LLS Plate
Figure 9-4. NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
9.3
9-5
Mounting the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck
When it is mounted, NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP occupies four columns and three
rows on the Biomek NX deck. Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter
5, Preparing and Managing the Deck, to determine available positions for mounting
the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP on the deck.
Note: When the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP is mounted on the Biomek NX
deck, enough space is available in the remaining open row for larger ALPs such as the
Tip Wash ALPs or the Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP.
To mount the ALP to the Biomek NX deck:
1. Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip into
locating holes on the deck. Make sure the front of the ALP faces the front of the
Biomek NX deck.
Note: The front of the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP contains a single set
screw.
Note: Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning an NX-S8 HighDensity 4 x 3 ALP on the deck.
ALPs User’s Manual
9-6
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
2. Fasten the ALP to the deck using two of the three thumb screws on the base of
the ALP (Figure 9-5) as follows:
Note: The NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP has a single base plate. When
fastening the ALP to the deck, two thumb screws on the base plate must be used.
•
When positioning the ALP along the front of the deck, use the 1st
(front) and 3rd thumb screws.
•
When positioning the ALP along the back of the deck, rotate the ALP
180º and use the 1st and 2nd thumb screws.
3rd thumb
screw
1st thumb
screw
2nd thumb
screw
Figure 9-5. Thumb screw positioning on the base of the NX-S8
High-Density 4 x 3 ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
High-Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP (NX-S8 only)
9.4
9-7
Removing the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP from the
Deck
To remove the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP from the Biomek NX deck:
1. Remove labware from the ALP.
2. Loosen the two thumb screws on the base of the ALP used to secure the ALP to
the Biomek NX deck.
3. Lift the ALP straight up and off the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom
of the ALP clear the locating holes on the deck.
9.5
Storage
Return the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP to its original packing materials and store
in a dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP to air-dry before
returning it to the original packing materials.
9.6
Framing the High-Density 4 x 3 ALP
For instructions to frame the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP, refer to the Biomek®
NX Span-8 Laboratory Automation Workstation User’s Manual, Chapter 4, Framing
Instructions.
9.7
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: The NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP may be contaminated
from method solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination
procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
To clean, wipe all surfaces on the NX-S8 High-Density 4 x 3 ALP with a soft cloth.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-1
10 Magnetic Bead ALP
10.1
Overview
The Magnetic Bead ALP (Figure 10-1) is an active ALP that positions magnetic
beads in microplates for pipetting operations. A magnet is engaged (moved closer to
the microplate) and disengaged (moved away from the microplate) to position and
release magnetic beads for re-suspension in a microplate. A clamping mechanism is
provided to flatten microplates, such as thermocycler plates, for pipetting.
Microplates can be placed on the Magnetic Bead ALP by a lab technician or the
Biomek gripper.
Note: The Magnetic Bead ALP has one open-centered position. When using
miniskirted labware or other labware in which the bottom of the wells is below the top
surface of the ALP, per-labware offsets must be defined for the head(s) to access the
bottom of these labware types (refer to Section 10.4.2.3, Defining Per-Labware
Offsets).
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP (Section 10.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 10.3)
•
Using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a Method (Section 10.4)
•
Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method (Section 10.5)
•
Removing the Magnetic Bead ALP (Section 10.6)
•
Storage (Section 10.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 10.8)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 10.9)
ALPs User’s Manual
10-2
Magnetic Bead ALP
Clamps
Thumbscrews
Figure 10-1. Magnetic Bead ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.2
10-3
Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP
Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP includes:
•
Choosing any standard deck position.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically
mount the ALP, configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
•
Mounting the Magnetic Bead ALP to the Deck (Section 10.2.1).
•
Using Interchangeable Magnets (Section 10.2.2).
10.2.1
Mounting the Magnetic Bead ALP to the
Deck
To mount the Magnetic Bead ALP to the Biomek deck:
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any ALP.
2. Position the Magnetic Bead ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP
slip into locating holes on the deck.
3. Fasten the Magnetic Bead ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of
the ALP.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-4
Magnetic Bead ALP
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable (1 meter [39.37 in.], Part
Number 717781) can be used in each chain of ALPs. If more than one
long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN communication errors may
occur.
CAUTION: A maximum of one device can be chained to a Magnetic Bead
ALP. If more than one device is chained to a Magnetic Bead ALP, the
Biomek instrument may not be able to supply sufficient electrical
current to operate all devices on the chain.
4. Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male CAN Port on
the Magnetic Bead ALP (Figure 10-2).
ADR1 ADR2
Address switches
CAN ports
Figure 10-2. Magnetic Bead ALP CAN connections
Note: When possible, short (0.56 meter; 22 in.) CAN cables should be used
when connecting devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-5
5. Plug the other end of the CAN communication cable into one of the following
connectors:
Note: Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek FX.
•
Any female connector labeled CAN Port on the main Biomek
instrument.
•
Any available female connector labeled CAN Port on another active
ALP, creating a chain of connected devices.
Note: A chain links multiple devices together. The maximum number
of devices that can be chained together with a Magnetic Bead ALP is
two (including the Magnetic Bead ALP). Each chain of two devices
must plug into the main Biomek instrument.
6. Verify that address switch ADR1 is set between 0 and 7.
7. Verify that address switch ADR2 is set between 0 and F.
10.2.2
Using Interchangeable Magnets
The Magnetic Bead ALP uses interchangeable magnets to draw magnetic beads to
specific positions in a microplate. Interchangeable magnets make it possible to use
different magnet types for different applications. Flat or post magnets designed for
laboratory use may be used with the Magnetic Bead ALP.
The Magnetic Bead ALP supports the following magnets:
•
96-Well Post Magnet (Part Number 379511)
•
96-Well Flat Magnet (Part Number 379512)
10.2.2.1
Installing Magnets to the Magnetic Bead ALP
To install a magnet in the Magnetic Bead ALP:
1. In Advanced Manual Control, use the Move Magnet command to raise the
magnet to a Magnet Position of 5 cm (refer to Section 10.5, Controlling the
Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method). The magnet raises to its highest position
and a motion error appears (Figure 10-3).
Figure 10-3. Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit
2. Choose OK to close the error message.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-6
Magnetic Bead ALP
3. If another magnet is already installed, remove the magnet from the Magnetic
Bead ALP (refer to Section 10.2.2.2, Removing Magnets from the Magnetic Bead
ALP).
4. Position the magnet such that the mounting holes on the bottom of the magnet
slip over the dowels on the mounting plate (Figure 10-4).
Magnet
Place the magnet
on the mounting
plate such that the
mounting holes on
the bottom of the
magnet slip over
the dowels on the
mounting plate.
Dowels
Mounting plate
Figure 10-4. Attaching magnet to mounting plate
Note: The magnet type configured in Hardware Setup must match the magnet type
installed in the Magnetic Bead ALP. When changing magnet types, make sure
appropriate changes are also made in Hardware Setup (refer to Section 10.4.1,
Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.2.2.2
10-7
Removing Magnets from the Magnetic Bead ALP
To remove a magnet from the Magnetic Bead ALP:
1. In Advanced Manual Control, use the Move Magnet command to raise the
magnet to a Magnet Position of 5 cm (refer to Section 10.5, Controlling the
Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method). The magnet moves to its highest
position and a motion error appears (Figure 10-5).
Figure 10-5. Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit
2. Choose OK to close the error message.
3. Lift the magnet in an upward motion to clear the mounting holes from the dowels
on the mounting plate and remove the magnet from the ALP.
Note: The magnet type configured in Hardware Setup must match the magnet type
installed in the Magnetic Bead ALP. When changing magnet types, make sure
appropriate changes are also made in Hardware Setup (refer to Section 10.4.1,
Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup).
10.3
Framing Instructions
Special instructions are necessary to frame the Magnetic Bead ALP.
To frame the Magnetic Bead ALP:
1. In Advanced Manual Control, use the Disengage command to move the
magnet to its home position (refer to Section 10.5.1, Homing the Magnet).
2. Frame the Magnetic Bead ALP according to the instructions in the user’s manual
for the Biomek instrument on which the ALP is installed.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-8
10.4
Magnetic Bead ALP
Using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a Method
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Pinch Point! The clamps used to secure a microplate to the
Magnetic Bead ALP could cause personal injury. Avoid interference with
the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP.
It is important that deck and labware settings are configured appropriately in the
Deck Editor (refer to Section 10.4.2, Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck
Editor) and Labware Type Editor (refer to Section 10.4.3, Configuring
LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP) prior to using the Magnetic Bead
ALP in a method for obstacle avoidance and accurate pipetting.
Using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a method includes:
•
Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup
(Section 10.4.1).
•
Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck Editor (Section 10.4.2).
•
Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP (Section
10.4.3).
•
Configuring the Device Action Step for a Magnetic Bead ALP (Section
10.4.5).
10.4.1
Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead
ALP in Hardware Setup
After physically installing the Magnetic Bead ALP on the deck, the ALP is detected
on the Biomek instrument and must be properly installed and configured in
Hardware Setup.
Follow the instructions in Chapter 1.3.1, Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup to
install the Magnetic Bead ALP.
Follow the instructions in 10.4.1.1, Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware
Setup
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.4.1.1
10-9
Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware
Setup
The software needs to know the magnet type installed in the Magnetic Bead ALP to
utilize the ALP in a method.
To configure the Magnetic Bead ALP:
1. Select the MagBeadALP from the list of Devices in the left pane of Hardware
Setup. The configuration view for the Magnetic Bead ALP appears in the right
pane (Figure 10-6).
Figure 10-6. Hardware Setup — Magnetic Bead ALP configuration
2. Specify the Magnet Type. Options are:
•
96-Well Flat Magnet
•
96-Well Post Magnet
•
No Magnet
3. Choose Accept to save changes and close Hardware Setup.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-10
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.4.2
Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the
Deck Editor
Before the Magnetic Bead ALP can be used in a method, the software needs to know
the location of the Magnetic Bead ALP on the deck. The software representation of
the instrument deck is configured in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software
User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
10.4.2.1
Adding a Magnetic Bead ALP to the Deck
A new Magnetic Bead ALP can be added to the deck in the appropriate locations
using the Deck Editor. Deck positions are named automatically when a Magnetic
Bead ALP is added to the deck.
To add a Magnetic Bead ALP to the deck, complete the following:
1. Select Instrument>Deck Editor. The Deck Editor appears.
2. Click and hold the mouse button on the MagBeadALP in the ALP Types List.
Notice that the locations capable of supporting the ALP are indicated by dashed
boxes.
3. Drag and drop the MagBeadALP from the ALP Types list to the desired
location on the Deck View. The ALP appears and deck positions are named
automatically.
Note: Deck positions may be renamed (refer to Section 10.4.2.2, Setting
Magnetic Bead ALP Position Properties).
Note: If the MagBeadALP is about to be placed where another ALP is
currently placed on the deck, the following warning appears (Figure 10-7).
Delete the currently-placed ALP before placing the MagBeadALP on the deck
(refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5.4.1, Deleting ALPs and
Deck Positions from a Deck).
Figure 10-7. Warning appears because an ALP is about to be placed
where it overlaps another ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.4.2.2
10-11
Setting Magnetic Bead ALP Position Properties
After a Magnetic Bead ALP is placed on the deck, set the properties of the ALP and
related deck position.
Note: For a description of all the ALP and deck position properties, refer to the
Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5.4.3, Setting ALP Properties and Deck
Positions.
Deck position properties include Labware Offsets that place the labware in the
appropriate place for pipetting operations. Because the Magnetic Bead ALP is
associated with a device, the Device association must be set for the Magnetic Bead
ALP deck position.
To set deck position properties:
1. Select the position to modify on the Deck View of the Deck Editor.
2. Select Properties from the Deck Editor toolbar.
OR
Double-click on the deck position.
OR
Right-click on the desired position and select Properties from the menu.
Position Properties appears (Figure 10-8).
Figure 10-8. Position Properties for Deck Positions
Note: The deck position is highlighted on the Deck View with a pink line
inside the ALP.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-12
Magnetic Bead ALP
3. In Name, rename the deck position, if desired.
Note: Names for deck positions must be alphanumeric with no spaces; the only
non-alphanumeric character allowed is “_” (underscore). The first character must
be a letter.
4. Specify the X, Y, and Z Coordinates of the appropriate pod by teaching the
ALP.
Note: ALPs are taught indirectly when positions are taught.
¾
FX — If a position is accessible by both pods in a dual-pod system, each pod
must be framed to the position.
5. Select More>> to display the device association and labware offset options.
6. In Device, choose the appropriate MagBeadALP to associate with the deck
position.
7. If desired, choose Per-labware Offsets to customize the offsets for specific
types of labware (refer to Section 10.4.2.3, Defining Per-Labware Offsets).
8. Adjust the Min Safe Height, if necessary. The Min Safe Height is the height at
which the pod(s) move when moving to or passing over the Magnetic Bead ALP,
and is predefined at a height that avoids collisions between the clamp arms and
the pod(s).
Note: The Labware Offsets and Position Span are predefined in the software.
Do not modify these properties.
9. Choose OK to save the deck position properties and return to the Deck Editor.
10. Choose Save to close the Deck Editor.
Note: The deck must be framed (taught) using the framing tools after creating
or modifying a deck.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.4.2.3
10-13
Defining Per-Labware Offsets
A Per-Labware Offset tells the software that the labware type is offset from the
default labware position when placed on the ALP. Some labware types sit differently
on a closed-centered ALP than on an open-centered ALP because the edge, or skirt, of
the labware is above the bottom of the wells. Because these miniskirted labware types
sit at different heights depending on which type of ALP (open- or closed-centered)
they are placed on, the software must know which labware types are offset for a
particular ALP position.
On a closed-centered ALP, miniskirted labware types sit on the wells, while on an
open-centered ALP, the labware sits on the skirt and the wells extend below the top
surface of the ALP (Figure 10-9). For example, when a PlasmidFilter is placed on a
Magnetic Bead ALP (which is an open-centered ALP), the bottom of the labware is
2.25 centimeters below the top surface of the ALP because the skirt is 2.25
centimeters above the bottom of the wells. This labware type needs a Z offset of
-2.25 cm for any open-centered ALP that it is placed on.
Note: For these miniskirted labware types, it is important to properly define perlabware offsets for obstacle avoidance and accurate pipetting.
Closed-centered
Open-centered
Figure 10-9. Miniskirted labware on closed- and open-centered deck positions
To set per-labware offsets for a deck position:
Note: When creating or modifying a deck, all open-centered positions need to define
per-labware offsets for any labware types that extend below the ALP surface.
1. Select Instrument>Deck Editor. Deck Editor appears.
2. Select the deck position to modify.
3. Select Properties
OR
Double-click the deck position
OR
Right-click the desired position and select Properties. Position Properties
appears.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-14
Magnetic Bead ALP
4. Choose More to expand Position Properties, if necessary (Figure 10-10).
Figure 10-10. Position Properties
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-15
5. Choose Per-Labware Offsets. Per-Labware Offsets appears (Figure 10-11).
Figure 10-11. Per-Labware Offsets
6. Select the labware type that is not flush with the top surface of the ALP when it is
placed on it.
7. In X, enter the distance the left edge of the labware type is offset from the right
side of the left-most locating cone when placed on the deck position.
Note: The X offset is 0 if the labware type is positioned against the
left-most locating cones.
8. In Y, enter the distance the back edge of the labware type is offset from the front
of the back-most locating cone when placed on the deck position.
Note: The Y offset is 0 if the labware type is positioned against the
back-most locating cones.
9. In Z, enter the distance the bottom of the labware type is offset from the top of
the ALP surface when placed on the deck position.
Note: A negative Z offset indicates that the bottom of the labware is below the
surface of the ALP.
Note: While the offset values in steps 7, 8, and 9 may be calculated using
calipers, a more precise measurement should be obtained from the
manufacturer’s drawings.
10. Repeat steps 6-9 for each labware type that requires per-labware offsets at the
position.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-16
Magnetic Bead ALP
11. Choose OK to save the offset values. Position Properties appears.
12. Choose OK. Deck Editor appears.
13. Repeat steps 2-12 for each position that requires per-labware offsets.
14. Choose Save to save per-labware offsets, along with any other changes made in
the Deck Editor, and close the Deck Editor.
Note: The per-labware offsets are not saved until the deck is saved with those
per-labware offsets. Choosing Cancel loses all per-labware offsets, along with
any other changes made in the Deck Editor, and closes the Deck Editor.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.4.3
10-17
Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the
Magnetic Bead ALP
The Biomek Software needs some additional information about labware types used
with the Magnetic Bead ALP. Use the Labware Type Editor to configure the magnet
types compatible with a labware type, the magnet engage height, clamp settings, and
labware sensing.
Note: Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and
Managing the Deck, for more information on creating and modifying labware types.
To configure Magnetic Bead ALP properties for a labware type:
1. Choose Project>Labware Type Editor. Labware Types appears. (Figure 1012).
Figure 10-12. Labware Types
ALPs User’s Manual
10-18
Magnetic Bead ALP
2. Select the desired labware type and choose Edit from the toolbar.
OR
Double-click the desired labware type.
OR
Right-click the desired labware type and choose Edit from the menu. Basic
Information appears (Figure 10-13).
Figure 10-13. Basic Information for the selected labware type
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-19
3. Choose Magbead in the left pane. The right pane changes to display the
Magbead configuration information (Figure 10-14).
Figure 10-14. Magbead configuration for the selected labware type
4. Magnet Type lists all available magnet types. Select the magnet types that may
be used with the selected labware type.
Note: If a magnet type is not selected, the magnet cannot be engaged while the
labware type is located on the Magnetic Bead ALP.
5. In Height, enter the distance in centimeters (cm) from the top of the ALP to
which the top of the specified magnet raises to when engaged. This Height is
used to configure how close the magnet gets to the bottom of the labware type
when engaged.
Note: Refer to Section 10.5.3, Determining Magnet Engage Height for Labware
Types, for instructions on determining the appropriate engage height.
Note: For a value greater than zero, the top of the magnet raises above the top of
the ALP. For a value less than zero, the top of the magnet is below the top of the
ALP.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-20
Magnetic Bead ALP
6. Select Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet to clamp the labware
during all pipetting operations or while the magnet is engaging.
Note: Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet is deselected by default.
7. Select Move arms to maximum height when clamping to allow the
clamps to move to their maximum height before clamping labware.
Note: Move arms to maximum height when clamping is deselected by
default. If Move arms to maximum height when clamping is not selected, the
clamps go to a specified height determined by the height of the labware type
before clamping.
CAUTION: The Magnetic Bead ALP may be damaged if liquid is
dispensed into an ALP that does not have labware positioned on it.
8. Select Sense labware before pipetting or gripping to detect the presence
of labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP prior to performing pipetting operations
on the selected labware type when on the Magnetic Bead ALP.
Note: Sense labware before pipetting or gripping is selected by default.
9. Choose Save.
Note: Three sections of hints are offered at the bottom of the edit option. The first
section displays a graphic of the labware, the second section explains the selected
field, and the third section explains any errors resulting from editing the labware
properties. Place the cursor over the desired labware properties field and click to view
these hints.
10.4.4
Understanding How the Magnetic Bead
ALP Performs Automatically
When certain steps are used in a method that interact with the Magnetic Bead ALP,
some magnet positioning and clamping operations are performed automatically:
•
The magnet is disengaged and clamps are deactuated whenever a gripper
move is performed at the Magnetic Bead ALP.
•
The clamps are actuated whenever a liquid transfer operation is performed at
the Magnetic Bead ALP if Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet is
selected in the Labware Type Editor for the specified labware type.
Note: To access labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP without clamping it,
deselect Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet on the MagBead
configuration in the Labware Type Editor for the desired labware type
(refer to Section 10.4.3, Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic
Bead ALP).
Note: A Magnetic Bead ALP must be configured in Hardware Setup (refer to
Section 10.4.1, Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup)
and placed on the deck in the Deck Editor (refer to Section 10.4.2, Configuring a
Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck Editor) prior to using the ALP in a method.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.4.5
10-21
Configuring the Device Action Step for a
Magnetic Bead ALP
The Device Action step is used to configure the actions of the Magnetic Bead ALP
on the deck during a method, such as positioning the magnet, verifying the presence
or absence of labware, or actuating the clamp.
Note: The magnet position remains in the engaged or disengaged state until another
Device Action step engages or disengages the magnet.
Insert a Device Action step into the Method View (Figure 10-15).
Note: The Device Action step is located on the Devices Step Palette. Refer to the
Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 22.2, Displaying the Devices Step Palette,
to display the Devices Step Palette.
Device
Select the device to
control here.
Command
Select the action for the
device to execute here.
Some commands require
further configuration.
Figure 10-15. Device Action step and configuration
ALPs User’s Manual
10-22
Magnetic Bead ALP
To configure the Device Action step for a Magnetic Bead ALP:
1. From Device, select the Magnetic Bead ALP performing the required operation.
OR
Click on the Magnetic Bead ALP on the Current Deck Display to select it. The
configuration for the Magnetic Bead ALP appears (Figure 10-16).
Note: When selected, the deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck
Display.
Method view
The Device
Action caption
indicates the
device and its
command.
Device Action step configuration
The Device Action step configuration
specifies an operation performed on the
Magnetic Bead ALP.
Figure 10-16. Device Action step for the Magnetic Bead ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-23
2. In Command, indicate the desired action for the Magnetic Bead ALP:
•
Disengage — lowers the magnet to its home position
•
Engage — raises the magnet to the engage position specified in the
Labware Type Editor for the labware and magnet type
Note: The Engage command automatically senses and clamps
labware if specified in the Labware Type Editor. Refer to Section
10.4.3, Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP,
for more information.
•
Clamp — actuates the clamp to hold the labware in place and flatten
warped microplates
•
Unclamp — releases the clamp to allow the labware to be removed
from the ALP
Note: Clamping and unclamping of labware occurs automatically if
Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet is selected in the
Labware Type Editor for the specified labware type (refer to Section
10.4.3, Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP).
•
VerifyLabware — verifies that labware is currently on the Magnetic
Bead ALP; an error displays and the method stops if no labware is found
•
VerifyNoLabware — verifies that there is currently no labware on the
Magnetic Bead ALP; an error displays and the method stops if labware
is found
Note: The Engage command requires further configuration, as described
below. Other commands do not require further configuration.
3. In Pause After Magnet Engages, enter the amount of time in seconds to pause
to allow the magnetic beads to be drawn to the magnet before performing
additional operations at the position.
Note: Pause After Magnet Engages pauses only the position. Operations
may still be performed at other deck positions while the Magnetic Bead ALP is
paused.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-24
10.5
Magnetic Bead ALP
Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a
Method
To control the Magnetic Bead ALP outside a method, use Advanced Manual
Control for:
•
Homing the Magnet (Section 10.5.1).
•
Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet (Section 10.5.2).
•
Determining Magnet Engage Height for Labware Types (Section 10.5.3).
•
Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Magnetic Bead ALP (Section
10.5.4).
•
Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP Recognizes a Labware Type
(Section 10.5.5).
Note: Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed. If a
need for manual control is realized during a method run, stop the method using the
Stop button or Snap Continuation button (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 25.11.2, Snapping a Continuation) before accessing Manual
Control.
10.5.1
Homing the Magnet
Homing the magnet gives the Biomek instrument a point of reference from which to
make subsequent magnet moves. Home position for the magnet is fully disengaged to
the lowest point in the magnet’s travel.
The magnet automatically homes at the beginning and end of each method.
To home the magnet:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears.
3. Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-25
4. From Command, choose Disengage Magnet (Figure 10-17).
From Command, choose
Disengage Magnet.
Figure 10-17. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Disengage Magnet selected
5. Choose Go. The magnet disengages to its lowest position.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
10.5.2
Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet
Use Advanced Manual Control to engage (raise) the magnet to its highest position
or disengage (lower) the magnet to its lowest position.
To engage the magnet:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears.
3. Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-26
Magnetic Bead ALP
4. From Command, choose Manual Engage Magnet (Figure 10-18).
Figure 10-18. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Manual Engage Magnet selected
5. In Labware, select the labware type of the labware positioned on the Magnetic
Bead ALP.
Note: By default, the labware type listed first alphabetically is the selected
Labware.
6. Choose Go. The magnet engages to the height specified in the Labware Type
Editor for the selected Labware type.
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
To disengage the magnet:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears.
3. Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears.
4. From Command, choose Disengage Magnet.
5. Choose Go. The magnet disengages to its lowest position.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.5.3
10-27
Determining Magnet Engage Height for
Labware Types
Different labware types sit differently in the Magnetic Bead ALP. Some labware may
have wells that descend below the top surface of the ALP. Different applications may
also require a different proximity between the magnet and the labware. For these
reasons, it is necessary to specify the magnet engage height for each labware type that
is used with the Magnetic Bead ALP.
To determine the desired engage height for a specific labware type:
1. Place the desired labware type on the Magnetic Bead ALP.
2. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
3. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears.
4. Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears.
5. From Command, choose Disengage Magnet to home the magnet.
6. Choose Go. The magnet disengages to its lowest position.
7. From Command, choose Move Magnet (Figure 10-19).
Figure 10-19. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Move Magnet selected
ALPs User’s Manual
10-28
Magnetic Bead ALP
8. In Magnet Position, enter the desired position for the magnet in centimeters.
The magnet moves to a position the specified distance from the top of the
Magnetic Bead ALP.
Note: A magnet position of 0 cm aligns the top of the magnet with the surface
of the Magnetic Bead ALP. To move the magnet to a position above the surface
of the ALP, enter the value as a positive number; to move the magnet to a
position below the surface of the ALP, enter the value as a negative number.
9. Choose Go. The magnet moves to the specified position.
10. Repeat steps 6 and 7 as needed until the magnet is in the desired engaged
position.
11. Record the Magnet Position once the magnet is in the desired engage position.
12. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
13. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
14. Choose Project>Labware Type Editor. Labware Types appears (Figure 1012).
15. Select the desired labware type and choose Edit from the toolbar.
OR
Double-click the desired labware type.
OR
Right-click the desired labware type and choose Edit from the menu. Basic
Information appears.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-29
16. Choose Magbead (Figure 10-20).
Figure 10-20. Magbead configuration for the selected labware type
17. Magnet Type lists all available magnet types. Select the magnet types that may
be used with the selected labware type.
Note: If a magnet type is not selected, the magnet cannot be engaged or
disengaged while the labware type is located on the Magnetic Bead ALP.
18. In Height, enter the Magnet Position recorded in step 9. This is the distance in
centimeters (cm) between the top of the ALP and the top of the magnet when the
magnet is fully engaged.
Note: If the desired engage position of the magnet is above the top of the ALP,
enter the value as a positive number; if the desired engage position of the magnet
is below the top of the ALP, enter the value as a negative number.
19. Choose Save.
Note: Refer to Section 10.4.3, Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic
Bead ALP, for more labware configuration options.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-30
Magnetic Bead ALP
10.5.4
Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a
Magnetic Bead ALP
To clamp labware on a Magnetic Bead ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears.
3. Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears.
4. From Command, choose Manual Clamp (Figure 10-21).
Figure 10-21. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Manual Clamp selected
5. In Labware, specify the labware type to clamp on the Magnetic Bead ALP.
CAUTION: Make sure the labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP matches
the labware type specified. The clamps raise to a height set for the
labware type before clamping and incorrect settings may result in
inaccurate clamping.
6. Choose Go. The Magnetic Bead ALP clamps the selected labware.
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-31
To unclamp labware from a Magnetic Bead ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears.
3. Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears.
4. From Command, choose Unclamp.
5. Choose Go.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
10.5.5
Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic Bead
ALP Recognizes a Labware Type
The sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP detects all of the default microplates and lids
installed with the Biomek Software. However, some other microplate designs may not
be recognized by the sensor.
To verify if the sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP recognizes a specific labware type:
1. Place the desired labware type on the Magnetic Bead ALP.
2. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
3. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears.
4. Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-32
Magnetic Bead ALP
5. From Command, choose VerifyLabware (Figure 10-22).
Figure 10-22. Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP
with Verify Labware selected
6. Choose Go. The Magnetic Bead ALP recognizes the piece of labware unless an
Error appears (Figure 10-23).
Note: If the following Error (Figure 10-23) appears, the sensor does not
recognize the labware present on the Magnetic Bead ALP; the sensor is not
operating properly or the ALP does not recognize the labware type.
Note: Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer if several labware types are
not recognized; the sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP may not be operating
properly, or may need to be cleaned using a cotton swab with an alcohol solution.
Figure 10-23. Error indicating labware not found at sensor
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Magnetic Bead ALP
10-33
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Note: If a labware type is not recognized by the sensor, deselect Always Sense
Labware in the Labware Type Editor for the desired labware type. However, the
Magnetic Bead ALP could be damaged if liquid is dispensed into an ALP that does
not have labware positioned on it.
10.6
Removing the Magnetic Bead ALP
To remove the Magnetic Bead ALP from the deck:
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before removing any ALP.
2. Unplug the CAN communication cable(s) from the CAN Port(s) on the Magnetic
Bead ALP.
3. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Magnetic Bead ALP.
4. Lift the unit in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the locating
holes on the deck.
10.7
Storage
To prepare the Magnetic Bead ALP for storage:
1. Remove the installed magnet from the Magnetic Bead ALP (refer to Section
10.2.2.2, Removing Magnets from the Magnetic Bead ALP).
2. Disengage the magnet mounting plate to its lowest position (refer to Section
10.5.2, Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet).
3. Remove the Magnetic Bead ALP from the deck (refer to Section 10.6, Removing
the Magnetic Bead ALP).
4. Return the Magnetic Bead ALP to the original packing materials and store in a
dry, dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Magnetic Bead ALP to air-dry before returning it to
the original packing materials.
10.8
Preventive Maintenance
Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
ALPs User’s Manual
10-34
10.9
Magnetic Bead ALP
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
Table 10-1. Troubleshooting the Magnetic Bead ALP
IF
The magnet does not engage or
disengage.
THEN
Make sure the labware type is defined
properly in the Labware Type
Editor.
Make sure a good power connection
has been established.
The magnet stalls or does not move
properly.
Using Advanced Manual Control,
home the magnet (refer to Section
10.5.1, Homing the Magnet).
The magnet is not drawing beads to
the desired position.
Make sure the labware type on the
Magnetic Bead ALP is properly
identified in Instrument Setup.
Adjust the magnet engage height for
the labware in the Labware Type
Editor (refer to Section 10.4.2.2,
Setting Magnetic Bead ALP Position
Properties).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
The clamps are not grasping the
labware.
Make sure the labware type is defined
properly in the Labware Type
Editor (refer to Section 10.4.2.2,
Setting Magnetic Bead ALP Position
Properties).
The sensors are not functioning
properly.
Verify the sensors recognize the
labware type (refer to Section 10.5.5,
Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic
Bead ALP Recognizes a Labware
Type).
11-1
11 Microplate Shaking ALP
11.1
Overview
The Microplate Shaking ALP is an active ALP designed to mix solutions in
microplates using a linear shaking motion (Figure 11-1).
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP (Section 11.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 11.3)
•
Using the Microplate Shaking ALP in a Method (Section 11.4)
•
Controlling the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method (Section 11.5)
•
Removing the Microplate Shaking ALP (Section 11.6)
•
Storage (Section 11.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 11.8)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 11.9)
ALPs User’s Manual
11-2
Microplate Shaking ALP
Figure 11-1. Microplate Shaking ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Microplate Shaking ALP
11.2
11-3
Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP
Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP includes choosing any standard deck position
on the deck and mounting the ALP to the deck.
Note: Use Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine available deck positions
when mounting the ALP on a Biomek instrument.
11.2.1
Mounting the Microplate Shaking ALP to
the Deck
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
To mount the Microplate Shaking ALP:
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any active ALP.
2. Position the Microplate Shaking ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the
ALP slip into locating holes on the deck.
3. Using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP, attach the ALP to the deck.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
4. Attach the CAN communications cable to the CAN communications port.
Note: When possible, short CAN cables should be used when connecting
devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument.
ALPs User’s Manual
11-4
Microplate Shaking ALP
5. Plug one end of the CAN communication cable into either of the two connectors
labeled “CAN Port” on the Microplate Shaking ALP (Figure 11-2).
Note: Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
CAN connections
Address
switches
ADR1
Air connection
ADR2
Figure 11-2. Microplate Shaking ALP connections
6. Attach air tubing from a 40 psi port on the outside of the left or right tower to the
air inlet on the Microplate Shaking ALP (Figure 11-2).
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
7. Turn on the corresponding air valve.
8. Verify the ADR1 address switch is set to 1 (Figure 11-2).
9. Set ADR2 to a unique address between zero (0) and F, if multiple Microplate
Shaking ALPs are on the deck (Figure 11-2).
Note: ADR2 is set to a default address of zero (0). If only one Microplate
Shaking ALP is on the deck, ADR2 is the default setting.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Microplate Shaking ALP
11.3
11-5
Framing Instructions
Frame the Microplate Shaking ALP according to the instructions in the specific user’s
manual for the Biomek instrument
11.4
Using the Microplate Shaking ALP in a Method
To use the Microplate Shaking ALP in a method, it must be installed in Hardware
Setup (refer to Chapter 1.3, Installing and Configuring ALPs).
Note: Configuration in Hardware Setup is not necessary for the ALP.
The Microplate Shaking ALP is controlled and operated through the Device Action
step in Biomek Software (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter
22.6.1.5, Configuring the Device Action Step for the Microplate Shaking ALP (FX,
NX only)). The speed, shaking time, and ramp time are all configured through the
Device Action step for use in a method.
CAUTION: Set the shaking speed at the lowest setting and increase
slowly to the desired setting. This helps prevent spills or splashing.
ALPs User’s Manual
11-6
11.5
Microplate Shaking ALP
Controlling the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside
a Method
Use Advanced Manual Control for:
•
Turning On the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method (Section 11.5.1).
•
Timing a Shaking Operation Outside a Method (Section 11.5.2).
•
Turning Off the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method (Section 11.5.3).
•
Clamping or Unclamping a Plate Outside a Method (Section 11.5.4).
11.5.1
Turning On the Microplate Shaking ALP
Outside a Method
To turn on a Microplate Shaking ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Shake ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the selected
Microplate Shaking ALP appears (Figure 11-3).
Figure 11-3. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Microplate Shaking ALP
4. From Command, choose Shake.
5. Enter a percentage in Shaking speed.
Note: The allowed minimum percentage is 1 and the allowed maximum
percentage is 100.
6. Enter a time in seconds in Time to reach full speed.
7. Choose Go.
8. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
9. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Microplate Shaking ALP
11.5.2
11-7
Timing a Shaking Operation Outside a
Method
To time a shaking operation:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Shaker ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the selected
Microplate Shaking ALP appears (Figure 11-3).
4. From Command, choose Timed Shake. Advanced Manual Control for the
Microplate Shaking ALP with Timed Shake appears (Figure 11-4).
Figure 11-4. Advanced Manual Control for a Microplate Shaking ALP
with Timed Shake choices
5. Enter a percentage in Shaking speed.
Note: The allowed minimum percentage is 1 and the allowed maximum
percentage is 100.
6. Enter a time in seconds in Time to reach full speed.
7. Enter a time in seconds in Time to shake.
8. Choose Go.
9. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
10. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
ALPs User’s Manual
11-8
Microplate Shaking ALP
11.5.3
Turning Off the Microplate Shaking ALP
Outside a Method
To turn off the Microplate Shaking ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Shaker ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the selected
Microplate Shaking ALP appears (Figure 11-3).
4. From Command, choose Off.
5. Choose Go.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
11.5.4
Clamping or Unclamping a Plate Outside a
Method
To clamp or unclamp a plate on the Microplate Shaking ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Shaker ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the selected
Microplate Shaking ALP appears (Figure 11-3).
4. From Command, choose Clamp to activate the clamp on the Microplate
Shaking ALP.
OR
From Command, choose Unclamp to deactivate the clamp on the Microplate
Shaking ALP.
5. Choose Go.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Microplate Shaking ALP
11.6
11-9
Removing the Microplate Shaking ALP
To remove the Microplate Shaking ALP:
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before removing any active ALP.
2. Detach power/communication connection.
3. Shut off manual air valve on the tower.
4. Detach air tubing.
5. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP.
6. Lift ALP straight up to clear the locating pins on the base of the ALP from the
locating holes on the deck.
11.7
Storage
Return the Microplate Shaking ALP to the original packing materials and store in a
dry, dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Microplate Shaking ALP to air-dry before returning
it to the original packing materials.
11.8
Preventive Maintenance
Clean up all spills immediately with a soft cloth, dampened with appropriate cleaning
compound.
11.9
Troubleshooting
Do not remove covers for any reason. Do not attempt to repair the Microplate
Shaking ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 11-1. Troubleshooting the Microplate Shaking ALP
IF
THEN
The Microplate Shaking ALP is not
functioning
Make sure a good power connection
has been established.
The clamps are not grasping the
labware
Make sure a good air connection has
been established.
ALPs User’s Manual
12-1
12 Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.1
Overview
The Multichannel Disposal ALP is a passive ALP that provides a means to dispose of
tips during a method. When the slide is attached, it can be used to dispose of tips, tip
boxes, and labware during a method.
This ALP is used by the Multichannel Pod in one of two ways:
•
Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide — The disposed tips are placed in
a waste receptacle positioned inside the Disposal ALP base.
OR
•
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide — A slide that extends beyond the
edge of the Biomek deck is inserted into the ALP. Tips, tip boxes, and
labware placed inside the ALP slide down into a receptacle placed below.
Note: The Multichannel Disposal ALP is shipped so that either of the two options
above can be assembled and used.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide (Section 12.2)
•
Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide (Section 12.3)
•
Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate (Section 12.4)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 12.5)
•
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide (Section 12.6)
•
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide (Section 12.7)
•
Storage (Section 12.8)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 12.9)
ALPs User’s Manual
12-2
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.1.1
Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide
WARNING: When using the self-contained Multichannel Disposal ALP
without the slide, do not overfill the disposal bag. Tips can spill over
onto the deck, possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous
materials.
When the Multichannel Disposal ALP is used as a self-contained waste receptacle
without the slide, the bagging extension is attached, and a waste bag is mounted
inside the ALP (Figure 12-1). The ALP is used in a standard deck position on the
back row of the deck and is particularly effective when lab space is at a premium.
Note: The Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide is used only for collecting
shucked tips.
Bagging extension
(used for
Multichannel
Disposal ALP
without Slide)
ALP base
Thumbscrew
Figure 12-1. Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.1.2
12-3
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide
The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide (Figure 12-2) is positioned on the deck in
one of the two center positions in the outside columns, and extends off the edge of the
deck. The slide is directed through the gap between the deck and light curtain (or side
safety shield). A trash receptacle is placed on the floor at the end of the slide to catch
the waste. The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide allows the discard of as many
used items as the trash receptacle is capable of holding.
The gripper can drop most types of used labware and tips directly into the
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide.
Note: Separate Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slides must be used for disposing
of tips and labware. Used tips may stick to the slide, which could cause labware to
jam in the chute. Check the slide periodically during the method run to ensure it is
clear of tips.
Note: Since the slide of a Multichannel Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of
the Biomek deck, the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide. Refer to
Section 12.4, Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate, for more information on
modifying the deck to accommodate a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide.
CAUTION: When using the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide,
remove the bagging extension to avoid collisions between the pod and
the Multichannel Disposal ALP.
Disposal
ALP base
Multichannel
Disposal chute
Multichannel Disposal
chute mounting screws
Figure 12-2. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide
ALPs User’s Manual
12-4
12.2
Multichannel Disposal ALP
Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without
Slide
Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide includes choosing a deck
position and mounting the ALP to the deck
12.2.1
Choosing a Deck Position for the
Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide
CAUTION: The self-contained Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide
must be mounted on the back row of the Biomek deck to avoid
collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
The Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide can be placed in five separate
positions along the back of the Biomek deck.
When adding a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide to the Biomek deck, the
ALP must be associated with that deck position in the Deck Editor. To associate the
Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide with a deck position in the Deck Editor,
drag and drop TipTrash to the appropriate position in the deck view. For more
information about associating an ALP with a deck position, refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck.
12.2.2
Mounting a Multichannel Disposal ALP
without Slide
To mount a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide:
1. Remove the slide and chute from the Multichannel Disposal ALP. (12.7,
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide, and Figure 12-3 for specific
instructions and diagrams.)
CAUTION: Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the
Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span-8 Disposal ALP. Each Disposal
ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP.
2. Snap the bagging extension onto the Disposal ALP base by lining up the springs
on the bagging extension with the cutouts on the Disposal ALP base (Figure 123).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12-5
3. Apply downward force to the top of the bagging extension. The springs slip
through to the inside of the Disposal ALP base and lock into the cutouts (Figure
12-3).
Bagging extension
Adding bagging extension to
Disposal ALP base
Apply downward force to snap the
springs into the cutouts, and to
align the grounding tab so that the
grounding screw can be inserted.
Grounding tab and screw
The screw is inserted through
the tab and into the base at this
location.
Disposal ALP base
Springs
(Second spring is on the
opposite side of the
bagging extension.)
Cutout for springs
The springs must snap
through to the inside surface
of the base.
Figure 12-3. Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide - exploded
4. Insert a screw through the hole in the grounding tab on the bagging extension and
into the threaded hole in the Disposal ALP base (Figure 12-4).
Note: This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP.
5. Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the Multichannel Disposal ALP into the
locating holes of the desired deck position.
ALPs User’s Manual
12-6
Multichannel Disposal ALP
6. Fasten the Multichannel Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the
base of the Multichannel Disposal ALP (Figure 12-4).
Rubber band notches
Grounding tab and screw
The screw is inserted through
the tab and into the ALP base at
this location.
Thumbscrew
Two thumbscrews are
used to secure the
Multichannel Disposal
ALP to the deck. (The
second thumbscrew is
positioned diagonally to
the one shown here.)
Figure 12-4. Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide grounding tab and screw
WARNING: Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are
recommended for hazardous applications. The waste bags shipped with
the Multichannel Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags. Contact the
laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and
procedures.
7. Fold the top of a waste bag over the frame so that the bottom of the bag reaches
the bottom of the ALP base.
8. Smooth out the bag to allow items to drop directly to the bottom of the bag.
Note: For hazardous applications, appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard
bags are recommended.
9. To hold the bag in place, stretch the rubber band over the top of the extension and
receptacle bag until it fits into the notches on the corners of the extension (Figure
12-4).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.3
12-7
Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with
Slide
Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide includes choosing a deck position
and mounting the ALP to the deck.
Note: Since the slide of a Multichannel Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of
the Biomek deck, the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide. Refer to
Section 12.4, Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate, for more information on
modifying the deck to accommodate a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide.
12.3.1
Choosing a Deck Position for the
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide
CAUTION: The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted
in the 2nd or 3rd row in the left and right outside columns of the Biomek
FX deck to avoid collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide can be placed in one of the two center
positions in the outside columns, and extends off the edge of the Biomek deck.
When adding a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide on the left or right outside
column of the Biomek deck, the ALP must be associated with that deck position in
the Deck Editor. To associate the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide with a deck
position in the Deck Editor, drag and drop TrashLeft or TrashRight to the
appropriate position in the deck view. For more information about associating an ALP
with a deck position, refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5,
Preparing and Managing the Deck.
ALPs User’s Manual
12-8
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.3.1.1
Mounting a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide
to the Deck
To mount a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide:
1. Position the Disposal Chute by lining up the holes in the disposal chute with the
threaded holes in the Disposal ALP base (Figure 12-5).
Disposal
ALP base
Multichannel
Disposal chute
Multichannel Disposal
chute mounting screws
Figure 12-5. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide
2. Attach the disposal chute to the Disposal ALP base using the four screws
supplied (Figure 12-5).
3. Place the Multichannel Disposal ALP in one of the center positions in an outside
column of the deck. This allows the slide to extend downward beyond the left or
right side of the deck.
4. Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the Multichannel Disposal ALP into the
locating holes on the deck.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12-9
5. Fasten the Multichannel Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the
base of the Multichannel Disposal ALP (Figure 12-6).
Thumbscrews
Figure 12-6. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews (bottom view)
6. Attach the disposal slide to the Multichannel Disposal ALP by lowering the
upper tabs into the grooves in the Disposal ALP base (Figure 12-7). The disposal
slide rests its lower tabs on the front of the Multichannel Disposal ALP base.
Multichannel Disposal
ALP slide
Upper
upper tabs
Lower tabs
Grooves for tabs
Upper tabs slide into
the grooves.
Lower tabs
rest here
Disposal
ALP base
Disposal
chute
Figure 12-7. Multichannel Disposal ALP slide attachment
ALPs User’s Manual
12-10
Multichannel Disposal ALP
7. Insert the ground screw through the tab on the back of the disposal slide and into
the threaded hole in the Disposal ALP base (Figure 12-8).
Note: This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP.
Tab on the Disposal
ALP slide
Disposal
chute
Ground screw
Disposal
ALP base
Figure 12-8. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide ground screw placement
8. Place a trash receptacle at the end of the disposal chute to catch disposed items.
9. Look down through the disposal chute, or drop a test item into the Multichannel
Disposal ALP, to make sure the trash lands in the receptacle. Adjust the
placement of the trash receptacle as required.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.4
12-11
Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate
WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury, operate only with all
protective shields in place.
When components of the Biomek FX instrument are installed so that they extend
beyond the edge of the work table, a protective bottom shield must be installed by the
Beckman Coulter Service Engineer to ensure operator protection on the side
overhanging the table. This protective bottom shield contains a solid blanking plate
and a cutout blanking plate (Figure 12-10).
When the Biomek FX instrument does not extend beyond the edge of the work table,
the solid blanking plate is installed. To accommodate the slide on the Multichannel
Disposal ALP with Slide, the solid blanking plate is replaced with the cutout blanking
plate. To accommodate the slides of two Disposal ALPs (Multichannel or Span-8),
the solid blanking plate and cutout blanking plate are removed, leaving an opening for
two Disposal ALP slides.
There are four deck positions available for a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide
(Figure 12-9):
•
L2
•
L3
•
R2
•
R3
Multichannel Disposal
ALP with Slide
(right positions)
L3
L2
Multichannel Disposal
ALP with Slide
(left positions)
R3
R2
Figure 12-9. Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions
ALPs User’s Manual
12-12
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.4.1
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L2
When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L2 on the Biomek FX
deck (Figure 12-9), install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in (Figure 12-10).
4. Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shield. This creates an opening next to L2
for a slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
Solid blanking plate
Blanking plate with
cutout
Rotate this blanking plate
180° front to back as
required to accommodate the
Multichannel Disposal ALP.
L3
L2
Bottom shield
Figure 12-10. Left side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates
12.4.2
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L3
When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L3 on the Biomek FX
deck (Figure 12-9), orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180° from the one shown in
Figure 12-10.
4. Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shield. This creates an opening next to L3
for a slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.4.3
12-13
Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in
Both L2 and L3
When Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both L2 and L3:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate. This creates an opening large enough for two
slides.
12.4.4
Disposal ALP in R2
When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in R2 on the Biomek FX
deck (Figure 12-9), orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180° from the one shown in
Figure 12-11.
4. Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield. This creates an
opening next to R2 for the slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
Standoffs
Solid blanking plate
R4
R3
R2
C
R1
B
A
Fastener locations
Bottom
shield
Blanking plate
with cutout
Figure 12-11. Right side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates
ALPs User’s Manual
12-14
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.4.5
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in R3
When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in R3 on the Biomek FX
deck (Figure 12-9), orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in Figure 12-11.
4. Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield. This creates an
opening next to R3 for a slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
12.4.6
Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in
Both R2 and R3
When Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both R2 and R3:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate. This creates an opening large enough for two
slides.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Disposal ALP
12.5
12-15
Framing Instructions
No special framing is necessary for the Multichannel Disposal ALP (with or without
Slide). Framing the ALP occurred when the deck was framed with the Shift Deck
command. For more information refer the the specific user’s manual for the
instrument.
12.6
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without
Slide
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide includes removing the ALP
and the bagging extension (refer to Section 12.6.1, Removing the Bagging Extension).
WARNING: The waste bag may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
To remove the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide:
1. Remove the rubber band and waste receptacle from the ALP.
2. Dispose of the bag and contents as specified by the safety officer.
3. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Multichannel Disposal ALP.
4. Lift the Multichannel Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the
bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck.
12.6.1
Removing the Bagging Extension
To remove the bagging extension from the Multichannel Disposal ALP:
1. Remove the grounding screw.
2. Grasp the bagging extension firmly with one hand and the base firmly with the
other.
3. Pull the bagging extension forcefully from the ALP base to separate the
extension from the base.
4. Store the extension in a clean, dry, dust-free area.
5. Insert the screw back into the threaded hole on the Multichannel Disposal ALP
base.
ALPs User’s Manual
12-16
12.7
Multichannel Disposal ALP
Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with
Slide
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To remove the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide:
1. Verify that no labware or tips remains on the slide. If labware remains on the
slide, remove the labware as specified by the laboratory safety officer.
2. Remove the trash receptacle and dispose of the contents as specified by the
laboratory safety officer.
3. Remove the grounding screw from the grounding tab on the slide.
4. Lift the slide from the base.
5. Insert the grounding screw back into the threaded hole on the disposal base.
6. Loosen the Multichannel Disposal ALP thumbscrews on the base of the
Multichannel Disposal ALP.
7. Lift the Multichannel Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the
bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck.
8. To detach the chute, remove the four screws attaching the chute to the disposal
base.
9. Insert the four screws back into the threaded holes in the disposal base.
12.8
Storage
Return the Multichannel Disposal ALPs (with and without Slide) to their original
packing materials and store in a dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Multichannel Disposal ALPs to air-dry before
returning them to their original packing materials.
12.9
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: The Multichannel Disposal ALP may be contaminated.
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To clean, wipe all surfaces on the Multichannel Disposal ALP with a soft cloth.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
13-1
13 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13.1
Overview
Using a step in a method, the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP (Figure 13-1) and 384Channel Tip Wash ALP (Figure 13-2) are active ALPs that wash tips on the deck. The
96-Channel Tip Wash ALP, used with a 96-Channel Head, has 96 cleaning wells,
while the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP, used with the 384-Channel Head, has 384
cleaning wells.
Note: Washing tips in a method using a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is configured
in the Transfer or Combine steps (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 15.3, Configuring Transfer and Combine Steps), and Wash (refer to the
Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 16.6, Wash Step) steps.
Note: Use the Device Action step for a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP to allow the
ALP to continue washing until the Finish step is executed (refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Chapter 22.6.1.6, Configuring the Device Action Step for a
Multichannel Tip Wash ALP (FX, NX-MC only)).
These ALPs provide a flow of wash fluid from a source reservoir for tip washing. A
peristaltic pump, also known as a passive or pulsating pump, circulates the fluid
through the ALP from the source reservoir to a waste reservoir.
To ensure that the correct Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is used on an instrument with
two or more Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs, each ALP must be configured to use a
unique liquid type (refer to Section 13.3, Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on an
Instrument).
Both Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs are installed and removed in the same manner.
While they are also framed using the same procedure, specific Framing Tool Adaptors
are used with each type. If a more precise location of the tips when they are
submerged into the cleaning wells during a wash is desired, offsets for framing both
ALPs may be entered (refer to Section 13.5, Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip
Wash ALPs).
Note: The adaptor for the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP is red and the adaptor for the
384-Channel Tip Wash ALP is blue. Make sure the correct adaptor is used.
ALPs User’s Manual
13-2
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs (Section 13.2)
•
Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on an Instrument (Section 13.3)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 13.4)
•
Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs (Section 13.5)
•
Removing the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs (Section 13.6)
•
Storage (Section 13.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 13.8)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 13.9)
Cleaning
wells
Out
In
Figure 13-1. 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13-3
Cleaning
wells
Out
In
Figure 13-2. 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP
ALPs User’s Manual
13-4
13.2
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the deck includes choosing the deck
position and mounting the ALP to the deck.
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD.
WARNING: Do not kink the hoses.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: Orient the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs so the in and out
connections face the back of the Biomek instrument.
CAUTION: Use the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 96
disposable tip head.
CAUTION: Use the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 384
disposable tip head.
Note: The Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs require both an in and an out hose to attach
the ALP to the pump.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13.2.1
13-5
Choosing a Deck Position
Use the Deck Editor to determine where the ALP may be mounted on the deck. The
positions capable of supporting the ALP are indicated by dashed lines.
Note: In the Deck Editor, the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP is referred to as
WashStation96 and the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP is referred to as
WashStation384.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
13.2.2
Mounting Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to
the Deck
Before mounting the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the deck, ensure the
requirements for tubing are met (refer to Section 13.2.2.1, Tubing).
13.2.2.1
Tubing
The supply tubing for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs is 1/4” inside diameter, while
the drain tubing is 3/8” inside diameter. When the tubing is connected, the drain
tubing must run through the peristaltic pump in the opposite direction to the supply
tubing and into the waste reservoir.
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
ALPs User’s Manual
13-6
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
To mount Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the deck:
1. Ensure the requirements for tubing are met (refer to Section 13.2.2.1, Tubing).
2. Attach the tip wash reservoir to the tip wash stand using the supplied
thumbscrews to create the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP (Figure 13-3).
Multichannel Tip
Wash ALP
Tip wash reservoir
Tip wash stand
Figure 13-3. Tip wash reservoir and tip wash stand to create the
96-Channel Tip Wash ALP
3. Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating
holes on the deck, and the hoses are on the back side of the ALP.
Note: The in/out hose connections on the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP MUST
face the back of the Biomek instrument.
4. Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews located on the base of the tip
wash stand (Figure 13-3).
5. Position the peristaltic pump at an off-deck location close to the ALP.
6. Place the source and waste reservoirs under the lab bench or in an accessible
space lower than the instrument height.
7. Attach the in hose (part number 6485-35) to the small hole on the ALP (Figure
13-1or Figure 13-2).
8. Run the in hose through the appropriate pump head of the peristaltic pump.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13-7
9. Attach the opposite end of the in hose to the source reservoir. Run the hoses
through either the access holes on the back of the instrument between the towers,
or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the Biomek instrument.
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
10. Attach the out hose to the large hole on the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP (Figure
13-1 or Figure 13-2).
11. Run the out hose (part number 6485-36) in the opposite direction through the out
pump head on the peristaltic pump.
Note: The peristaltic pump must be connected to the Device Controller. The
Device Controller turns the pump On and Off as requested by the software (refer
to Appendix A:, Device Controller).
12. Attach the opposite end of the out hose to the waste reservoir.
13. Fill the source reservoir with the desired cleaning fluid.
14. Turn on the pump.
ALPs User’s Manual
13-8
13.3
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on an
Instrument
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs and other wash ALPs are identified as wash stations in
the Biomek Software. To ensure that the correct wash station is used on an instrument
with two or more wash stations, each wash station must be configured to use a unique
liquid type.
To configure a unique liquid type for a wash station:
1. In the Liquid Type Editor, create a new liquid type or copy an existing liquid
type for the wash station; for example, create a new liquid type called
WS1_Liquid.
Note: Each liquid type must have a unique name; for example, WS1_Liquid or
WS2_Liquid.
Note: Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 8.2, Creating New
Liquid Types, for more information on creating new liquid types, and Section 8.4,
Copying and Pasting Liquid Types Within a Project File, for more information on
copying liquid types.
2. In the Instrument Setup step, double-click the desired wash station. Labware
Properties for the wash station appears (Figure 13-4).
Figure 13-4. Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP
3. In Liquid Type:, select the unique liquid type created for that wash station; for
example, WS1_Liquid.
4. Choose OK to save the change and close Labware Properties.
5. For each additional wash station, repeat steps 2 through 4, selecting the
appropriate liquid type for each wash station.
Note: Each wash station must use a unique liquid type.
6. In any steps where tips are washed, such as Transfer or Combine, select a
specific wash station by selecting the appropriate liquid type in Wash tips in.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13.4
13-9
Framing Instructions
Special framing instructions are necessary for Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs which
are framed using the AccuFrame and a Framing Tool Adaptor.
The Framing Tool Adaptor for the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP is red and the Framing
Tool Adaptor for the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP is blue. Make sure the correct
Framing Tool Adaptor is used for each type of Multichannel Tip Wash ALP.
If a more precise location of the tips when they are submerged into the cleaning wells
during a wash is desired, offsets for framing both ALPs may be entered (refer to
Section 13.5, Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs).
To frame the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs:
1. Place the Framing Tool Adaptor on the ALP (Figure 13-5) ensuring that the
correct adaptor is used.
Note: The Framing Tool Adaptor for the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP is red and
the Framing Tool Adaptor for the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP is blue.
AccuFrame
Use for both the 96Channel and 384-Channel
Tip Wash ALPs.
Framing Tool
Adaptor
The adaptor for the 96Channel Tip Wash ALP
is red and the adaptor for
the 384-Channel Tip
Wash ALP is blue. Make
sure the correct adaptor
is used.
Tip wash
reservoir
Tip wash stand
Figure 13-5. AccuFrame, Framing Tool Adaptor, and the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck.
2. Turn off power to Biomek instrument before connecting the AccuFrame.
ALPs User’s Manual
13-10
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
3. Plug the AccuFrame into an available CAN port on the Biomek tower.
WARNING: Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame
cable. If the light curtain is violated, the framing process halts
immediately.
WARNING: Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod
movement.
4. Turn on power to Biomek instrument.
5. Manually place the AccuFrame into the Framing Tool Adaptor by placing the
front right corner first and pushing the AccuFrame gently down into the adaptor
(Figure 13-5).
6. Frame the ALP according to procedures outlined in the specific user’s manual for
the instrument.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13.5
13-11
Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash
ALPs
If a more precise location of the tips in the cleaning wells of the Multichannel Tip
Wash ALPs during a wash is desired, offsets for framing the Multichannel Tip Wash
ALPs may be entered.
Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Section 5.4.3.3, Changing Per-Labware
Offsets for instructions on changing Per-labware Offsets. The X and Y offsets are
entered using the following instructions:
1. Create a short method using the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP.
Note: Washing tips in a method using a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is
configured in the Transfer or Combine steps (refer to the Biomek Software
User’s Manual, Chapter 15.3, Configuring Transfer and Combine Steps), and
Wash steps (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 16.6, Wash
Step).
2. Based on a visual observation during the method run, use the following
explanation to determine the offsets:
•
If the tips are positioned too much to the left of the center of the wells,
increase the number in the X cm (Figure 13-6).
•
If the tips are positioned too much to the right of the center of the wells,
decrease the number in the X cm (Figure 13-6).
•
If the tips are positioned too much to the back of the center of the wells,
increase the number in the Y cm (Figure 13-6).
•
If the tips are positioned too much to the front of the center of the wells,
decrease the number in the Y cm (Figure 13-6).
•
If the tips are positioned are positioned too far down into the wells,
increase the number in the Z cm (Figure 13-6).
•
If the tips are positioned are positioned too far above the wells, decrease
the number in the Z cm (Figure 13-6).
Note: Estimate the amount or measure with a ruler or calipers.
ALPs User’s Manual
13-12
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
Figure 13-6. Tip and offset explanation
3. When the offsets have been determined, choose WashStation or
WashStation384, depending on the type of Multichannel Tip Wash ALP, and
enter them in X cm, Y cm, and Z cm (Figure 13-7).
Note: WashStation refers to the 96-Channel Tip Wash ALP while
WashStation384 refers to the 384-Channel Tip Wash ALP.
Figure 13-7. Per-Labware Offsets
4. Choose OK.
5. Reframe the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP according to the instructions in Section
13.4, Framing Instructions, ensuring the correct Framing Tool Adaptor is used.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
13.6
13-13
Removing the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
To remove Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs from the deck:
1. Power down the external pump.
WARNING: SPILL HAZARD
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
2. Detach the in and out hoses from the tip wash reservoir (Figure 13-1 or Figure
13-2).
3. Remove the tip wash reservoir carefully; a small amount of fluid normally
remains after draining and could spill.
4. Loosen the thumbscrews from the deck.
WARNING: Always wear protective gloves when draining the tip wash
fluid.
5. Lift and tilt the tip wash reservoir slightly to the back right corner to allow the
fluid to drain.
6. Remove the ALP from the deck.
13.7
Storage
Return Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the original packing materials and store in a
dry, dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to air-dry before
returning them to the original packing materials.
ALPs User’s Manual
13-14
13.8
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
Preventive Maintenance
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety
officer.
13.9
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP without first contacting a
Beckman Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 13-1. Troubleshooting the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP
IF
THEN
A Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is not Make sure that the hoses and cables
functioning correctly
are attached and routed to the
Multichannel Tip Wash ALP
properly.
The pod is not using the correct wash
station
Make sure the desired liquid type is
selected for use during the wash
process.
OR
Make sure a specific wash station is
selected when the wash process is
configured.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
14-1
14 Orbital Shaker ALP
14.1
Overview
The Orbital Shaker ALP (Figure 14-1) is an active ALP that shakes labware using an
orbital shaking motion. Thumbscrews attach the ALP to the Biomek deck and a
clamping mechanism anchors and positions labware for shaking and pipetting
operations.
Microplates can be added to the Orbital Shaker ALP by a lab technician or the
gripper.
Note: When labware is manually placed on the Orbital Shaker ALP, it should be
placed in the back, left corner of the device.
Note: Labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP is gripper accessible, but not
stackable.
Note: The Orbital Shaker ALP supports pipetting to and from all labware except
1536-well microplates and PCR microplates.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Orbital Shaker ALP (Section 14.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 14.3)
•
Using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a Method (Section 14.4)
•
Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP Outside a Method (Section 14.5)
•
Removing the Orbital Shaker ALP from the Deck (Section 14.6)
•
Storage (Section 14.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 14.8)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 14.9)
ALPs User’s Manual
14-2
Orbital Shaker ALP
CAUTION: Clamp all labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even
when using the ALP as a standard deck position, such as a
1 x 1 or a swap space.
Clamp
Thumbscrews
Figure 14-1. Orbital Shaker ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.2
14-3
Installing the Orbital Shaker ALP
Installing the Orbital Shaker ALP includes choosing any standard position and
mounting the ALP to the deck.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
14.2.1
Mounting an Orbital Shaker ALP to the
Deck
Note: Orbital Shaker ALPs cannot be chained together or to any other ALP.
To mount the Orbital Shaker ALP to the deck:
1. Turn off power to Biomek instrument before mounting any active ALP.
2. Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating
holes on the deck, the CAN connections are oriented to the left and back of the
Biomek deck, and the clamp is on the right front corner of the ALP.
Note: The front of the ALP is indicated with the word “FRONT” etched on the
microplate platform of the ALP.
Note: Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning an Orbital Shaker
ALP on the deck.
3. Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP.
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
4. Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male CAN Port on
the ALP (Figure 14-2).
Note: Short CAN cables should be used whenever possible, especially when
positioning the ALP in the back row of the Biomek deck. Long CAN cables can
be used when positioning the ALP in the first three rows on the Biomek deck.
WARNING: Do not chain Orbital Shaker ALPs together or to any other
ALP.
CAUTION: A maximum of four (4) Orbital Shaker ALPs may be used on a
deck at one time.
5. Plug the male end of the CAN communication cable into any female connector
labeled CAN Port on the Biomek instrument.
Note: Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument or any other active ALP.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-4
Orbital Shaker ALP
6. Verify that one of the address switches (ADR1 or ADR2) is set to a unique
address between zero (0) and F (Figure 14-2).
Note: ADR2 is set to a default address of zero (0). If only one Orbital Shaker
ALP is on the deck, ADR2 should be left at the default setting and ADR1 should
be set to a unique address.
CAN connections
Only one CAN connection is
available for use on the Orbital
Shaker ALP.
Address
switches
ADR1
ADR2
Figure 14-2. Orbital Shaker ALP connections
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.3
14-5
Framing Instructions
Special framing instructions are necessary for the Orbital Shaker ALP to ensure
gripper access to labware and tip access to all wells of a microplate positioned on the
ALP without damaging the tips, probes, gripper, pod, labware, or ALP.
Note: The Orbital Shaker ALP supports pipetting to and from all labware supported
by the Biomek instrument except 1536-well microplates and PCR microplates.
The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP includes accessing different
functions of the Biomek Software, mounting some hardware to the pod, and
accurately positioning the AccuFrame Tool on the ALP.
The framing process includes:
•
Installing the Framing Fixture, Homing the Axes, and Installing the
AccuFrame Tool.
•
Homing the Microplate Platform and Actuating the Clamps.
•
Framing the Deck Position with the Deck Editor.
•
Removing the AccuFrame from the ALP and the Framing Fixture from the
Biomek Instrument Pod.
14.3.1
Installing the Framing Fixture, Homing the
Axes, and Installing the AccuFrame Tool
To frame the Orbital Shaker ALP, the AccuFrame Tool and framing fixture must be
installed:
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing the AccuFrame.
1. Plug the AccuFrame into any available CAN port on a Biomek tower.
2. Turn on power to the Biomek instrument.
3. Choose Instrument>Manual Control to open Manual Control. An
Information dialog (Figure 14-3) briefly appears as a connection is established
with the Biomek instrument, immediately followed by Manual Control (Figure
14-4).
Figure 14-3. Confirms Manual Control is connecting
ALPs User’s Manual
14-6
Orbital Shaker ALP
Figure 14-4. Manual Control
4. Choose Home All Axes (Figure 14-4). A Warning appears (Figure 14-5).
Figure 14-5. Warning that appears when homing all axes
5. Meet the conditions and, when conditions have been met, select OK. The
Biomek instrument homes the pod in the X, Y, Z, and D axes.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-7
CAUTION: Make sure there are no tips on the head.
6. Attach the framing fixture (Figure 14-6) to the pod by holding the framing fixture
against the head with the framing guides pressed to the outside of the back row
and left column of mandrels.
Note: Make sure the front of the framing fixture is to the front of the instrument,
and the framing guides are to the back and left of the instrument (Figure 14-6).
Framing
guides
Front of
framing fixture
Back of
framing fixture
Framing
probe
Thumbscrews
Four thumbscrews attach the framing fixture to the Multichannel head.
Figure 14-6. Framing fixture
7. Gently pull the framing fixture to the front and right. Verify the framing guides
are touching the mandrels.
8. Tighten each thumbscrew by turning to the right until the framing fixture is
firmly attached to the head. The pod is now ready for framing.
Now that the AccuFrame Tool and the framing fixture have been installed, continue
the framing procedure by homing the microplate platform and actuating the clamps.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-8
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.3.2
Homing the Microplate Platform and
Actuating the Clamps
The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP continues by accessing Advanced
Manual Control to home the microplate platform and actuate the clamps.
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control to open Manual Control. An
Information dialog (Figure 14-3) briefly appears as a connection is established
with the Biomek instrument, immediately followed by Manual Control (Figure
14-4).
2. Choose Advanced Controls. A list of all the installed pods and devices
appears (Figure 14-7).
Figure 14-7. Advanced Controls
3. Select the desired OrbitalShakerALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Orbital Shaker ALP appears (Figure 14-8).
Figure 14-8. Advanced Manual Control for an Orbital Shaker ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-9
4. In Command, select Unclamp (Figure 14-9).
Figure 14-9. Using Advanced Manual Control to unclamp an Orbital Shaker ALP
5. Choose Go. The Orbital Shaker ALP actuates the clamps.
6. Manually place the AccuFrame against the back, left corner of the Orbital Shaker
ALP.
Note: Make sure that the AccuFrame is fully seated along the posts along the
back and left sides of the ALP.
7. In Command, select Clamp (Figure 14-10).
Figure 14-10. Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamp
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
8. Choose Go. The Orbital Shaker ALP securely clamps the AccuFrame.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-10
Orbital Shaker ALP
9. In Command, select Home (Figure 14-11).
Figure 14-11. Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
10. Choose Go. The Orbital Shaker ALP homes the microplate platform.
11. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
12. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Now that the microplate platform has been homed and the clamp has been actuated to
securely position and hold the AccuFrame, continue the framing process by accessing
the Deck Editor.
14.3.3
Framing the Deck Position with the Deck
Editor
The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP continues using the Deck Editor to
frame the deck position.
1. Choose Instrument>Deck Editor to open the Deck Editor.
2. Open the deck that requires framing. Verify that the deck displayed in the Deck
View reflects the current configuration of ALPs on the physical deck of the
Biomek instrument.
Note: If the Deck View does not reflect the current physical deck, place ALPs
on the appropriate deck locations by dragging and dropping ALPs from the ALP
Types List onto the Deck View. When the Deck View reflects the configuration
of the current physical deck, proceed to step 3.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-11
3. Double-click on the deck position in the deck view that contains the AccuFrame.
Position Properties appears (Figure 14-12).
Note: The coordinates displayed in Position Properties are default values; the
software must be taught precisely where the ALPs physical position is on the
deck.
Figure 14-12. Position Properties for the selected Orbital Shaker ALP
4. In Pod, choose the pod used to frame the ALP: Pod 1 or Pod 2.
¾
FX — Pod is available only if the Biomek instrument is configured as a
dual-pod instrument.
Note: Any pod accessing an ALP must be framed to that ALP.
5. Choose Auto Teach. The pod moves to the position being taught. The framing
probe on the framing fixture should be above the AccuFrame in that position.
6. Visually verify that the framing probe is positioned to lower within the
AccuFrame Tool without hitting the walls of the AccuFrame.
7. Choose OK to begin framing the position.
Note: The pod lowers and moves around inside the AccuFrame automatically
until it breaks both light beams. The pod stops after framing is completed, and
the two light beam indicators are illuminated.
Note: An error message appears if both light beams are not broken when the
pod is lowered into the AccuFrame. If this occurs, using Advanced Manual
Control, move the pod until the probe breaks both light beams and all the
indicator lights are on. Choose Teach, and the pod continues the teaching
process. The pod may also be moved by hand until the probe breaks both light
beams and all the indicator lights are on.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-12
Orbital Shaker ALP
8. Wait until the pod stops moving and Teaching Instructions appears (Figure
14-13).
Figure 14-13. Teaching Instructions
9. Choose from Shift deck, Shift ALP, or Shift position for appropriate
teaching instructions.
10. Choose OK if the coordinates displayed in Teaching Instructions appear
reasonable. Position Properties appears again, and the position is framed for the
selected pod.
11. Choose OK to save changes and close Position Properties.
12. Choose Save to close the Deck Editor.
Now that the ALP has been framed, finish the framing procedure by removing the
framing fixture and the AccuFrame.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.3.4
14-13
Removing the AccuFrame from the ALP
and the Framing Fixture from the Biomek
Instrument Pod
The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP concludes by removing the framing
fixture from the pod and accessing Advanced Manual Control to remove the
AccuFrame from the ALP.
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control>Advanced Controls to open
Advanced Manual Control.
2. Select the desired OrbitalShakerALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Orbital Shaker ALP appears (Figure 14-8).
3. In Command, select Unclamp (Figure 14-9).
4. Choose Go. The Orbital Shaker ALP opens the clamps.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing the AccuFrame.
5. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument.
6. Remove the AccuFrame from the ALP.
Note: To frame additional Orbital Shaker ALPs, repeat the framing procedure,
while moving the AccuFrame to each Orbital Shaker ALP on the physical deck.
If not framing other ALPs, continue with step 7.
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
9. Remove the framing fixture from the head of the Multichannel Pod after all
Orbital Shaker ALPs have been framed.
Note: Any pod accessing an ALP must be framed to that ALP.
¾
FX — On a dual-pod system in which both pods access an ALP, both pods
must be framed to that ALP.
The Orbital Shaker ALP has been successfully framed. For additional information on
framing, refer to the specific user’s manual for the instrument.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-14
14.4
Orbital Shaker ALP
Using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a Method
To use the Orbital Shaker ALP in a method, it must be installed in Hardware Setup
(refer to Section 1.3.1, Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup).
CAUTION: When creating a method with an Orbital Shaker and a stack
of labware, first move the labware to another ALP, preferably a passive
ALP, and then move it to the Orbital Shaker. The offsets allowed with
stacking may cause the labware to be gripped off center; however,
moving labware from a passive ALP ensures it is gripped properly.
Using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a method includes:
•
Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed (Section 14.4.1)
•
Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP
(Section 14.4.2)
•
Controlling the Actions of an Orbital Shaker ALP (Section 14.4.3)
•
Stopping and Restarting a Method (Section 14.4.4)
14.4.1
Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking
Speed
CAUTION: Only labware compliant with the Society for Biomolecular
Screening (SBS) proposed microplate standards is recommended for
use on the Orbital Shaker ALP. Non-compliant labware may not be
securely grasped by the ALP or may cause physical damage to the ALP.
WARNING: Do not shake tip boxes, tip box lids, or reservoirs on the
Orbital Shaker ALP. The clamps on the ALP cannot hold tip boxes, tip
box lids, or reservoirs securely during a shaking procedure.
The Orbital Shaker ALP supports most labware used on the Biomek instrument,
although not all labware should be shaken at the same speed. The maximum shaking
speed appropriate for each type of labware is of particular concern since fluid in
labware may splash or spill at different shaking speeds due to labware parameters and
fluid viscosity.
14.4.1.1
Recommended Maximum Shaking Speeds
WARNING: To ensure labware stays securely clamped on the Orbital
Shaker ALP, do not exceed the recommended maximum shaking speed.
Recommended maximum shaking speeds were determined for a variety of labware
from each class of labware supported by the Biomek instrument. A variety of fluids
and shaking parameters were used to establish a recommended maximum shaking
speed.
Testing on each piece of labware was conducted by filling the labware with the
specified liquid to a percentage of the labware’s maximum well capacity and
executing a shaking operation.
The maximum shaking speeds presented in Table 14-1 show the results of testing.
Note: Table 14-1 should be used only as general reference material. Conduct testing
according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to determine the
safe maximum shaking speed for all labware, liquid, and shaking sequence
combinations.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-15
WARNING: The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the
maximum shaking speed for all types of labware. Conduct testing
according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to
determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of
liquid.
WARNING: Always observe appropriate cautionary procedures as
defined by your safety officer when using flammable solvents or toxic,
pathological, or radioactive materials.
Table 14-1. Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking Speeds
Labware Type
Liquid
With Fluid
Volume
in µL 1/
Volume
as % 2/
Shaking
Speed
(RPM) 3/
Default
Maximum
Shaking
Speed
(Empty) 3/
10 mm test tubes
Water
2136
51
800
1000
12 mm test tubes
Water
3100
50
400
400
13 mm test tubes
Water
4984
49
700
800
AB384Well Reaction
Water
20
50
1800
1800
BCFlat96
Water
100
27
1700
1800
BCDeep96Round
Water
712
54
1100
1600
BCDeep96Square
Water
1200
50
1100
1400
CostarCone96Round
Water
178
56
1200
1800
CostarCone96Round
Water
100
31
1700
1800
CostarFlat384Square
Water
100
82
1170
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
Water
239
75
1000
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
Water
100
31
1600
1800
GreinerFlat384Square
Water
100
71
1170
1800
GreinerShallow384Round
Water
15
52
1000
1800
Microfuge Tubes
Water
890
40
900
900
NuncFlat384Square
Water
100
64
1170
1800
CostarDeep96Square
Cell Pellet
plus buffer
90 + pellet
4
950
1400
CostarDeep96Square
Cell Pellet
plus buffer
210 + cells
8
1000
1400
CostarDeep96Square
Cell Pellet
plus buffer
330 + cells
13
1000
1400
Volume in µL provides the number of µL of liquid added to each of the wells of the specified labware.
Volume as % provides the percent of each well filled by the value in Volume in µL.
3/
Shaking Speed (RPM) is the recommended maximum speed the specified piece of labware should be shaken
when the labware contains fluid. Exceeding this speed may spill or splash fluid out of the labware.
4/
Default Maximum Shaking Speed (Empty) is the maximum shaking speed for the specified labware when it is
empty. Exceeding this speed may compromise the ability of the clamping mechanism to securely hold the labware.
(Refer to Section 14.4.2, Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP, for additional
information on Maximum Shaking Speeds.)
1/
2/
ALPs User’s Manual
14-16
Orbital Shaker ALP
Table 14-1. Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking Speeds (Continued)
Labware Type
Liquid
With Fluid
Volume
in µL 1/
Volume
as % 2/
Shaking
Speed
(RPM) 3/
Default
Maximum
Shaking
Speed
(Empty) 3/
CostarDeep96Square
Cell Pellet
plus buffer
plus
MagneSil
Blue
355 + cells
15
1000
1400
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil
Blue
30
9
720
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil Red 55
17
720
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil Red 145
plus buffers
46
1000
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil Red 150
plus Ethanol
47
800
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil Red 150
plus water
47
1000
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil
Yellow plus
Ethanol
100
31
800
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil
Yellow plus
Wash
100
31
1000
1800
Greiner96Ubottom
MagneSil
Yellow plus
water
100
31
1000
1800
1/Volume
in µL provides the number of µL of liquid added to each of the wells of the specified labware.
as % provides the percent of each well filled by the value in Volume in µL.
3/
Shaking Speed (RPM) is the recommended maximum speed the specified piece of labware should be shaken
when the labware contains fluid. Exceeding this speed may spill or splash fluid out of the labware.
4/
Default Maximum Shaking Speed (Empty) is the maximum shaking speed for the specified labware when it is
empty. Exceeding this speed may compromise the ability of the clamping mechanism to securely hold the labware.
(Refer to Section 14.4.2, Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP, for additional
information on Maximum Shaking Speeds.)
2/Volume
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.2
14-17
Configuring a New Labware Type for Use
on the Orbital Shaker ALP
CAUTION: Only labware compliant with the Society for Biomolecular
Screening (SBS) proposed microplate standards is recommended for
use on the Orbital Shaker ALP. Non-compliant labware may not be
securely grasped by the ALP or may cause physical damage to the ALP.
If a piece of labware other than that supported by Biomek Software is used on the
Orbital Shaker ALP, the parameters of the labware must be configured in the
Labware Type Editor. Use the Labware Type Editor to configure parameters for
each new piece of labware.
Note: Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 7, Creating and
Modifying Tip and Labware Types, for more information on creating and modifying
labware types.
To configure a new piece of labware for use on the Orbital Shaker ALP:
1. Choose Project>Labware Type Editor. Labware Types appears
(Figure 14-14).
Figure 14-14. Labware Types
ALPs User’s Manual
14-18
Orbital Shaker ALP
2. Select a piece of labware that closely resembles the new labware and select Edit
on the toolbar.
Note: To preserve the selected labware type, first copy it and then edit the copy
(refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 7.3.3, Copying a Labware
Type)
OR
Double-click the desired labware type.
OR
Right-click the desired labware type and choose Edit from the menu. Basic
Information for the selected labware appears (Figure 14-15).
Figure 14-15. Basic Information for the selected labware type
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-19
3. Choose Orbital Shaker in the left pane. The right pane changes to display the
Maximum Speed for that piece of labware (Figure 14-16).
Figure 14-16. Orbital Shaking configuration for the selected labware type
4. In Maximum Speed, enter the highest safe maximum shaking speed for that
piece of labware.
Note: If the speed configured in a Device Action step exceeds the Maximum
Speed allowed in the Labware Type Editor, an error occurs when the method is
validated.
Note: For more information on how to establish a safe Maximum Speed for a
piece of labware, refer to Section 14.4.1, Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking
Speed.
5. Choose Save.
Note: Three sections of hints are offered at the bottom of the edit option. The first
section displays a graphic of the labware, the second section explains the selected
field, and the third section explains any errors resulting from editing the labware
properties. Place the cursor over the desired labware properties field and click to view
these hints.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-20
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3
Controlling the Actions of an Orbital Shaker ALP
CAUTION: Clamp all labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even
when using the ALP as a standard deck position, such as a
1 x 1 or a swap space.
After an Orbital Shaker ALP has been physically added to the deck, configured in
Hardware Setup, and associated with a device and a deck position in the Deck
Editor, Biomek Software understands the attributes of the ALP and can receive
information on how to control it. The Device Action step on the Devices Step
Palette is used to control the actions of the Orbital Shaker ALP during a method run.
Note: Refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 22, Using the Devices
Step Palette, for information on how to display the Devices Step Palette.
Note: An Orbital Shaker ALP must be configured in Hardware Setup (refer to
Chapter 1.3.1, Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup) and associated with a device and
deck position in the Deck Editor prior to using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a method.
When a Device Action step is added to a method, the configuration associated with
the selected device appears in the Step Configuration (Figure 14-18).
Note: Device Action steps that have not been appropriately configured generate
errors when a method is validated or run.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-21
To configure the Device Action step for an Orbital Shaker ALP:
1. Insert a Device Action step into the Method View (Figure 14-17).
Command
Select the action for the device to
Device
execute here. Some commands require Select the device to
further configuration.
control here.
Device Action step configuration
The Device Action step configuration for the Orbital
Shaker ALP allows the configuration of the action
completed by the ALP and the parameters required to
perform that action. The step configuration for the ALP
changes based on the selection made in Command.
Current deck
display
Figure 14-17. Device Action step and configuration
2. In Device, select the desired OrbitalShakerALP.
OR
Click on the Orbital Shaker ALP in the current deck display to select it. The
configuration for the ALP appears (Figure 14-18).
Note: Any devices installed in Hardware Setup, except Tip Loaders and
Device Controllers, are listed under Device in the Device Action step
configuration.
Note: When an Orbital Shaker ALP is selected in Device, the ALP is
highlighted by a blue border in the current deck display.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-22
Orbital Shaker ALP
3. In Command, select the desired action for the Orbital Shaker ALP:
•
Shake — shakes labware at the indicated number of revolutions per
minute (RPM) in the specified direction (refer to Section 14.4.3.1,
Configuring the ALP to Run a Standard Shaking Procedure).
•
Timed Shake — shakes labware at the indicated RPM in the specified
direction for the indicated number of seconds (refer to Section 14.4.3.2,
Configuring the ALP to Run for a Specific Length of Time).
•
Run — shakes labware using parameters from a previously created
shaking profile (refer to Section 14.4.3.3, Configuring the ALP to Run a
Previously Defined Shaking Profile).
•
Pulse — shakes labware using a pulsing sequence at a specific velocity
for the indicated number of seconds, then for the indicated number of
seconds in the opposite direction. This sequence of events is repeated
the specified number of times. (refer to Section 14.4.3.4, Configuring a
Pulsing Shake Sequence).
•
Stop — stops any shaking procedure by slowing the shaking action
within the specified number of seconds(refer to Section 14.4.3.5,
Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process).
•
Clamp — tightens the clamp to hold the labware in place (refer to
Section 14.4.3.6, Clamping and Unclamping Labware on the Orbital
Shaker ALP).
•
Home — centers the microplate shaking plate on the ALP base (refer to
Section 14.4.3.7, Homing the Microplate Platform on the Orbital
Shaker ALP).
•
Unclamp — releases the clamp to allow the labware to be removed
from the ALP (refer to Section 14.4.3.6, Clamping and Unclamping
Labware on the Orbital Shaker ALP).
Note: The configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP changes based on the
selection made in Command.
Note: If a light curtain violation occurs while the Orbital Shaker ALP is
operating, the shaking operation is completed.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3.1
14-23
Configuring the ALP to Run a Standard Shaking
Procedure
Shaking operations on the Orbital Shaker ALP can be configured to run continuously
in a specified direction. The number of RPM applied during the shaking operation
and the amount of time the device uses to ramp up to the specified shaking speed are
configured when using the Shake command.
Note: The default configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP is to shake labware
CounterClockwise with a 1 (one) second ramp-up to 300 revolutions per minute
(RPM).
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware using new parameters:
1. In Command, select Shake (Figure 14-18).
Method view
The Device
Action caption
indicates the
device and its
command.
Device Action step configuration
The Device Action step configuration
specifies an operation performed on the
Orbital Shaker ALP.
Figure 14-18. Device Action step configured for a continuous shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Shaking speed, indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM.
Note: The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum
Shaking speed allowed is 1800 RPM. Refer to Section 14.4.1, Establishing a
Safe Maximum Shaking Speed, for more information.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-24
Orbital Shaker ALP
3. In Time to reach full speed, enter the duration (in seconds) the Orbital
Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 0.5 seconds
while the maximum value is 600 seconds.
4. In Direction, select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a
CounterClockwise or Clockwise direction.
Note: The default Direction is CounterClockwise.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3.2
14-25
Configuring the ALP to Run for a Specific Length
of Time
Shaking operations on the Orbital Shaker ALP can be configured to run a specified
length of time. The Timed Shake configuration controls how many seconds and in
which direction labware is shaken. The maximum shaking speed and the amount of
time used to reach that speed are also configured in the Timed Shake command.
Note: The default configuration for a timed shaking sequence is to shake labware for
10 seconds in a CounterClockwise direction with a 1 second ramp-up to 300
RPM.
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware a specific length of time:
1. In Command, select Timed Shake (Figure 14-19).
Figure 14-19. Device Action step configured for a timed shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Shaking speed, indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM.
Note: The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum is
1800 RPM. Refer to Section 14.4.1, Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking
Speed, for more information.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-26
Orbital Shaker ALP
3. In Time to reach full speed, enter the duration (in seconds) the Orbital
Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 0.5 second
while the maximum value is 600 seconds.
Note: The Time to reach full speed is also used when ramping down at the
end of the configured Time to Shake.
4. In Time to Shake, enter the duration (in seconds) the ALP shakes the labware.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to shake is 1 second while the
maximum value is 100,000 seconds.
Note: The Time to shake does not include the Time to reach full speed or
the time to ramp down and return to a full stop.
5. In Direction, select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a
CounterClockwise or Clockwise direction.
Note: The default Direction is CounterClockwise.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3.3
14-27
Configuring the ALP to Run a Previously Defined
Shaking Profile
The Orbital Shaker ALP is capable of running previously defined shaking profiles.
Profiles are loaded to the Biomek Software directory when the Orbital Shaker ALP is
installed.
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to follow previously defined shaking profiles:
1. In Command, select Run (Figure 14-20).
Figure 14-20. Device Action step configured to run a previously designed
shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP
ALPs User’s Manual
14-28
Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Profile to Run, select the desired profile. There are three profiles available
for selection:
•
Cell pellet breakup — resuspends cells using 190µL Promega™ Cell
Resuspension Solution in a Costar 96 square, deep-well microplate. The
Cell pellet breakup profile completes five 1-second pulses at 950
RPM, then 28 5-second pulses at 900 RPM, and, finally, 90 seconds of
shaking in a counterclockwise direction at 900 RPM.
•
Magbead Mix— mixes MagneSil™ particles in low-viscosity
fluids.The Magbead Mix profile completes three 2-second pulses at
800 RPM, followed by 60 seconds of shaking in a constant direction at
750 RPM.
Note:
fluids.
•
More gentle mix typically used for particles in low-viscosity
MagneSil Yellow— mixes MagneSil™ Yellow particles in a water or
wash solution.The MagneSil profile completes 12 4-second pulses at
1000 RPM.
Note: More vigorous mix typically used with small volumes and
higher-viscosity fluids.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3.4
14-29
Configuring a Pulsing Shake Sequence
The Orbital Shaker ALP is capable of performing a pulsing shake sequence. A
pulsing shake sequence applies a series of shaking motions to a piece of labware. The
Pulse configuration shakes labware in one direction at the indicated speed for the
specified length of time followed by shaking the labware at the same speed for the
same length of time in the opposite direction. The labware is shaken in this manner in
alternating directions the specified number of times.
Note: The default configuration for a pulsing shake sequence on the ALP is to pulse
labware 1 time each direction for 1 second at 300 RPM. The default values do not
correspond with the parameters displayed in Table 14-1. Refer to Table 14-1(for
recommended shaking speeds for tested labware and fluid combinations.
WARNING: The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the
maximum shaking speed for all types of labware. Conduct testing
according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to
determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of
liquid.
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware using a pulsing motion:
1. In Command, select Pulse (Figure 14-21).
Figure 14-21. Device Action step configured for a pulsing shake motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
ALPs User’s Manual
14-30
Orbital Shaker ALP
2. Enter a Pulse Speed in RPM.
Note: The minimum Pulse Speed allowed is 1 RPM and the maximum is
1800 RPM.
3. In Time to Pulse, enter the duration (in seconds) the Orbital Shaker ALP
shakes in each direction.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 0.5 second while the
maximum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 5 seconds.
4. Enter the Number of times to Pulse within the time frame specified in Time
to Pulse.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Number of times to Pulse is 1 and the
maximum is1000.
Note: A pulsing shake sequence is an effective technique for removing bubbles from
solutions. Some experimentation may be necessary when designing a pulsing shake
sequence effective at removing bubbles from a specific solution.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3.5
14-31
Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in
Process
Stopping a shaking procedure already in process is accomplished using the Stop
command. The number of seconds the Orbital Shaker ALP has to stop the shaking
procedure is specified in the Stop command configuration.
Note: The default configuration for stopping a shaking procedure is 1 second.
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to stop a shaking procedure already in process:
1. In Command, select Stop (Figure 14-22).
Figure 14-22. Device Action step configured to stop all shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Time to stop, enter the duration (in seconds) the device has to move from
full speed to a full stop.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to stop is 0.5 second while the
maximum value is 600 seconds.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-32
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3.6
Clamping and Unclamping Labware on the
Orbital Shaker ALP
The Orbital Shaker ALP clamps automatically before a microplate is accessed for
pipetting and before any shaking procedure is initiated. It remains clamped until a
gripper move, the Device Action step, or the end of a method releases the microplate;
however, a Device Action step can be used to actuate the clamps at any time during a
method.
CAUTION: Clamp all labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even
when using the ALP as a standard deck position, such as a
1 x 1 or a swap space.
The Clamp and Unclamp commands found in the Device Action step configuration
for the Orbital Shaker ALP are used to actuate the clamps at any time during a
method. No configuration is necessary beyond the selection of Clamp or Unclamp in
the step configuration.
Note: The microplate platform on the Orbital Shaker ALP must be in the home
position before labware on the ALP can be accessed for a pipetting operation. If
access to a microplate is required, the ALP actuates the clamps and homes the
microplate platform, if necessary, prior to allowing access to the labware on the ALP.
Note: If a light curtain violation occurs while the clamp on the Orbital Shaker ALP
is in motion, the motion is completed. The state of the clamp on the ALP does not
change when the light curtain is violated or during a pause in a method.
Note: The Orbital Shaker ALP can also be controlled outside a method using
Manual Control in Biomek Software (refer to Section 14.5.6, Manually Clamping
and Unclamping Labware).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-33
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to clamp or unclamp labware during a method
run:
In Command, select Clamp or Unclamp (Figure 14-23).
Figure 14-23. Device Action step configured to actuate the clamps
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.3.7
Homing the Microplate Platform on the Orbital
Shaker ALP
Homing the microplate platform ensures that the Biomek instrument can accurately
access labware on the ALP for pipetting operations. The microplate platform on the
Orbital Shaker ALP can be homed at any time during a method run, as long as a
shaking operation is not already in process on the ALP. The home position for the
microplate shaking platform is in the center of the ALP.
Note: The microplate platform automatically homes at the beginning of each
method.
No configuration is necessary beyond the selection of Home in the step
configuration. To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to home the microplate platform
during a method run:
ALPs User’s Manual
14-34
Orbital Shaker ALP
In Command, select Home (Figure 14-24). The microplate platform moves to the
center of the ALP.
Figure 14-24. Device Action step configured to home the
microplate shaking platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.4.4
14-35
Stopping and Restarting a Method
If a need for manual control is realized during a method run and the method is stopped
using either the Stop or Snap Continuation buttons (refer to the Biomek Software
User’s Manual, Chapter 25.11.2, Snapping a Continuation), the Orbital Shaker ALP
does not automatically restart the shaking procedure when the Continuation method is
started. In order to restart a shaking operation, a Device Action step must be inserted
into the Continuation method.
Snap Continuation stops the method after Biomek instrument completes the move
in progress and creates a Continuation method (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 25.6, Light Curtain Errors).
CAUTION: If using Biomek FX Software version 2.1c or prior, crashes
may occur when executing a Continuation method. To avoid crashes,
delete any partially completed Orbital Shaker ALP steps and reinsert
them into the Continuation method.
Note: Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed.
Note: If the method is in the process of performing a move, such as aspirating or
dispensing, the Biomek instrument completes the move; however, the instrument may
not complete the entire step. For example, if the Biomek instrument is in the process
of performing a Transfer step and an error occurs while it is aspirating, selecting
Snap results in completing the aspiration but not the Transfer step.
14.4.4.1
Choosing Snap
Snap allows the method to be modified without changing the original method. When
Snap is chosen, a Continuation is created. A Continuation is a new method consisting
of the step causing the error, any steps not yet completed, and, if applicable, any
incomplete substeps of the step which generated the error (refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Chapter 25.11.2, Snapping a Continuation).
To use Snap:
1. Choose Snap to create a Continuation (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 25.11.2, Snapping a Continuation).
2. Delete all partially completed Orbital Shaker ALP Device Action steps.
3. Reinsert the deleted Orbital Shaker ALP Device Action steps by inserting a new
Device Action step into the Method View (Figure 14-17).
Note: A new Device Action step must be inserted for each Orbital Shaker ALP
step deleted.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-36
Orbital Shaker ALP
4. In Device, select the desired OrbitalShakerALP.
OR
Click on the Orbital Shaker ALP in the Current Deck Display to select it. The
configuration for the ALP appears (Figure 14-18).
Note: Any devices installed in Hardware Setup, except Tip Loaders and
Device Controllers, are listed under Device in the Device Action Step
Configuration.
Note: When an Orbital Shaker ALP is selected in Device, the ALP is
highlighted by a blue border in the Current Deck Display.
5. In Command, select the desired action for the Orbital Shaker ALP.
Note: The configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP changes based on the
selection made in Command.
Note: If a light curtain violation occurs while the Orbital Shaker ALP is
operating, the shaking operation is completed.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.5
14-37
Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP Outside a
Method
Advanced Manual Control is used to control the Orbital Shaker ALP outside a
method. Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP outside a method includes:
•
Manually Controlling a Standard Shaking Procedure (Section 14.5.1).
•
Manually Controlling a Shaking Procedure of a Specific Length of Time
(Section 14.5.2).
•
Manually Executing a Previously Defined Shaking Profile (Section 14.5.3).
•
Manually Controlling a Pulsing Shake (Section 14.5.4).
•
Manually Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process (Section
14.5.5).
•
Manually Clamping and Unclamping Labware (Section 14.5.6).
•
Manually Homing the Microplate Platform (Section 14.5.7).
To open Manual Control, choose Instrument>Manual Control. An Information
dialog (Figure 14-25) briefly appears as a connection is established with the Biomek
instrument, immediately followed by Manual Control (Figure 14-26).
Note: Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed. If a
need for manual control is realized during a method run, stop the method using the
Stop button or the Snap Continuation button (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 25.11.2, Snapping a Continuation) before accessing Manual
Control.
Figure 14-25. Confirms Manual Control is connecting
Figure 14-26. Manual Control
ALPs User’s Manual
14-38
Orbital Shaker ALP
Access Advanced Manual Control to select and control the appropriate Orbital
Shaker ALP. Advanced Manual Control can be used to command the ALP to:
•
Shake — shake labware at the indicated RPM in the specified
direction.
•
Timed Shake — shake labware at the indicated RPM in the specified
direction for the indicated number of seconds.
•
Run — shake labware using parameters from a previously defined
shaking profile.
•
Pulse — shake labware using a sequence of actions that pulse the
labware in alternating directions at a specific velocity for an indicated
number of seconds.
•
Stop — stop any shaking procedure by slowing the shaking action
within the indicated number of seconds.
•
Clamp — actuate the clamp to hold the labware in place.
•
Home — center the microplate platform on the ALP base.
•
Unclamp — release the clamp, allowing removal of the labware from
the ALP.
To open Advanced Manual Control for a specific Orbital Shaker ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears (Figure 1426).
2. Click on Advanced Controls and a list of all the installed pods and devices
appears (Figure 14-27).
Figure 14-27. Selecting an Orbital Microplate Shaking in Advanced Manual Control
3. Select the desired Orbital Shaker ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected ALP appears.
4. Configure the device to perform the desired action.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.5.1
14-39
Manually Controlling a Standard Shaking
Procedure
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware:
Note: The default configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP is to shake labware
CounterClockwise with a 1 (one) second ramp-up to 300 revolutions per minute
(RPM).
1. In Command, select Shake (Figure 14-28).
Figure 14-28. Using Advanced Manual Control for a continuous shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Shaking speed, indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM.
Note: The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum
Shaking speed allowed is 1800 RPM. Refer to Section 14.4.1, Establishing a
Safe Maximum Shaking Speed, for more information.
3. In Time to reach full speed, enter the duration (in seconds) the Orbital
Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 1 second
while the maximum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 600 seconds.
4. In Direction, select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a Clockwise
or CounterClockwise direction.
Note: The default Direction is CounterClockwise.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-40
Orbital Shaker ALP
5. Choose Go. The ALP shakes the microplate platform according to the specified
parameters.
OR
Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
14.5.2
Manually Controlling a Shaking Procedure
of a Specific Length of Time
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware a specific length of time:
Note: The default configuration for a timed shaking sequence is to shake labware for
10 seconds in a CounterClockwise direction with a 1 (one) second ramp-up to
300 revolutions per minute (RPM).
1. In Command, select Timed Shake (Figure 14-29).
Figure 14-29. Using Advanced Manual Control to control a timed shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Shaking speed, indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM.
Note: The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum
Shaking speed allowed is 1800 RPM. Refer to Section 14.4.1, Establishing a
Safe Maximum Shaking Speed, for more information.
3. In Time to reach full speed, enter the duration (in seconds) the Orbital
Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 0.5 seconds
while the maximum value is 600 seconds.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14-41
4. In Time to Shake, enter the duration (in seconds) the ALP shakes the labware.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to shake is 1 second while the
maximum is 100,000 seconds.
5. In Direction, select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a
CounterClockwise or Clockwise direction.
Note: The default Direction is CounterClockwise.
6. Choose Go. The ALP shakes the labware according to the specified parameters.
OR
Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process.
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
14.5.3
Manually Executing a Previously Defined
Shaking Profile
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to follow previously defined shaking profiles:
1. In Command, select Run (Figure 14-30).
Figure 14-30. Using Advanced Manual Control to run a previously defined
shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP
ALPs User’s Manual
14-42
Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Profile to Run, select the desired profile. There are three profiles available
for selection:
•
Cell pellet breakup — resuspends cells using 190µL Promega™ Cell
Resuspension Solution in a Costar 96 square, deep-well microplate. The
Cell pellet breakup profile completes five 1-second pulses at 950
RPM, then 28 5-second pulses at 900 RPM, and, finally, 90 seconds of
shaking in a counterclockwise direction at 900 RPM.
•
Magbead Mix— mixes MagneSil™ particles in low-viscosity
fluids.The Magbead Mix profile completes three 2-second pulses at
800 RPM, followed by 60 seconds of shaking in a constant direction at
750 RPM.
Note:
fluids.
•
More gentle mix typically used for particles in low-viscosity
MagneSil Yellow— mixes MagneSil™ Yellow particles in a water or
wash solution.The MagneSil profile completes 12 4-second pulses at
1000 RPM.
Note: More vigorous mix typically used with small volumes and
higher-viscosity fluids.
3. Choose Go. The ALP runs the selected profile.
OR
Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process.
4. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
5. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.5.4
14-43
Manually Controlling a Pulsing Shake
WARNING: The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the
maximum shaking speed for all types of labware. Conduct testing
according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to
determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of
liquid.
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware using a pulsing motion:
Note: The default values for Pulse do not correspond with the parameters displayed
in Table 14-1. (Refer to Table 14-1, Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking
Speeds, for recommended shaking speeds for tested labware and fluid combinations.)
1. In Command, select Pulse (Figure 14-31).
Figure 14-31. Using Advanced Manual Control for a pulsing shake motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. Enter a Pulse Speed in RPM.
Note: The minimum Pulse Speed allowed is 1 RPM and the maximum is
1800 RPM.
3. In Time to Pulse, enter the duration (in seconds) the Orbital Shaker ALP
shakes in each direction.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 0.5 seconds while the
maximum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 5 seconds.
4. Enter the Number of times to Pulse to execute the pulsing sequence.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Number of times to Pulse is 1 and the
maximum is 1000.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-44
Orbital Shaker ALP
5. Choose Go. The ALP pulses the labware according to the specified parameters.
OR
Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
14.5.5
Manually Stopping a Shaking Procedure
Already in Process
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to stop a Manual Shake procedure already in
process:
Note: Stop will not halt a timed shake, pulse shake, or profile shake procedure
already in process. Abort must be used to stop a timed shake, pulse shake, or profile
shake procedure.
Note: The default configuration for stopping a shaking procedure is 1 second.
1. In Command, select Stop (Figure 14-32).
Figure 14-32. Using Advanced Manual Control to stop all shaking motion
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. In Time to stop, enter the duration (in seconds) the device has to move from
full speed to a full stop.
Note: The minimum value allowed in Time to stop is 0.5 seconds while the
maximum value is 600 seconds.
3. Choose Go. The ALP stops all shaking motion.
OR
Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process.
4. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
5. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.5.6
14-45
Manually Clamping and Unclamping
Labware
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to clamp or unclamp labware:
Note: Clamp and Unclamp cannot interrupt a shaking operation. All shaking
operations must stop before using Clamp or Unclamp.
Note: If a light curtain violation occurs while the clamp is in motion, the motion is
completed. The state of the clamp does not change when the light curtain is violated
or during a pause in a method.
1. In Command, select Clamp or Unclamp (Figure 14-33).
Figure 14-33. Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamps
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. Choose Go. The ALP actuates the clamps.
OR
Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process.
3. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
4. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-46
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.5.7
Manually Homing the Microplate Platform
To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to home the microplate platform:
Note: All shaking operations must stop before using Home.
Note: The ALP must be clamped prior to homing.
1. In Command, select Home (Figure 14-34).
Figure 14-34. Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform
on an Orbital Shaker ALP
2. Choose Go. The ALP homes the microplate platform.
OR
Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process.
3. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
4. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Orbital Shaker ALP
14.6
14-47
Removing the Orbital Shaker ALP from the Deck
To remove the Orbital Shaker ALP:
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
1. Turn off power to Biomek instrument.
2. Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Orbital Shaker
ALP.
3. Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Biomek
instrument.
4. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP.
5. Lift ALP straight up to clear the locating pins on the base of the ALP from the
locating holes on the deck.
14.7
Storage
Return the Orbital Shaker ALP and CAN communications cable to the original
packing materials and store in a dry, dust-free, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Orbital Shaker ALP to air-dry before returning it to
the original packing materials.
14.8
Preventive Maintenance
Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
ALPs User’s Manual
14-48
14.9
Orbital Shaker ALP
Troubleshooting
Do not remove covers for any reason. Do not attempt to repair the Orbital Shaker
ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 14-2. Troubleshooting the Orbital Shaker ALP
IF
THEN
The Orbital Shaker ALP is not
functioning
Make sure a good CAN connection
has been established.
The clamps are not grasping the
labware
Make sure the labware is supported
by the Biomek instrument.
Make sure the labware is defined
properly in the Labware Type
Editor. Refer to the Biomek Software
User’s Manual, Chapter 7, Creating
and Modifying Tip and Labware
Types for more information on
defining labware.
Contact a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
15-1
15 Positive Position ALP
15.1
Overview
The Positive Position ALP (Figure 15-1) is an active ALP that verifies the presence or
absence of a microplate on the ALP and accurately and precisely positions it for
interaction with the Biomek instrument. The Positive Position ALP accepts most
microplates; however, its main function is to accurately position microplates
requiring high precision within wells. Microplates can be loaded to the Positive
Position ALP by a lab technician, the ORCA Robot, or by the Biomek gripper.
Note: The Positive Position ALP may not be able to detect unskirted microplates.
Verify that the Positive Position ALP is capable of detecting unskirted microplates
using a Device Action step (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter
22.6, Device Action Step). The Positive Position ALP can also be manually controlled
using Advanced Manual Control in the Biomek Software (refer to Section 15.5,
Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a Method).
Note: The Positive Position ALP does not support the Costar Deep 96-well
microplate.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Positive Position ALP (Section 15.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 15.3)
•
Using the Positive Position ALP in a Method (Section 15.4)
•
Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a Method (Section 15.5)
•
Removing the Positive Position ALP from the Deck (Section 15.6)
•
Storage (Section 15.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 15.8)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 15.9)
ALPs User’s Manual
15-2
Positive Position ALP
Fixed labware
positioning guides
Positive Position
ALP clamp
Y-axis leveling
screw
X-axis leveling
screw
CAN communication
ports
ADR1
ADR2
Thumbscrew
Figure 15-1. Positive Position ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Positive Position ALP
15.2
15-3
Installing the Positive Position ALP
Installing the Positive Position ALP includes:
•
Choosing any standard deck position.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically
mount the ALP, configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
•
Mounting a Positive Position ALP to the Deck (Section 15.2.1).
•
Leveling the Positive Position ALP (Section 15.2.2).
•
Aligning the Top of the Positive Position ALP with the Multichannel Head or
Span-8 Probes (Section 15.2.3).
15.2.1
Mounting a Positive Position ALP to the
Deck
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
To mount the Positive Position ALP:
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any ALP.
CAUTION: Orient the Positive Position ALP so the CAN connections are
to the right of the ALP and the clamp is in the front right corner of the
ALP when facing the Biomek instrument.
2. Position the Positive Position ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP
slip into locating holes on the deck, the CAN connections are to the right of the
ALP, and the clamp is in the front right corner of the ALP when facing the
Biomek instrument.
3. Fasten the Positive Position ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base
of the ALP.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
4. Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male CAN Port on
the Positive Position ALP.
Note: When possible, short CAN cables should be used when connecting
devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument.
ALPs User’s Manual
15-4
Positive Position ALP
5. Plug the other end of the CAN communication cable into one of the following
connectors:
Note: Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
•
Any female connector labeled “CAN Port” on the main Biomek
instrument.
•
Any available female connector labeled “CAN Port” on another Active
ALP, creating a chain of connected cables.
Note: A chain links multiple devices together. The maximum number
of devices that can be chained together is three. Each chain of three
devices must plug into the main Biomek instrument at some point.
Note: The maximum number of Positive Position ALPs allowed on
the Biomek deck is 20.
6. Verify that address switch ADR1 is set between 0 and 7.
Note: The device address for a Positive Position ALP is set by both ADR1 and
ADR2.
Note: The default setting for ADR1 is 0, with legal addresses for ADR1 being 0
through 7. If ADR1 is set to addresses 8, it is remapped to 0; if ADR1 is set to 9,
it is remapped to 1; and if ADR1 is set to addresses A through F, they are
remapped down to addresses 2 through 7.
7. Verify that address switch ADR2 is set between 0 and F.
Note: The default setting for ADR2 is 0.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Positive Position ALP
15.2.2
15-5
Leveling the Positive Position ALP
Once the Positive Position ALP is installed, it must be leveled.
To level the Positive Position ALP:
1. Loosen the three leveling screws two full counterclockwise rotations.
2. Load tips to the pod, if tips are not already loaded.
3. Lower tips until slightly above the top of the Positive Position ALP.
4. Level the X axis to the tips using the two X axis leveling screws by turning the
screws clockwise one at a time (Figure 15-2 and Figure 15-3).
Note: Tightening a screw lowers that side of the Positive Position ALP.
5. Level the Y axis to the tips using the Y axis leveling screw by turning the screw
clockwise (Figure 15-1 and Figure 15-2).
Labware sensor
Thumbscrew
Y axis leveling screw
X axis leveling
screws
Thumbscrew
Positive Position
ALP clamp
Figure 15-2. Leveling screws for the Positive Position ALP (top-down view)
ALPs User’s Manual
15-6
Positive Position ALP
15.2.3
Aligning the Top of the Positive Position
ALP with the Multichannel Head or Span-8
Probes
Once the Positive Position ALP is installed and leveled, it must be aligned with the
pod accessing it. Proper alignment prevents damage to the pod, head, probes, tips,
ALP, and labware.
To align the Positive Position ALP:
1. Load tips to the pod if tips are not already loaded.
2. Position a microplate on the top of the Positive Position ALP.
3. Lower tips until slightly above the labware on top of the Positive Position ALP.
4. Verify that the microplate wells align with the tips. If necessary, tighten the
rotational adjustment screw using the screwdriver provided to rotate the top of
the Positive Position ALP counterclockwise (Figure 15-3).
OR
Loosen the rotational adjustment screw using the screwdriver provided to rotate
the top of the Positive Position ALP clockwise (Figure 15-3).
Positive Position
ALP clamp
Labware sensor
X-axis leveling
screws
Rotational
adjustment screw
Thumbscrew
Figure 15-3. Rotational adjustment screw for the Positive Position ALP
(left side view)
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Positive Position ALP
15.3
15-7
Framing Instructions
When using the Positive Position ALP with high-density labware, the ALP may need
to be manually framed using Manual Teach to ensure that the tips can access the
wells without causing any damage to the tips, probes, pod, or ALP. Manual Teach is
accessed through Position Properties in the Deck Editor.
To frame the Positive Position ALP using Manual Teach, follow the instructions
outlined in specific user’s manual for the instrument.
Note: When using labware other than 1536-well on the Positive Position ALP, the
standard framing procedure using the AccuFrame is usually acceptable. To frame the
ALP using the AccuFrame, manually position the AccuFrame against the locating
surfaces in the back, left corner of the ALP and refer to the specific user’s manual for
the instrument to complete the process.
ALPs User’s Manual
15-8
15.4
Positive Position ALP
Using the Positive Position ALP in a Method
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Pinch Point! The clamps used to secure a microplate to the
Positive Position ALP could cause personal injury. Avoid interference
with the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP.
To use the Positive Position ALP in a method, it must be installed in Hardware
Setup (refer to Chapter 1.3, Installing and Configuring ALPs).
The Positive Position ALP unclamps automatically at the end of a method; however, a
Device Action step can be used to actuate the clamps in the middle of a method or to
verify the presence or absence of labware on the ALP. If access to an unclamped
microplate is required, the Positive Position ALP clamps before a pod is allowed to
access the microplate. After access to the microplate is completed, the ALP remains
clamped until a gripper move, the Device Action step, or the end of the method
releases the microplate.
Note: If a light curtain violation occurs while the clamp on the Positive Position
ALP is in motion, the motion is completed. The state of the clamps on the Positive
Position ALP do not change when the light curtain is violated or during a pause in a
method.
Note: The amount of force applied to accurately position a microplate depends upon
the type of microplate placed on the Positive Position ALP. When the Positive
Position ALP is used in a method, the force applied by the clamp is determined by the
type of labware positioned on the ALP (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 7, Creating and Modifying Tip and Labware Types). The force applied to
clamp a microplate is a percentage of the total clamping force available.
To configure the Device Action step for the Positive Position ALP:
1. Insert a Device Action step into the method view.
2. From Device, select the Positive Position ALP performing the required
operation.
OR
Click on the Positive Position ALP in the Current Deck Display to select it. The
configuration for the Positive Position ALP appears (Figure 15-4).
Note: The deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck Display and is
displayed to the right of Device.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Positive Position ALP
15-9
Deck position
Indicates the position of the
device performing the action
on the deck.
Device Action step configuration
The Device Action step configuration
specifies an operation performed on the
Positive Position ALP.
Method View
The Device
Action caption
indicates the
device and its
status.
Figure 15-4. Device Action Step for the Positive Position ALP
3. In Command, indicate the desired action for the Positive Position ALP:
•
Clamp — tightens the clamp to hold the labware in place.
•
Unclamp — releases the clamp to allow the labware to be removed
from the ALP.
•
VerifyLabware — verifies that labware is currently on the Positive
Position ALP; an error displays and the method stops if no labware is
found.
•
VerifyNoLabware — verifies that there is currently no labware on the
Positive Position ALP; an error displays and the method stops if labware
is found.
ALPs User’s Manual
15-10
15.5
Positive Position ALP
Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a
Method
To control the Positive Position ALP outside a method, use Advanced Manual
Control for:
•
Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Positive Position ALP (Section
15.5.1)
•
Verifying the Sensor on the Positive Position ALP Operates Properly
(Section 15.5.2)
Note: Generally, the only time the sensor is verified is during
troubleshooting.
•
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Verifying the Positive Position ALP Recognizes a Type of Labware (Section
15.5.3)
Positive Position ALP
15.5.1
15-11
Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a
Positive Position ALP
To clamp labware on a Positive Position ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Positive Position ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Positive Position ALP appears (Figure 15-5).
From Command, choose
Clamp,
Unclamp,VerifyLabware, or
VerifiyNoLabware.
Figure 15-5. Advanced Manual Control for a Positive Position ALP
4. From Command, choose Clamp.
5. Choose Go. The clamps actuate.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
To unclamp labware from a Positive Position ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Positive Position ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Positive Position ALP appears (Figure 15-5).
4. From Command, choose Unclamp.
5. Choose Go. The clamps disengage.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
ALPs User’s Manual
15-12
Positive Position ALP
15.5.2
Verifying the Sensor on the Positive
Position ALP Operates Properly
Manual Control may be used to verify the sensor on the Positive Position ALP
operates properly. Generally, the only time the sensor is verified is during
troubleshooting.
To verify the sensor operates properly:
1. Place a piece of labware on the Positive Position ALP.
2. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
3. Choose Advanced Controls.
4. Select the desired Positive Position ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Positive Position ALP appears (Figure 15-5).
5. From Command, choose VerifyLabware.
6. Choose Go. The Positive Position ALP recognizes the piece of labware unless an
Error appears (Figure 15-6).
Note: If the following Error (Figure 15-6) appears, the sensor does not
recognize the labware present on the Positive Position ALP because the sensor is
not operating properly or the ALP does not recognize a specific type of labware.
Note: Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer if several types of labware
are not recognized; the sensor on the Positive Position ALP is not operating
properly.
Figure 15-6. Labware not found at sensor
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
OR
1. Make sure no labware is placed on the Positive Position ALP.
2. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
3. Choose Advanced Controls.
4. Select the desired Positive Position ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Positive Position ALP appears (Figure 15-5).
5. From Command, choose VerifyNoLabware.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Positive Position ALP
15-13
6. Choose Go. The Positive Position ALP recognizes no labware is placed on the
Positive Position ALP unless an Error appears (Figure 15-7).
Note: If the following Error (Figure 15-7) appears, the sensor does not
recognize that labware is not present on the Positive Position ALP; the sensor is
not operating properly. Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer.
Figure 15-7. Labware found at sensor
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
15.5.3
Verifying the Positive Position ALP
Recognizes a Type of Labware
Follow the instructions in Section 15.5.2, Verifying the Sensor on the Positive
Position ALP Operates Properly, to verify if the Positive Position ALP recognizes a
specific type of labware.
ALPs User’s Manual
15-14
15.6
Positive Position ALP
Removing the Positive Position ALP from the
Deck
To remove the Positive Position ALP:
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before removing the Positive Position
ALP.
2. Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Positive
Position ALP.
3. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP.
4. Lift the ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the deck.
15.7
Storage
Return the Positive Position ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry,
dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Positive Position ALP to air dry before returning it
to the original packing materials.
15.8
Preventive Maintenance
Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
15.9
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the Positive Position ALP without first contacting a Beckman
Coulter Service Engineer.
Table 15-1. Troubleshooting the Positive Position ALP
IF
The Positive Position ALP is not
powering up
THEN
Check CAN cable connection.
Contact a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
The Positive Position ALP is not
functioning correctly
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Contact a Beckman Service Engineer.
Note: Do not remove the cover(s)
for any reason.
16-1
16 Solid Phase Extraction (SPE)
Vacuum Manifold ALP
16.1
Overview
The Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP (Figure 16-1) is an active
ALP used to filter fluid from samples by pulling the fluid from a sample through a
filtered microplate, and disposing of the filtered fluid. A user-supplied vacuum supply
must be provided.
Note: The SPE ALP requires a minimum vacuum supply of 20 in. Hg @ 4.5 SCFM
(67.7 kPa @ 0.127 m3/min).
The SPE ALP is required to complete the Plasmid DNA Miniprep process, and is
configured by using the SPE step from the Devices step palette.
The components of the SPE ALP are stacked on two ALP stands: the SPE ALP Stand
and SPE Collar Stand (refer to Section 16.1.1, Components of the SPE ALP). The two
ALP stands occupy two deck positions on the DNA Preparation Deck Layout and are
used simultaneously during a method run.
Note: Since the gripper fingers must open wide enough to grip the SPE Collar on the
SPE Collar Stand and would hit an adjacent ALP, use the 1 x 1 Passive ALP with
Indented Sides to allow the position adjacent to the SPE Collar Stand to be retained.
The 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides allows enough clearance for the gripper to
extend and move the SPE Collar without hitting it (refer to Section 19.1.2, 1 x 1
Passive ALP with Indented Sides).
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand (Section 16.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 16.3)
•
Using the SPE ALP in a Method (Section 16.4)
•
Removing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand (Section 16.5)
ALPs User’s Manual
16-2
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
•
Storage (Section 16.6)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 16.7)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 16.8)
When framing the SPE ALP, the
AccuFrame rests inside the SPE
ALP Base as indicated.
Figure 16-1. SPE ALP with Collar
Note: The interior of the SPE ALP Base is used for framing (refer to Section 16.3,
Framing Instructions). The SPE Collar must be removed to frame the SPE ALP.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
16.1.1
16-3
Components of the SPE ALP
The components of the SPE ALP are stacked on two ALP stands which are used
simultaneously during a method run.
The components of the SPE ALP are:
•
SPE ALP Base — connects to the vacuum used during filtration operations;
all filtered fluids are drained through the SPE ALP Base.
•
SPE ALP Collar — supports the source microplate and encloses the receiver
filter microplate during filtration operations; referred to as the Manifold in
the Biomek Software.
Note: There are multiple SPE Collars available for use on the SPE ALP.
The specific collar used during a method run is specified by the wizard.
•
Filter Microplate — the labware through which fluids are separated from
solids in the SPE ALP; referred to as the Filter Source and Receiver
Source in the Biomek Software.
•
Filter Holder — a plastic device that holds a filtered microplate to protect it
from damage.
Note: The process of stacking the components of the SPE ALP during a method
creates the SPE ALP. The SPE ALP can be assembled and/or disassembled during a
method.
The two ALP stands are:
•
SPE ALP Stand — supports the SPE ALP Base (Figure 16-2) where
filtration occurs and occupies a position in the back row of the Biomek FX
deck; the SPE ALP Stack is constructed on the SPE ALP Stand.
Note: The SPE ALP is the combination of the SPE ALP Base and the SPE
ALP Stand. The SPE ALP Base and the SPE ALP Stand are treated as a
single unit (the SPE ALP) in the Biomek Software.
•
SPE Collar Stand — supports the SPE Collar (Manifold in the software)
(Figure 16-3) and occupies a deck position adjacent to the SPE ALP Stand,
in the same column.
Note: The two ALP stands occupy two deck positions on the DNA Preparation Deck
Layout.
ALPs User’s Manual
16-4
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
SPE Collar (Manifold)
Referred to as the
Manifold in the SPE
step from the Devices
step palette.
SPE ALP Base
The SPE ALP Base
connects to the
vacuum and all
filtered fluids are
drained through the
SPE ALP Base.
SPE ALP
Combination of
the SPE ALP
Base and the
SPE ALP Stand.
SPE ALP Stand
Supports the SPE
ALP Base.
Thumbscrews
Figure 16-2. SPE Collar (Manifold), SPE ALP Base, and SPE ALP Stand
SPE Collar (Manifold)
Referred to as the
Manifold in the SPE
step from the Devices
step palette.
SPE Collar Stand
Figure 16-3. SPE Collar placed on the SPE Collar Stand
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
16.2
16-5
Installing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand
Installing the SPE ALP includes choosing adjacent deck positions for the SPE ALP
and SPE Collar Stand and mounting them to the deck.
Note: Connect the SPE ALP as recommended by the manufacturer of the vacuum
system being used.
16.2.1
Choosing Deck Positions for the SPE ALP
and Collar Stand
SPE ALP and the SPE Collar Stand occupy adjacent deck positions. Use the Biomek
Software Deck Editor to determine available positions on which to install the SPE
ALP and Collar Stand.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
16.2.2
Mounting the SPE ALP
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To mount the SPE ALP (Figure 16-2):
Note: The SPE ALP is the combination of the SPE ALP Base and the SPE ALP
Stand.
1. Position the SPE ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip
into locating holes on the deck.
2. Attach the SPE ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the ALP stand (Figure
16-2).
3. Attach a vacuum hose to the SPE ALP as directed by the manufacturer of the
vacuum unit.
Note: The SPE ALP filtration manifold requires a minimum vacuum supply of
20 in. Hg @ 4.5 SCFM (67.7 kPa @ 0.127 m3/min).
Note: The vacuum hose must run toward the back of the Biomek deck; so, make
sure the barbed fitting on the SPE ALP is horizontal to the ALP edge.
Note: Make sure the hose routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
4. Provide a waste container as specified by the vacuum pump manufacturer.
ALPs User’s Manual
16-6
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
16.2.3
Mounting the SPE Collar Stand
To mount the SPE Collar Stand (Figure 16-4):
Note: The SPE Collar Stand must be adjacent to the SPE ALP.
1. Position the SPE Collar Stand so the locating pins on the bottom of the stand slip
into locating holes on the Biomek deck.
Locating holes
Thumbscrews
Figure 16-4. SPE Collar Stand locating holes and thumbscrews
2. Attach the SPE Collar Stand to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the
stand (Figure 16-4).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
16.3
16-7
Framing Instructions
Special framing instructions are necessary for the SPE ALP and the SPE Collar
Stand.
16.3.1
Special Framing for the SPE ALP
The SPE ALP is framed using the AccuFrame, but not the Framing Tool Adaptor.
To frame the SPE ALP:
1. Attach the SPE ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP
stand (Figure 16-2).
2. Place the AccuFrame inside the SPE ALP.
3. Frame the ALP according to procedures outlined in the specific user’s manual for
the instrument.
16.3.2
Special Framing for the SPE Collar Stand
The SPE Collar Stand is framed using the AccuFrame and the Framing Tool Adaptor.
To frame the SPE ALP Collar Stand:
1. Place the Framing Tool Adaptor on the SPE Collar Stand so that the locating pins
on the bottom of the Framing Tool Adaptor align with the locating holes on the
SPE Collar Stand (Figure 16-5).
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck.
2. Turn off power to Biomek instrument before connecting the AccuFrame.
3. Plug the AccuFrame into an available CAN port on the Biomek tower.
WARNING: Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame
cable. If the light curtain is violated, the framing process halts
immediately.
WARNING: Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod
movement.
4. Turn on power to Biomek instrument.
5. Manually place the AccuFrame into the Framing Tool Adaptor by placing the
front right corner first and pushing the AccuFrame gently down into the Adaptor
(Figure 16-5).
ALPs User’s Manual
16-8
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
6. Frame the SPE Collar Stand according to the instructions outlined in the specific
user’s manual for the instrument.
AccuFrame
Framing Tool Adaptor
SPE Collar Stand
Figure 16-5. Placing the Framing Tool Adaptor and
AccuFrame on the SPE Collar Stand
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
16.4
16-9
Using the SPE ALP in a Method
Using the SPE ALP in a method requires the configuration of labware, such as the
filter holder, in the Instrument Setup step (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 15.2, Instrument Setup Step) and configuration of the SPE step
(refer to Section 16.4.1, Configuring the SPE Step).
16.4.1
Configuring the SPE Step
The SPE step is a convenient way of executing the assembly and disassembly of the
SPE ALP system. An SPE step must be configured when an SPE ALP is required to
complete a method. The configuration for the SPE step informs the Biomek Software
of the:
•
Operation required of the SPE step (Figure 16-6)
•
Location of the filtered microplate used by the SPE ALP
•
Locations of the SPE vacuum manifold and receiver
•
Location of the SPE ALP on the deck
•
Pod constructing/destroying the SPE stack
Note: The SPE step is for use with a Multichannel Pod only.
Note: The SPE ALP can only be used on the DNA Preparation Deck Layout and
occupies two deck positions.
ALPs User’s Manual
16-10
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
To configure the SPE step:
1. Insert a SPE step into the Method View (Figure 16-6).
Receiver plate configuration
When the receiver microplate is
positioned in a microplate holder,
the presence of the holder must be
indicated by selecting Receiver
plate has a holder.
SPE step configuration
The operation performed by the
SPE step, as well as the position
and identity of the components of
the SPE ALP are provided in the
SPE step configuration.
Figure 16-6. SPE step and configuration
2. Select the Operation performed by the SPE ALP from the options listed below:
•
Create — assembles the various pieces of an SPE stack
•
Destroy — disassembles an SPE stack
3. Select the location of the Filter Source used by the SPE stack.
Note: The Filter Source is the location on the deck of the filtered microplate
that is placed on top of the SPE ALP stack.
4. Select the location of the Manifold Source for the SPE stack. The Manifold
Source is the location of the manifold, which is referred to as the collar in the
this manual.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
16-11
5. Select the location of the Receiver Source for the SPE stack. The Receiver
Source is any filtered microplate that is positioned inside the SPE Collar and the
SPE ALP. If no receiver microplate is defined, the fluid flows through the source
filtered microplate into the SPE ALP Base. The fluid is removed from the base
via the vacuum hose.
Note: Filter Source, Manifold Source, and Receiver Source all change to
Destination when Operation is set to Destroy.
6. Select Receiver plate has a holder if the receiving microplate is positioned
in a filter holder. The filter holder is used to keep the tips of a filtered microplate
from touching the base of an ALP stand.
Note: A filter microplate without a filter holder can be positioned inside a 1 x 1
ALP without damaging the microplate.
Note: Labware, including the filter holder, is positioned on the Deck Layout in
the Instrument Setup step.
7. Select the Location of SPE ALP on the Biomek deck.
8. Specify the Pod accessing the SPE stack.
¾
FX — Pod is available only if the Biomek instrument is configured as a
dual-pod instrument. Pod1 is the default for a single-pod Biomek FX
system. In a dual-pod Biomek FX system, the pod configured as the default
pod is displayed in Pod. If the other pod is desired, select the pod from the
drop-down list.
9. Select a step that occurs after the SPE step or the Finish step to validate the step
configuration.
ALPs User’s Manual
16-12
16.5
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) Vacuum Manifold ALP
Removing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand
To remove the SPE ALP:
1. Remove the vacuum attachment as directed by the manufacturer.
2. Loosen the thumbscrews.
3. Lift the ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the deck.
To remove the SPE Collar Stand:
1. Loosen the thumbscrews.
2. Lift the SPE Collar Stand in an upward motion to clear the locating holes from
the deck.
16.6
Storage
Return the SPE ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry, dust-free,
environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the SPE ALP to air-dry before returning it to the
original packing materials.
16.7
Preventive Maintenance
Wash plastic periodically.
16.8
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the SPE ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter
Service Engineer.
Table 16-1. Troubleshooting the SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP
IF
THEN
The SPE ALP is not applying
Verify the vacuum unit has been set
appropriate vacuum to the microplate up and attached to the ALP as
directed by the manufacturer.
The SPE ALP is not functioning
correctly
Contact a Beckman Coulter service
Engineer.
Note: Do not remove the cover(s)
for any reason.
Gaskets become worn
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Replace gaskets using the Gasket
Replacement Kit (#719404). Follow
instructions in the kit.
17-1
17 Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.1
Overview
The Span-8 Disposal ALP is a passive ALP that provides a means to dispose of tips
during a method. This ALP is designed to dispose of tips used by the Span-8 Pod in
one of two ways:
•
Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide — The disposed tips are placed into a
waste receptacle positioned inside the Span-8 Disposal ALP base (used for
tip disposal only).
OR
•
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide— A slide that extends beyond the edge of
the Biomek deck is inserted into the Disposal ALP. Tips placed inside the
ALP slide down into a receptacle placed below.
Note: The Span-8 Disposal ALP is shipped so that either of the two options above
can be assembled and used.
Earlier versions of the Span-8 Disposal ALP included a slightly different bagging
extension; however, when used with Biomek Software 3.2, a new bagging extension
must be used. This new bagging extension is included in an upgrade kit (Beckman
Coulter Part # A20304). The Span-8 Disposal ALP purchased with Biomek Software
3.2 includes the new bagging extension.
CAUTION: Older versions of the Span-8 Disposal ALP must be modified
with the new bagging extension when upgrading to Biomek Software
3.2. Failure to modify the ALP could result in Span-8 Pod crashes.
¾
FX — When the Biomek FX instrument is configured with a Span-8 Pod and
a Multichannel Pod, the Span-8 Disposal ALP must be positioned on the
Span-8 side of the deck in the outside column.
¾
NX-S8 — The Half-Position Disposal ALP is designed to dispose of tips
used by the Biomek NX Span-8 instrument (refer to Chapter 5, Half-Position
Disposal ALP (NX-S8 only)).
ALPs User’s Manual
17-2
Span-8 Disposal ALP
The sections in this chapter include:
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
•
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide (Section 17.2)
•
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide (Section 17.3)
•
Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX (Section 17.4)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 17.5)
•
Removing the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide (Section 17.6)
•
Removing a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide (Section 17.7)
•
Storage (Section 17.8)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 17.9)
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.1.1
17-3
Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide
WARNING: When using the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide, do not
overfill the disposal bag. Tips may spill over onto the deck, possibly
contaminating the deck with hazardous materials.
When the Span-8 Disposal ALP is used as a self-contained waste receptacle, the
bagging extension is attached to the ALP base, and a waste bag is mounted inside the
Span-8 Disposal ALP (Figure 17-1). The ALP can be used in a standard deck position
in the outside columns of the deck and is particularly effective when lab space is at a
premium.
Note: The Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide is used only for collecting shucked
tips.
Bagging extension
(used for Span-8
Disposal ALP
without Slide)
Span-8 Disposal
ALP base
Thumbscrew
Figure 17-1. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide
ALPs User’s Manual
17-4
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.1.2
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
The Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide (Figure 17-2) is positioned on the deck in the
outside columns, and extends off the edge of the deck. The slide is directed through
the gap between the deck and light curtain (or side safety shield). A trash receptacle is
placed on the floor at the end of the slide to catch the waste. The Span-8 Disposal
ALP with Slide allows the disposal of as many used tips as the trash receptacle is
capable of holding.
CAUTION: The Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted on the
outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions.
Note: Span-8 Disposal ALPs with Slide cannot be mounted adjacent to one another
on the first three rows of the deck.
The Span-8 Pod can drop disposable tips directly into the Span-8 Disposal ALP with
Slide.
Note: Tips may stick to the slide, which could cause tips to jam in the chute. Check
the slide periodically during the method run to ensure it is clear of tips.
Note: Since the slide of a Span-8 Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of the
Biomek FX deck, the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide. Refer to
Section 17.4, Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX, for more
information on modifying the deck to accommodate a Span-8 Disposal ALP with
Slide.
Span-8
Disposal
ALP base
Span-8 Disposal
chute
Span-8 Disposal chute
mounting screws
Figure 17-2. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.2
17-5
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide includes choosing a deck position
and mounting the ALP to the deck.
17.2.1
Choosing a Deck Position for the Span-8
Disposal ALP without Slide
CAUTION: The self-contained Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide must
be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid
collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
The Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide can be placed in positions in the outside
columns of the Biomek deck.
Note: Span-8 Disposal ALPs cannot be mounted adjacent to one another in the first
three rows on the Biomek deck
When adding a Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide to the Biomek deck, the ALP
must be associated with that deck position in the Deck Editor. To associate the Span8 Disposal ALP without Slide with a deck position in the Deck Editor, drag and drop
Span8TipTrash to the appropriate position in the deck view. For more information
about associating an ALP with a deck position, refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck.
17.2.2
Mounting a Span-8 Disposal ALP without
Slide
To mount a Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide:
1. Remove the slide and chute from the Span-8 Disposal ALP. (Refer to 17.7,
Removing a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide, for specific instructions and
diagrams.)
CAUTION: Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the
Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span-8 Disposal ALP. Each Disposal
ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP.
2. Snap the bagging extension onto the Span-8 Disposal ALP base by lining up the
springs on the bagging extension with the cutouts on the Disposal ALP base
(Figure 17-3).
ALPs User’s Manual
17-6
Span-8 Disposal ALP
3. Apply downward force to the top of the bagging extension. The springs slip
through to the inside of the Span-8 Disposal ALP base and lock into the cutouts
(Figure 17-3).
Adding bagging
extension to Span-8
Disposal ALP base
Apply downward force to
snap the two springs into the
cutouts and to align the
grounding tab so that the
grounding screw can be
inserted.
Bagging extension
Springs
(Second spring is on the
opposite side of the
bagging extension.)
Grounding tab
and screw
The screw is
inserted through
the tab and into the
base at this
location.
Cutout for springs
The springs must snap
through to the inside surface
of the base.
Span-8 Disposal
ALP base
Figure 17-3. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide — exploded
4. Insert a screw through the hole in the grounding tab on the bagging extension and
into the threaded hole in the Span-8 Disposal ALP base
(Figure 17-4).
Note: This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP.
5. Choose a deck position in the outside column of the deck, then slip the locating
pins on the bottom of the Span-8 Disposal ALP into the locating holes of the
desired deck position.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17-7
6. Fasten the Span-8 Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base
of the Span-8 Disposal ALP (Figure 17-4).
Grounding tab and
screw
The screw is inserted
through the tab and
into the ALP base at
this location.
Thumbscrew
Two thumbscrews
are used to secure the
Span-8 Disposal
ALP to the deck.
(The second thumb
screw is positioned
diagonally to the one
shown here.)
Figure 17-4. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide showing grounding tab and screw
WARNING: Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are
recommended for hazardous applications. The waste bags shipped with
the Span-8 Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags. Contact the laboratory
safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures.
7. Fold the top of a waste bag over the frame so that the bottom of the bag reaches
the bottom of the ALP base.
8. Smooth out the bag to allow items to drop directly to the bottom of the bag.
ALPs User’s Manual
17-8
Span-8 Disposal ALP
9. To hold the bag in place, stretch the rubber band over the top of the extension and
bag and position it in the location shown (Figure 17-5).
Bagging extension
Bag
placement
To create an
opening for the
disposed items,
place the bag
inside the
bagging
extension using
the dashed lines
as a guide.
Rubber band
placement
Position the rubber
band below the
widest part of the
bagging extension.
Span-8 Disposal
ALP base
Figure 17-5. Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide rubber band placement
10. Pull the bag through the Span-8 Disposal ALP so the opening looks like the
photo in Figure 17-6.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17-9
Correct
opening for
disposed
tips
Pull the bag through the
ALP to create the correct
opening for disposed tips.
Figure 17-6. Span-8 Disposal ALP with correct bag placement
ALPs User’s Manual
17-10
17.3
Span-8 Disposal ALP
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
Installing the Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide includes choosing a deck position and
mounting the ALP to the deck.
Note: Since the slide of a Span-8 Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of the
Biomek FX deck, the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide. Refer to
Section 17.4, Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX, for more
information on modifying the deck to accommodate a Span-8 Disposal ALP with
Slide.
17.3.1
Deck Positions for the Span-8 Disposal
ALP with Slide
CAUTION: The Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted on the
outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions.
CAUTION: Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when
configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor. Disposal ALPs vary in
height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software
may result in collisions between pod(s) and Disposal ALPs during
operation.
The Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide can be positioned in the outside columns, and
extends off the edge of the Biomek deck.
Note: When adding a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide to the Biomek deck, the ALP
must be associated with a deck position in the Deck Editor. To associate the Span-8
Disposal ALP with Slide with a deck position in the Deck Editor, drag and drop
Span8TrashLeft or Span8TrashRight to the appropriate position in the deck
view. For more information about associating an ALP with a deck position, refer to
the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.3.2
17-11
Mounting a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
To mount a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide:
1. Position the disposal chute by lining up the holes in the disposal chute with the
threaded holes in the Span-8 Disposal ALP base (Figure 17-7).
2. Attach the disposal chute to the Span-8 Disposal ALP base using the four screws
supplied (Figure 17-7).
3. Place the Span-8 Disposal ALP in an outside column of the deck. This allows the
slide to extend downward beyond the left or right side of the deck.
4. Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the Span-8 Disposal ALP into the locating
holes on the deck.
5. Fasten the Span-8 Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base
of the Span-8 Disposal ALP (Figure 17-7).
Thumbscrews
Figure 17-7. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews (bottom view)
ALPs User’s Manual
17-12
Span-8 Disposal ALP
6. Attach the slide to the ALP by lowering the upper tabs into the grooves in the
Span-8 Disposal ALP base (Figure 17-8).
Springs
Two springs are
used to secure
the bagging
extension to the
Disposal ALP
base. (The
second spring is
opposite the one
shown here.)
Bagging extension
Upper tabs
Span-8 Disposal ALP slide
Grooves for tabs
Upper tabs slide into
the grooves.
Cutout for
springs
The springs must
snap through to
the inside surface
of the base.
Disposal
chute
Span-8 Disposal
ALP base
Figure 17-8. Attaching the slide to the Span-8 Disposal ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17-13
7. Insert the ground screw through the tab on the back of the slide and into the
threaded hole in the Span-8 Disposal ALP base (Figure 17-9).
Note: This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP.
Bagging
extension
Tab on the Span-8
Disposal ALP slide
Ground screw
for the Span-8
Disposal ALP
Disposal
chute
Ground screw for the
Span-8 Disposal ALP
bagging extension
Grounding tab on the Span-8
Disposal ALP bagging extension
Span-8 Disposal
ALP base
Figure 17-9. Span-8 Disposal ALP - ground screw placement
ALPs User’s Manual
17-14
Span-8 Disposal ALP
CAUTION: Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the
Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span-8 Disposal ALP. Each Disposal
ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP.
8. Snap the bagging extension onto the Span-8 Disposal ALP base by lining up the
springs on the bagging extension with the cutouts on the Disposal ALP base
(Figure 17-9).
9. Apply downward force to the top of the bagging extension. The springs slip
through to the inside of the Disposal ALP base and lock into the cutouts (Figure
17-9).
10. Insert the grounding screw through the hole in the grounding tab on the bagging
extension and into the threaded hole in the Span-8 Disposal ALP base (Figure
17-9).
Note: This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP.
11. Place a trash receptacle at the end of the disposal chute to catch disposed items.
12. Look down through the disposal chute, or drop a test item into the ALP, to make
sure the trash lands in the receptacle. Adjust the placement of the trash receptacle
as required.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.4
17-15
Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on
the Biomek FX
WARNING: To reduce risk of personal injury, operate only with all
protective shields in place.
When components of the Biomek FX instrument are installed so that they extend
beyond the edge of the work table, a protective bottom shield must be installed by the
Beckman Coulter Service Engineer to ensure operator protection on the side
overhanging the table. This protective bottom shield contains a solid blanking plate
and a cutout blanking plate (Figure 17-11).
When the Biomek FX instrument does not extend beyond the edge of the work table,
the solid blanking plate is installed. To accommodate the slide on a Span-8 Disposal
ALP, the solid blanking plate is replaced with the cutout blanking plate. To
accommodate the slides of two Disposal ALPs (Multichannel or Span-8), the solid
blanking plate and cutout blanking plate are removed, leaving an opening for two
slides.
Note: When the Span-8 Disposal ALP is in deck positions R1, R4, L1, and L4, no
modifications to the deck blanking plates are required.
There are eight deck positions available for a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
(Figure 17-10):
•
L1•R1
•
L2•R2
•
L3•R3
•
L4•R4
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
(left positions)
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
(right positions)
L4
L3
L2
L1
R4
R3
R2
R1
Figure 17-10. Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions for a Biomek FX
ALPs User’s Manual
17-16
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.4.1
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L2
When a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L2 on the Biomek FX deck
(Figure 17-10), install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in (Figure 17-11).
4. Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shield. This creates an opening next to L2
for a slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
Solid blanking plate
Blanking plate with
cutout
Rotate this blanking plate
180° front to back as
required to accommodate the
Multichannel Disposal ALP.
L4
Cutout for Span-8
Disposal ALP with
Slide in L1 and L4
positions
L3
L2
L1
Bottom shield
Figure 17-11. Left side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates
17.4.2
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L3
When a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L3 on the Biomek FX deck
(Figure 17-10), orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180° from the one shown in
Figure 17-11.
4. Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shield. This creates an opening next to L3
for a slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.4.3
17-17
Span-8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both L2
and L3
When Span-8 Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both L2 and L3:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate. This creates an opening large enough for two
slides.
17.4.4
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R2
When a Span-8 Disposal ALP with slide is installed in R2 on the Biomek FX deck
(Figure 17-10), orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180° from the one shown in
Figure 17-12.
4. Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield. This creates an
opening next to R2 for the slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
Standoffs
Cutout for Span-8 Disposal
ALP with Slide in R4 position
Solid blanking plate
R4
R3
R2
C
R1
B
A
Fastener locations
Bottom
shield
Cutout for Span-8 Disposal
ALP with Slide in R1 position
Blanking plate
with cutout
Figure 17-12. Right side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates
ALPs User’s Manual
17-18
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.4.5
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R3
When a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in R3 on the Biomek FX deck
(Figure 17-10), orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate.
3. Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in Figure 17-12.
4. Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield. This creates an
opening next to R3 for a slide.
Note: Do not attach both blanking plates. Store the unused blanking plate in an
environmentally-controlled area.
17.4.6
Span-8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both
R2 and R3
When Span-8 Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both R2 and R3:
1. Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate.
2. Remove the solid blanking plate. This creates an opening large enough for two
slides.
17.5
Framing Instructions
No special framing is necessary for the Span-8 Disposal ALP (with or without Slide).
Framing the ALP occurred when the deck was framed with the Shift Deck command.
For more infromation refer to the specific user’s manual for the instrument.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Disposal ALP
17.6
17-19
Removing the Span-8 Disposal ALP without
Slide
WARNING: The waste bag may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
‘safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
To remove the Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide:
1. Remove the rubber band and waste receptacle from the ALP.
2. Dispose of the bag and contents as specified by the safety officer.
3. Loosen the Span-8 Disposal ALP thumbscrews on the base of the Span-8
Disposal ALP.
4. Lift the Span-8 Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the
bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck.
17.6.1
Removing the Bagging Extension
To remove the bagging extension from the Span-8 Disposal ALP:
1. Remove the grounding screw.
2. Grasp the extension firmly with one hand and the base firmly with the other.
3. Pull the bagging extension forcefully from the ALP base to separate the
extension from the base.
4. Store the extension in a clean, dry, dust-free area.
5. Insert the screw back into the threaded hole on the Span-8 Disposal ALP base.
ALPs User’s Manual
17-20
17.7
Span-8 Disposal ALP
Removing a Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To remove the Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide:
1. Verify that no labware remains on the slide. If labware remains on the slide,
remove the labware as specified by the laboratory safety officer.
2. Remove the trash receptacle and dispose of the contents as specified by the
laboratory safety officer.
3. Remove the grounding screw from the bagging extension (Figure 17-9).
4. Grasp the bagging extension firmly with one hand and the base firmly with the
other.
5. Pull the bagging extension forcefully from the ALP base to separate the
extension from the base.
6. Insert the grounding screw back into the threaded hole on the disposal base.
7. Remove the grounding screw from the slide.
8. Lift the slide from the base.
9. Insert the grounding screw back into the threaded hole on the disposal base.
10. Loosen the Span-8 Disposal ALP thumbscrews on the base of the Span-8
Disposal ALP (Figure 17-7).
11. Lift the Span-8 Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the
bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck.
12. To detach the chute, remove the four screws attaching the chute to the disposal
base and remove the chute.
13. Insert the four screws back into the threaded holes in the disposal base.
17.8
Storage
Return the Span-8 Disposal ALPs (with or without Slide) to their original packing
materials and store in a dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Span-8 Disposal ALPs to air-dry before returning
them to their original packing materials.
17.9
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: The Span-8 Disposal ALP may be contaminated. Follow the
appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory
safety officer.
To clean, wipe all surfaces on the Span-8 Disposal ALP with a soft cloth.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
18-1
18 Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18.1
Overview
The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is a passive ALP. The eight cleaning wells of the Span-8
Tip Wash ALP (Figure 18-1) are used to wash fixed tips on the probes of a Span-8
Pod during a step in a method while the reservoir side of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is
used to dispose of system fluid used when priming the system and purging the tubing
and syringes of air. The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP can be placed in half of any deck
position and it can be oriented with its eight cleaning wells on the left or right side of
the ALP.
The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP utilizes a flow of system fluid from the off-deck supply
container as the wash fluid. The system fluid is pumped through the Biomek
instrument and into the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP in one of two ways:
•
The pumps of the Biomek FX instrument syphon fluid from the off-deck
supply container (refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory Automation
Workstation User’s Manual, Chapter 3.5.3, Supply Container) to the probes
of the Span-8 Pod. The pumps actuate to dispense the system fluid through
the tips and into the wash station.
OR
•
The Speed Pump, (refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory Automation
Workstation User’s Manual, Chapter 3.6, Speed Pump), with the pump
valves bypassed, accelerates the speed of the system fluid as it passes
through the tubing and is dispensed from the tips into the Span-8 Tip Wash
ALP. The volume of fluid passing through the tips cleans the inside surfaces
of the tips, while the increased speed of the wash fluid raises the fluid level
in the eight cleaning wells of the ALP to a height sufficient to clean the
outside of the tips positioned in the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP.
Used wash fluid drains from the ALP via a tube connected to the waste port and
terminating in an off-deck waste container (refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory
Automation Workstation User’s Manual, Chapter 3.5.4, Waste Container) via a
gravity-fed drainage tube.
ALPs User’s Manual
18-2
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP (Section 18.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 18.3)
•
Removing the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP (Section 18.4)
•
Storage (Section 18.5)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 18.6)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 18.7)
Reservoir
Eight cleaning wells
Eight framing
points
Waste port
Phillips mounting screw
Figure 18-1. Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18.2
18-3
Installing the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
Installing a Span-8 Tip Wash ALP includes choosing the deck position and mounting
the ALP to the deck.
18.2.1
Deck Positions for the Span-8 Tip Wash
ALP
The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP occupies 1/2 of any deck position, including the 1/2 ALP
positions located between the two outside columns of the Biomek deck. The Span-8
Tip Wash ALP can also occupy the remaining 1/2 ALP position that occurs when a
Test Tube Rack ALP is installed on the Biomek deck (refer to Chapter 22, Test Tube
Rack ALPs).
If a Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is required for a single-pod Biomek FX Instrument, the
ALP can be installed on either half of an unoccupied deck position. The eight
cleaning wells can be oriented to the left or right side of the ALP (Figure 18-1).
When the dual-pod Biomek FX instrument has one Multichannel Pod and one Span-8
Pod, it must be installed so the ALP is accessible to the Span-8 Pod without
interfering with the other pod. More specifically, if the Span-8 Pod is Pod1 (left arm),
the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP must be mounted on the left half of a deck position, with
the eight cleaning wells on the left side of the ALP.
Note: The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP must be positioned on the Span-8 side of the deck.
Note: If different types of waste materials must be disposed of separately, two Span8 Tip Wash ALPs may be installed on the deck.
Note: When the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is placed on the left side of a Biomek deck
position, the ALP is referred to as the Span-8WashLeft. When the Span-8 Tip Wash
ALP is placed on the right side of a Biomek FX deck position, it is referred to as the
Span-8WashRight.
After a deck position on which to physically mount the ALP has been chosen,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
ALPs User’s Manual
18-4
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18.2.2
Mounting the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP to the
Deck
WARNING: Do not kink the drainage hose.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
To install the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP:
1. Position the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP so the locating pin on the bottom of the ALP
slips into a locating hole on the deck.
2. Fasten the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP to the deck using the Phillips mounting screw
located on the base of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP (Figure 18-1).
3. Place the waste container under the lab bench or in an accessible space lower
than the Biomek instrument height.
4. Attach the drainage tube to the waste port on the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP (Figure
18-1).
5. Run the opposite end of the drainage tube to the waste container by passing the
tube through either the access holes between the towers at the back of the
instrument, or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the Biomek
instrument.
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument or the light curtain.
6. Cut the drainage tube to the appropriate length to ensure there is no excess that
could cause a ‘rise’ or ‘bump’ in the drainage tubes route from the Span-8 Tip
Wash ALP to the waste container.
Note: Since the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is gravity fed, it is crucial that the
drainage tube run down-hill without any rises between the ALP and the waste
container.
7. Ensure that the supply container contains the desired system (cleaning) fluid.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18.3
18-5
Framing Instructions
Special framing instructions using Manual Teach are necessary for the Span-8 Tip
Wash ALP to ensure that the tips and probes on the Span-8 Pod access the eight
cleaning wells of the ALP without causing any damage to the tips, probes, pod, or
ALP. Since the eight cleaning wells of the ALP are relatively small, it is crucial that
the tips on the probes be framed as accurately as possible. Manual Teach is accessed
through Position Properties in the Deck Editor.
To frame the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP:
1. Open the Biomek FX Software by selecting Start>Programs>Beckman
Coulter>Biomek.
2. Choose Instrument>Deck Editor. The Deck Editor appears.
3. Add a Span-8 Tip Wash ALP to the deck by selecting either Span8WashRight
or Span8WashLeft from the list of available devices and dragging it to the
appropriate deck position.
4. Open Position Properties for the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP by double-clicking in
the area outlined in the center of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP. Position Properties
appear (Figure 18-2).
Note: Two different sets of properties can appear when double-clicking on the
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP: Position Properties and ALP Properties. Position
Properties is used to manually frame the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP. To open
Position Properties, double-click in the area outlined in the center of the Span-8
Tip Wash ALP. A pink outline appears around the ‘W’ in the center of the ALP
when Position Properties are being configured. (When configuring ALP
Properties, a yellow outline appears around the ‘W’, a pink outline appears
around the entire ALP position, and ALP Properties appears.)
Figure 18-2. Position Properties for the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
5. In Name, verify that the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is assigned a unique name.
Note: The software automatically assigns a name beginning with a ‘W’ and
followed by a number; for example, ‘W1’ and ‘W2’.
6. In Pod, select the Span-8 Pod used to frame the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP.
ALPs User’s Manual
18-6
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
7. Choose Manual Teach. Manual Teaching opens with a Warning
(Figure 18-3).
Note: On the left side of Manual Teaching, a list of steps required to complete
the teaching process are displayed. As the steps of Manual Teaching are
accessed, they are highlighted on the left.
Figure 18-3. Manual Teaching (Warning)
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18-7
8. Choose Next. Manual Teaching appears (Figure 18-4)
Current deck display
Figure 18-4. Manual Teaching (Setup)
9. If disposable tip mandrels are installed, in Load tips from the, verify that the
appropriate tips are selected.
10. In tipbox on position, select the deck position containing the tipbox by selecting
that position in the Current Deck Display.
ALPs User’s Manual
18-8
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
11. Choose Next. Manual Teaching appears (Figure 18-5).
Graphic alignment tool
The graphic alignment tool is a visual representation of the tip
(small circle) and the framing points (large circle). The small
circle is moved until it represents the tips position in relation to
the framing points on the ALP.
Delta value
The magnitude of change applied to the tips each
time a directional button is selected, or when the
graphic alignment tool is manipulated.
Directional
buttons
The directional
buttons move
the pod by the
amount shown
in Delta with
each press of a
button.
Total Move From Start (cm)
Each time a directional button is
selected, the pod moves by the amount
shown in Delta. The total amount
moved in each direction is displayed in
Total Moved From Start (cm).
Hysteresis compensation
Leave Hysteresis compensation at the default setting of On. This
compensates for any variance along the X-axis from the front of the
bridge to the back of the bridge. The Biomek instrument determines a
pods position in the X-axis based on the position of the bridge at the
back of the Biomek instrument.
Figure 18-5. Manual Teaching (Teach X,Y)
12. To align the tips in the X- and Y-axes with the white framing points on top of the
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP (Figure 18-1), lower the tips in the Z-axis until they are
approximately 1 cm above the top of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP.
Note: Tip height of the pod is set in the next step in the Manual Teaching
process; therefore, move the pod to any height while manipulating tip alignment
with the white framing points.
13. Visually verify the physical position of the tips in relation to the physical position
of the white framing points on top of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18-9
14. In Delta, select the magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a
directional button is selected (Figure 18-5).
Note: The default Delta value is 0.05 cm. If the tips are a considerable distance
from the desired location, increase the distance traveled by increasing the Delta
value (maximum setting is 1.0 cm). If the tips are almost to the desired location,
reduce the Delta value to fine-tune the position (minimum setting is 0.005 cm).
15. Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically
move the tip into position over the white framing points on the Span-8 Tip Wash
ALP (Figure 18-5).
Note: The directional keys on the numeric keypad can also be used to
physically position the tips over the wells of the microplate. The directional
buttons displayed in the software parallel the keys on the numeric keypad. More
specifically, the Fwd. directional button correlates to the ‘1’ on the numeric
keypad, while Down is found on the ‘2’, Left is found on the ‘4’, Right on ‘6’,
Up on ‘8’, and Back on ‘9’.
Note: Each time a directional button is selected, the pod and tips move the
distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction.
OR
Using the graphic alignment tool, Drag the center (small) circle until it
represents the tips physical position in relation to the white framing points on the
ALP.
Note: The large circle represents the position of the white framing points on the
top of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP, while the small circle represents the position of
the tips on the Span-8 Pod. The objective is to provide the software with a
representation of the tips position in relation to the white framing points on the
ALP. The software uses this graphical representation and the Delta value to
know approximately how far in any direction the tips must move.
16. Select Go. The Span-8 Pod moves in accordance to the Delta value and the
position of the small circle in relation to the large circle.
Note: When the move is completed, the small circle resets itself to the center of
the large circle. The values displayed in Total Moved from Start (cm) changes
each time steps 11 thru 16 are completed. If desired, the values in Total Moved
from Start (cm) can be reset to zero by selecting Reset.
17. Visually verify the position of the tips on the Biomek instrument in relation to the
white framing points on the top of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP. If the tips are still
not physically positioned above the white framing points, repeat steps 13 through
16 until they are positioned above the white framing points.
ALPs User’s Manual
18-10
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18. Choose Next. Manual Teaching (Teach Z) appears (Figure 18-6).
Delta value
The magnitude of change applied to the tips each
time a directional button is selected.
Directional
buttons
The directional
buttons move
the pod by the
amount shown
in Delta with
each press of a
button.
Total Move From Start (cm)
Each time a directional button is
selected, the pod moves by the
amount shown in Delta. The total
amount moved in each direction
is displayed in Total Moved
From Start (cm).
Hysteresis compensation
Leave Hysteresis compensation at
the default setting of Off. It is not
necessary to compensate for hysteresis
in the Z axis.
Figure 18-6. Manual Teaching (Teach Z)
19. In Delta, select the magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a
directional button is selected (Figure 18-6).
Note: The default Delta value is 0.05 cm. If the tips are a considerable distance
above the ALP, increase the distance traveled by increasing the Delta value
(maximum setting is 1.0 cm). If the tips are almost to the desired location, reduce
the Delta value (minimum setting is 0.005 cm).
20. Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically move
the tip into position over the white framing points on the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP.
Note: Each time a directional button is selected, the pod and tips move the
distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction.
21. Select Finish. The Span-8 Pod moves in accordance to the Delta value, Manual
Teaching closes, and Position Properties (Figure 18-2) appears.
22. Choose OK to close Position Properties.
23. Choose Save to close the Deck Editor. The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is framed.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
18.4
18-11
Removing the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
WARNING: Always wear protective gloves when draining the Span-8 Tip
Wash ALP of fluid.
WARNING: The waste fluid may be contaminated. Follow the appropriate
disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety
officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
CAUTION: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
CAUTION: SPILL HAZARD.
To remove the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP:
1. Turn the waste port on the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP up so that no fluid from the
ALP leaks onto the deck.
2. Detach the drainage tube from the waste port.
3. Raise the drainage tube until the fluid in the tube drains into the waste container.
4. Remove the tubing from the Biomek instrument deck and the waste container.
5. Loosen the Phillips screws on the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP base from the deck.
6. Remove the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP from the deck by lifting until the locating pin
clears the locating hole on the deck.
WARNING: Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer to dispose of the fluid. The cleaning wells and
reservoir of the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals
and fluids.
7. Carefully empty the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP of fluids by turning the ALP over and
pouring the waste into an approved waste container.
ALPs User’s Manual
18-12
18.5
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
Storage
Return the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry,
dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: Allow the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP to air-dry before returning it to the original
packing materials.
18.6
Preventive Maintenance
Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety
officer. Also, periodically clean the Span-8 Tip Wash ALP by filling the supply
container with a bleach solution and running it through the ALP.
18.7
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
Table 18-1. Troubleshooting the Tip Wash ALP
IF
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
THEN
The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is not
functioning correctly
Make sure that the hoses and cables
are properly attached and routed to
the Tip Wash ALP.
The Span-8 Tip Wash ALP is not
draining waste fluid
Look into the wells and reservoir and
verify they are not clogged.
19-1
19 Standard Passive ALPs
19.1
Overview
Standard Passive ALPs are open structures that hold labware on the deck during
liquid-handling procedures. These ALPs can be mounted on any deck position, and
ensure that labware is accessible by the pod at a predetermined height.
Standard Passive ALPs are also used as a base for many active ALPs, such as the
Stirring ALP. Certain active ALPs are secured to the Standard Passive ALP stand,
mounted on the appropriate deck position, and configured in the Deck Editor.
Standard Passive ALPs include:
•
1 x 1 Passive ALP (refer to Section 19.1.1, 1 x 1 Passive ALP)
Note: A 1 x 1 Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option is also available (refer
to Section 19.1.1.1, 1 x 1 Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option).
•
1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides (refer to Section 19.1.2, 1 x 1 Passive
ALP with Indented Sides)
Note: The 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides is placed on the deck
next to an SPE Collar Stand with an SPE Collar to preserve a deck position.
The indented sides allow enough clearance for the gripper to extend and
move the SPE Collar without hitting the ALP.
•
1 x 3 Passive ALP (refer to Section 19.1.3, 1 x 3 Passive ALP)
•
1 x 5 Passive ALP (refer to Section 19.1.4, 1 x 5 Passive ALP)
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing Standard Passive ALPs (Section 19.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 19.3)
•
Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the Deck (Section 19.4)
•
Storage (Section 19.5)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 19.6)
ALPs User’s Manual
19-2
Standard Passive ALPs
19.1.1
1 x 1 Passive ALP
A 1 x 1 Passive ALP occupies one position on the deck and holds one piece of
labware (Figure 19-1).
Note: Labware positioned on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP is gripper accessible and
stackable.
1 x 1 ALP
labware position
Thumbscrews
Figure 19-1. 1 x 1 Passive ALP
Note: The 1 x 1 Passive ALP supports an LLS plate option which improves liquid
level sensing and clot detection capabilities in labware positioned on the ALP (refer
to Section 19.1.1.1, 1 x 1 Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Standard Passive ALPs
19.1.1.1
19-3
1 x 1 Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option
The 1 x 1 Passive ALP stand supports a Liquid Level Sensing (LLS) plate option
(Figure 19-2) which when installed improves liquid level sensing capabilities in
labware positioned on the 1 x 1 Passive ALP.
¾
NX-S8 — The LLS plate option also improves clot dectection capabilities.
Note: Labware positioned on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the LLS plate option
installed is gripper accessible and stackable.
LLS plate mounting
screw holes
Four mounting screws are
used to secure the LLS
Plate to the 1 x 1 ALP.
(There are two more
screw holes on the
opposite side.)
Figure 19-2. LLS Plate (Top View)
ALPs User’s Manual
19-4
Standard Passive ALPs
19.1.1.1.1
Installing the LLS Plate Option on a 1 x 1
Passive ALP
To install the LLS plate, complete the following:
1. Turn a 1 x 1 Passive ALP upside down.
2. Position the LLS plate upside down in the center of the 1 x 1 Passive ALP stand
(Figure 19-3).
Bottom of 1 x 1
Passive ALP
LLS plate mounting
screws
Bottom of
LLS plate
Top of 1 x 1 Passive ALP
Figure 19-3. Installing an LLS Plate on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Standard Passive ALPs
19-5
3. Attach the LLS plate to the 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the four mounting screws
provided by turning the screws clockwise. The LLS plate is now installed (Figure
19-4).
1 x 1 ALP with LLS plate
option installed
Labware rests on top of the
LLS plate.
Installed LLS plate
Figure 19-4. 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the LLS plate option installed
ALPs User’s Manual
19-6
Standard Passive ALPs
19.1.2
1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides
The 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides occupies one deck position and is placed
on the deck next to an SPE Collar Stand with an SPE Collar. Since the gripper fingers
must open wide enough to grip the SPE Collar and would hit the adjacent ALP, the
position would be lost without using the 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides. This
ALP allows enough clearance for the gripper to extend and move the SPE Collar
without hitting it.
Indented sides
Thumbscrews
Figure 19-5. 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Standard Passive ALPs
19.1.3
19-7
1 x 3 Passive ALP
A 1 x 3 Passive ALP occupies three positions on the deck and holds up to three pieces
of labware in one column (Figure 19-6).
Note: Labware positioned on the 1 x 3 Passive ALP is gripper accessible and
stackable.
1 x 3 ALP
Labware positions
Thumbscrews
Two thumbscrews are used to
secure the 1 x 3 ALP to the deck.
Figure 19-6. 1 x 3 Passive ALP
ALPs User’s Manual
19-8
Standard Passive ALPs
19.1.4
1 x 5 Passive ALP
A 1 x 5 Passive ALP occupies one column on the Biomek FX deck and holds up to
five pieces of labware (Figure 19-7).
Note: Labware positioned on the 1 x 5 Passive ALP is not gripper accessible or
stackable.
1 x 5 ALP
Labware positions
Thumbscrews
Two thumbscrews are used to secure
the 1 x 5 ALP to the deck.
Figure 19-7. 1 x 5 Passive ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Standard Passive ALPs
19.2
19-9
Installing Standard Passive ALPs
Installing Standard Passive ALPs to the deck includes choosing the deck position and
mounting the ALP to the deck.
19.2.1
Choosing a Deck Position
Use the Deck Editor to determine where the ALP may be mounted on the deck.
Positions capable of supporting the ALP are indicated by dashed lines.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
19.2.2
Mounting Standard Passive ALPs to the
Deck
To mount Standard Passive ALPs to the deck:
1. Choose an appropriate deck location to mount the ALP to the deck (refer to
Section 19.2.1, Choosing a Deck Position).
2. Position the ALP on the appropriate deck location so the locating pins on the
bottom of the ALP slip into the locating holes on the deck.
Note: Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning Standard Passive
ALPs on the deck.
3. Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Standard
Passive ALP.
19.3
Framing Instructions
Frame the Standard Passive ALPs according to the instructions in the specific user’s
manual for the instrument.
19.4
Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the
Deck
To remove Standard Passive ALPs from the deck:
1. Remove labware from the ALP manually or through a Biomek method.
2. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Standard Passive ALP.
3. Lift the ALP straight up from the deck until the locating pins are clear of the
locating holes.
ALPs User’s Manual
19-10
19.5
Standard Passive ALPs
Storage
Return Standard Passive ALPs to their original packing materials and store in a dry,
dust-free, environmentally-controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Standard Passive ALPs to air-dry before returning
them to the original packing materials.
19.6
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: Standard Passive ALPs may be contaminated from method
solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined
by the laboratory safety officer.
To clean, wipe all surfaces on the Standard Passive ALPs with a soft cloth.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
20-1
20 Stirring ALP
20.1
Overview
The Stirring ALP is an active ALP that stirs liquids in a reservoir at an adjustable
speed (Figure 20-1). To create the stirring and mixing motion, a caplet-shaped Tefloncoated stir bar (Figure 20-2) is placed in the reservoir. The stir bar follows the
movements of a motor-powered magnet located in the base of the ALP. The stirring
motion occurs as the stir bar ramps up from a resting (still) state to the configured
speed, then ramps back down to a resting state when stirring is completed.
CAUTION: The Stirring ALP continues to stir during a light curtain
violation even though the method stops.
The Device Action step is used to configure the Stirring ALP (refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Chapter 22.6, Device Action Step).
It is possible to pipette from a reservoir on the Stirring ALP. The pipetting operation
can occur while the stir bar continues stirring or when the stirring motion has stopped.
The pipetting option is also configured with the Device Action step.
Note: When setting the height for pipetting operations, the presence of the stir bar
must be taken into consideration. Pipetting operations that do not account for the
height of the stir bar could damage the tips.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Stirring ALP (Section 20.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 20.3)
•
Using the Stirring ALP in a Method (Section 20.4)
•
Controlling the Stirring ALP Outside a Method (Section 20.5)
•
Removing the Stirring ALP (Section 20.6)
•
Storage (Section 20.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 20.8)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 20.9)
ALPs User’s Manual
20-2
Stirring ALP
Figure 20-1. Stirring ALP (side view)
Figure 20-2. Stir bar
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Stirring ALP
20.2
20-3
Installing the Stirring ALP
Installing the Stirring ALP includes choosing any standard deck position on the deck
and mounting the ALP to the deck.
20.2.1
Mounting the Stirring ALP to the Deck
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
To mount the Stirring ALP:
1. Turn off power to main unit before mounting any ALP.
2. Position the Stirring ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into
locating holes on the deck.
3. Fasten the Stirring ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the ALP.
CAUTION: A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain
of ALPs. If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain, CAN
communication errors may occur.
4. Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male CAN Port on
the Stirring ALP.
Note: When possible, short CAN cables should be used when connecting
devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument.
5. Plug the other end of the CAN cable into one of the following connectors:
Note: Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek FX.
•
Any female connector labeled “CAN Port” on the main Biomek unit
•
Any available female connector labeled “CAN Port” on another Active
ALP, creating a ‘chain’ of connected cables
Note: A ‘chain’ allows multiple devices to be linked together. The
maximum number of devices that can be chained together is three. The
chain must plug into the main Biomek unit at some point.
6. Verify the address switch ADR1 is set to ‘2.’
ALPs User’s Manual
20-4
Stirring ALP
7. If multiple Stirring ALPs are on the deck, change ADR2 to a unique address
between zero (0) and F.
Note: ADR2 is set to a default address of zero (0). If only one Stirring ALP is
on the deck, ADR2 should be left at the default setting.
8. Place a reservoir on the ALP.
9. Carefully load the liquid into the reservoir.
10. Carefully place the stir bar in the center of the reservoir.
Note: When placed into the center of the reservoir correctly, the stir bar selfaligns.
11. Set the stirring speed and ramp time in the software (refer to Section 20.4, Using
the Stirring ALP in a Method). The stir bar ramps up from a resting (still) state to
the set speed, and ramps back down when stirring is completed.
20.3
Framing Instructions
Frame the Stirring ALP according to the instructions in the specific user’s manual for
the instrument.
20.4
Using the Stirring ALP in a Method
CAUTION: Adjust the stirring speed using the software. Set the stirring
speed only as high as absolutely necessary to avoid splashing.
WARNING: Setting the stirring speed too high, or setting the speed too
high with an inadequate amount of liquid in the reservoir, or ramping the
stirring speed up too fast in a high viscosity liquid may force the stir bar
off center. The stir bar would then have to be reset to the center
position.
To use the Stirring ALP in a method, it must be installed in Hardware Setup For
more information, refer to the specific user’s manual for the instrument.
Note: Configuration in Hardware Setup is not necessary for the Stirring ALP.
The Stirring ALP is controlled and operated through the Device Action step in
Biomek Software (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Chapter 22.6.1.10,
Configuring the Device Action Step for the Stirring ALP (FX, NX only)). The speed,
stirring time, and ramp time are all configured through the Device Action step for use
in a method.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Stirring ALP
20.5
20-5
Controlling the Stirring ALP Outside a Method
To control the Stirring ALP outside a method, use Advanced Manual Control to:
•
Turn on the Stirring ALP at a particular speed.
•
Turn off the Stirring ALP.
To turn on or adjust the speed of a Stirring ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Stirrer ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the selected
Stirring ALP appears (Figure 20-3).
Figure 20-3. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Stirring ALP
4. From Command, choose Stir.
5. Enter a percentage in Stirring speed.
Note: The allowed minimum percentage is 1 and the allowed maximum
percentage is 100.
6. Enter a time in seconds in Time to reach full speed.
7. Choose Yes or No in Stop for pipetting?
8. Choose Go.
9. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
10. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
ALPs User’s Manual
20-6
Stirring ALP
To turn off a Stirring ALP:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Stirrer ALP. Advanced Manual Control for the selected
Stirring ALP appears (Figure 20-3).
4. From Command, choose Off.
5. Choose Go.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
20.6
Removing the Stirring ALP
CAUTION: The reservoir and stir bar may be contaminated following
use. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
To remove the ALP:
1. Turn off power to main unit before removing the Stirring ALP.
2. Carefully remove the reservoir from the Stirring ALP, being careful not to spill
any residual liquid.
3. Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Stirring ALP.
4. Loosen the mounting screws.
5. Lift the Stirring ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the
locating holes on the deck.
20.7
Storage
CAUTION: Clean the reservoir before storing or filling with another
substance.
Return the Stirring ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry, dust-free,
environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Stirring ALP to air-dry before returning it to the
original packing materials.
20.8
Preventive Maintenance
Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Stirring ALP
20.9
20-7
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
Table 20-1. Troubleshooting the Stirring ALP
IF
The Stirring ALP does not stir
THEN
Turn off power to main unit.
Check the electrical connection at the
Biomek instrument and the Stirring
ALP. If the ALP is connected in a
chain, check all connections in the
chain. Retry functionality.
Check rotary address dial.
Contact a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
The Stirring ALP is not powering up
Contact a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer.
The Stirring ALP is not functioning
correctly
Contact a Beckman Service Engineer.
Note: Do not remove the cover(s)
for any reason.
ALPs User’s Manual
21-1
21 Storage ALPs (FX-only)
21.1
Overview
Storage ALPs allow three extra storage positions on the Biomek FX deck.
Storage ALPs are Standard 1 x 1 or 1 x 3 Passive ALPs that are positioned partially
off the left side of a Biomek FX deck using deck positions available through the
Storage ALP installation. Once the Standard Passive ALPs are installed on these deck
positions, they are considered Storage ALPs and can be used only for storing labware;
they are not available for pipetting. However, the extra space available on the deck
using Storage ALPs allows other ALPs to be added.
To move labware to and from a Storage ALP, a Storage ALP Move step must be
used (refer to Section 21.4, Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step).
Note: When the Storage ALP installation is run, the Storage ALP deck positions in
the Deck Editor and Storage ALP Move step are available.
Storage ALPs are installed, removed, stored, and preventively maintained like
Standard Passive ALPs. Use the following information from the Standard Passive
ALPs chapter:
•
Installing Standard Passive ALPs (Section 19.2)
Note: Ensure the correct deck plate holes on the deck are used to
allow the Storage ALP to be partially positioned off the left side.
•
Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the Deck (Section 19.4)
•
Storage (Section 19.5)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 19.6)
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Configuring Storage ALPs in the Deck Editor (Section 21.2)
•
Framing Storage ALPs (Section 21.3)
•
Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step (Section 21.4)
ALPs User’s Manual
21-2
21.2
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
Configuring Storage ALPs in the Deck Editor
Before Storage ALPs can be used in a method, Biomek Software must know the
location of the ALPs on the deck. The software representation of the instrument deck
is configured in the Deck Editor.
Configuring the Deck Editor to use a Storage ALP includes:
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
•
Adding a Storage ALP to the Deck (Section 21.2.1)
•
Setting Storage ALP Position Properties (Section 21.2.2)
•
Adding Other ALPs to the Deck (Section 21.2.3)
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
21.2.1
21-3
Adding a Storage ALP to the Deck
A new Storage ALP is added to the deck using the Deck Editor. The new deck
position is named automatically when a Storage ALP is added to the deck.
To add an Storage ALP to the deck:
1. From the Instrument menu, select Deck Editor. Deck Editor appears.
2. Click and hold the mouse button on OneByOneStorage in the ALP Types
List. The Deck Editor interface moves slightly to the right to indicate the
positions on the left of the deck capable of supporting the 1 x 1 Storage ALP
(Figure 21-1).
OR
Click and hold the mouse button on OneByThreeStorage in the ALP Types
List. The Deck Editor interface moves slightly to the right to indicate the
positions on the left of the deck capable of supporting the 1 x 3 Storage ALP
(Figure 21-2).
ALP Types List
Dashed lines indicate where the 1 x 1 Storage
ALP can be placed on the Biomek FX deck.
Figure 21-1. 1x1 Storage ALP deck positions on a Biomek FX deck
ALPs User’s Manual
21-4
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
ALP Types List
Dashed lines indicate where the 1 x 3 Storage
ALP can be placed on the Biomek FX deck.
Figure 21-2. 1 x 3 Storage ALP deck position on a Biomek FX
3. Drag and drop OneByOneStorage or OnebyThreeStorage from the ALP
Types List to one or more of the dashed locations on the deck. The Storage ALP
appears and the deck position is named automatically.
Note: Attempting to place a Storage ALP in a location where another ALP
resides results in a Warning (Figure 21-3). Choose No and delete the currently
placed ALP(s) before placing the Storage ALP on the deck. For more
information, refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Section 5.4.1, Deleting
ALPs and Deck Positions from a Deck.
Figure 21-3. Warning indicating that an ALP is about
to be placed in a position overlapping another ALP
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
21.2.2
21-5
Setting Storage ALP Position Properties
After an Storage ALP is placed on the deck, the deck position properties must be set.
Position Properties include position Name and Per-labware Offsets, which
customize the offsets for specific types of labware.
To set deck position properties:
1. Select the desired Storage ALP deck position on the Deck View of the Deck
Editor. The selected position is highlighted with a pink border.
2. Select Properties from the Deck Editor toolbar.
OR
Double-click on the Storage ALP deck position.
OR
Right-click on the Storage ALP deck position and select Properties from the
menu. Position Properties appears (Figure 21-4).
Figure 21-4. Position Properties for a 1 x 3 Storage ALP
3. In Name, rename the deck position, if desired.
4. Specify the X, Y, and Z Coordinates of the position in relation to the pod’s
home position by teaching the ALP (refer to Section 21.3, Framing Storage
ALPs).
5. Select More>> to display device association and labware offset options
(Figure 21-5).
ALPs User’s Manual
21-6
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
Figure 21-5. Position Properties after More is chosen
6. If desired, choose Per-labware Offsets to customize the offsets for specific
types of labware (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual, Section 5.4.3.3,
Changing Per-Labware Offsets).
7. If necessary, adjust the Min Safe Height (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Section 5.4.3, Setting ALP Properties and Deck Positions).
8. Choose OK to save the position properties and return to the Deck Editor.
9. Choose Save to save changes to save the new deck configuration and close the
editor.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
21.2.3
21-7
Adding Other ALPs to the Deck
Since the Storage ALPs are positioned partially off the left side of the deck, space
becomes available for three additional ALPs. Once the deck has been configured for
the Storage ALPs, drag and drop other ALPs from the ALP list to the available
positions.
Figure 21-6 displays a deck with three Storage ALPs and three Standard 1 x 1 ALPs
positioned in the available deck space.
Three 1 x 1 Storage ALPs
added to the deck
Three Standard 1 x 1 ALPs
added to the deck
Figure 21-6. Three 1 x 1 Storage ALPs and three Standard 1 x 1 ALPs
added to a Biomek FX deck
ALPs User’s Manual
21-8
21.3
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
Framing Storage ALPs
Storage ALPs are framed using the AccuFrame and the red Framing Adaptor
(Figure 21-7).
To frame a Storage ALP:
1. Gently mount the Accuframe on the red Framing Adaptor provided with the
integration (refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User’s
Manual, Section 5.2.3, Installing AccuFrame).
Figure 21-7. Framing Adaptor
2. Frame the Storage ALP Position with the Multichannel Pod according to the
instructions in the hardware manual (refer to the Biomek® FX Laboratory
Automation Workstation User’s Manual, Section 5.2.4, Framing the Position).
Adaptor Warning appears (Figure 21-8).
Figure 21-8. Adaptor Warning
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
21-9
3. Ensure the instructions are followed on the Adaptor Warning and choose OK.
Teaching Instructions appears (Figure 21-9).
Figure 21-9. Teaching Instructions
4. Choose Shift ALP.
5. Choose OK. Position Properties appears again, and the Storage ALP is framed
with the Multichannel Pod.
6. Choose OK to close Position Properties.
7. Choose Save to close the Deck Editor.
ALPs User’s Manual
21-10
21.4
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step
The Storage ALP Move step is used to move labware to and from the Storage ALPs.
This step is available on the Integrated Devices step palette when the Storage ALPs
are installed (Figure 21-10).
Note: If the Storage ALP Move step is accidentally deleted from the Integrated
Devices step palette, the Storage ALP installation must be reinstalled.
Integrated Devices Step Palette
The Storage ALP Move step appears
here, along with steps for any other
integrated devices on the workstation.
Figure 21-10. Integrated Devices step palette
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
21-11
To configure the Storage ALP Move step:
1. To insert a Storage ALP Move step into a method, drag and drop Storage
ALP Move from the Integrated Devices step palette to the Method View
(Figure 21-11).
Figure 21-11. Storage ALP Move step inserted into the Method View
2. In Using Pod, select the pod to move the labware.
Note: In Using Pod, Pod1 is the default on a single-pod Biomek FX
instrument and the only pod capable of moving labware on or off the Storage
ALPs.
3. In Move labware from, select the position where labware desired to move is
located.
4. In to, select the desired position where the selected labware will be moved.
5. The In Move labware from, select the position where labware desired to move
is located.
6. In to, select the desired position where the selected labware will be moved.
Note: Storage ALP position must be chosen in either Move labware
from or to; this step is used only to move labware to or from the Storage
ALP.
ALPs User’s Manual
21-12
Storage ALPs (FX-only)
7. Select the desired option for moving stacked labware:
•
Move the entire stack of labware — moves all labware in the
stack; this option should be selected when moving a single unstacked
piece of labware.
•
Move stack, leaving the bottom piece of labware at the
source position — moves all labware in the stack except for the
bottom piece.
Note: Selecting Move stack, leaving the bottom piece of
labware at the source position when the source deck
position contains only one piece of labware results in an error.
•
Move the topmost. . .piece(s) of labware from the stack —
moves only the specified number of labware from the top of the stack.
Advanced Controls (Figure 21-12) may be selected to change the offset values for
the Storage ALP Move step; however, consult with Beckman Coulter Customer
Support before changing the values in Advanced Controls.
Figure 21-12. Storage ALP Move with Advanced Controls selected
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
22-1
22 Test Tube Rack ALPs
22.1
Overview
Test Tube Rack ALPs are open-structured passive ALPs that hold test tube racks or
septum piercing tube racks on the Biomek deck during liquid-handling procedures.
Test Tube Rack ALPs ensure that test tubes are accessible by a Span-8 Pod at a
predetermined height.
Test Tube Rack ALPs come in two sizes:
•
1 x 2 — holds up to two racks of test tubes
•
1 x 3 — holds up to three racks of test tubes
Both the 1 x 2 and 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALPs can be positioned with the overhang on
the left or right of the ALP. When the overhang is to the left of the ALP, the ALP is
left facing (Figure 22-1). Conversely, when the overhang is to the right, the ALP is
right facing (Figure 22-2).
Test Tube Rack ALPs are mounted in specific deck positions based on the overhangs
left or right orientation (refer to 22.2.1, Selecting the Deck Positions for a Test Tube
Rack ALP.
CAUTION: Different sizes of test tubes must not be mixed in one test
tube rack. To avoid a collision between the pod and Test Tube Rack ALP,
all of the test tubes in the Test Tube Rack must be a uniform height.
Note: Biomek Software assumes a Test Tube Rack contains one size and type of test
tube, not a combination of test tube sizes and types.
Test Tube Rack ALPs support four sizes of Beckman Coulter test tube racks:
•
10 mm (x75 mm)
•
12 mm (x75 mm)
•
13 mm (x100 mm)
•
15.5 mm (x100 mm)
The NX-S8 also supports two sizes of Beckman Coulter septum piercing tube racks:
•
13 mm (x100 mm)
•
15.5 mm (x100 mm)
ALPs User’s Manual
22-2
Test Tube Rack ALPs
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing Test Tube Rack ALPs (Section 22.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 22.3)
•
Adding Test Tube Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs (Section 22.4)
•
Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs (NXS8 only) (Section 22.5)
•
Removing Test Tube Rack ALPs from the Deck (Section 22.6)
•
Storage (Section 22.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 22.8)
22.1.1
1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP
A 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (Figure 22-1) can hold up to two racks of test tubes. Test
tubes and test tube racks are not gripper accessible or stackable.
1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP
(left facing)
Labware positions.
Thumbscrew
Two thumbscrews are used to
secure the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack
ALP to the deck. (There is
another thumbscrew on the
corner diagonal to the one
shown here.)
Overhang
Figure 22-1. 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing)
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
22.1.2
22-3
1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP
A 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (Figure 22-2) holds up to three racks of test tubes. Test
tubes and test tube racks are not gripper accessible or stackable.
1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP
(Right facing)
Labware positions.
Overhang
Thumb screw
Figure 22-2. 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (right facing)
ALPs User’s Manual
22-4
22.2
Test Tube Rack ALPs
Installing Test Tube Rack ALPs
Installing Test Tube Rack ALPs includes:
•
Selecting the Deck Positions for a Test Tube Rack ALP (Section 22.2.1).
•
Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck (Section 22.2.2).
After installing the Test Tube Rack ALP, test tube racks must be added properly to the
Test Tube Rack ALP to use them in a method (refer to Section 22.4, Adding Test Tube
Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs).
¾
NX-S8 — Septum piercing test tube racks may also be used with Test Tube
Rack ALPs (refer to Section 22.5, Adding and Removing Septum Piercing
Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs (NX-S8 only)).
22.2.1
Selecting the Deck Positions for a Test
Tube Rack ALP
Each Test Tube Rack ALP occupies 1½ columns on the deck, although the size of the
ALP dictates whether it uses three or four rows on the deck. The deck positions
available for a Test Tube Rack ALP are determined by the number of rows occupied
by the ALP:
•
The 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP uses 3 rows and 1½ columns on the deck.
•
The 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP uses 4 rows and 1½ columns on the deck.
Although a Test Tube Rack ALP leaves 1/2 of a column empty, two Test Tube Rack
ALPs cannot be placed beside each other so that each one uses 1/2 of the same
column. However, a Span-8 Tip Wash ALP can be placed in the 1/2 column
remaining next to a Test Tube Rack ALP.
Use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine where the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack
ALP and 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP can be placed on the Biomek instrument deck.
After a deck position on which to physically mount the ALP has been chosen,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
22.2.2
Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck
While 1 x 2 and 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALPs occupy different positions on the deck
they are mounted to the deck using the same instructions (refer to Section 22.2.2,
Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck).
To mount a Test Tube Rack ALP to the deck:
1. Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into the
locating holes on the deck.
Note: Use the laser etchings as a guide when positioning ALPs on the deck.
2. Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Test Tube
Rack ALP (Figure 22-1 and Figure 22-2).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
22.3
22-5
Framing Instructions
Special framing instructions are necessary for Test Tube Rack ALPs which are
framed using the AccuFrame and the Framing Tool Adaptor. Each deck position
occupied by a Test Tube Rack ALP can be framed for increased pipetting accuracy;
however, framing only one of the positions is generally sufficient.
Both the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP and the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP are framed
using the following instructions.
To frame a Test Tube Rack ALP:
1. Place the Framing Tool Adaptor on the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (Figure 22-3)
or the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (Figure 22-4) so that the locating pins on the
bottom of the Framing Tool Adaptor align with the locating holes on the Test
Tube Rack ALP.
AccuFrame
Framing Tool Adaptor
Locating holes
1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP
Figure 22-3. Framing for the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing)
ALPs User’s Manual
22-6
Test Tube Rack ALPs
AccuFrame
Framing Tool Adaptor
Locating holes
1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP
Figure 22-4. Framing for the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing)
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or
removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck.
2. Turn off power to main unit before connecting the AccuFrame.
3. Plug the AccuFrame into any available CAN port on the Biomek FX tower.
WARNING: Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame
cable. If the light curtain is violated, the framing process halts
immediately.
WARNING: Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod
movement.
4. Manually place the AccuFrame into the Framing Tool Adaptor by placing the
front right corner first and pushing the AccuFrame gently down into the Adaptor
(Figure 22-3 and Figure 22-4).
5. Turn on power to main unit.
6. Frame the Test Tube Rack ALP according to the procedures outlined in the
appropriate instrument user’s manual.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
22.4
22-7
Adding Test Tube Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs
Test tube racks must be properly added to the Test Tube Rack ALPs so position A1 on
the test tube rack is in the front-left corner of a labware position on the Test Tube
Rack ALP.
¾
NX-S8 — Septum piercing tube racks may also be placed on Test Tube
Rack ALPs (refer to Section 22.5, Adding and Removing Septum Piercing
Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs (NX-S8 only)).
Proper placement of test tube racks on the Test Tube Rack ALPs is ensured by
inserting the labware positioning screws in the labware positioning screw holes on the
left side of the ALP after the ALP is added to the deck. The labware positioning
screws are always on the left side of the ALP, regardless of whether the ALP is left or
right facing (Figure 22-5 and Figure 22-6).
Note: Labware positioning screws must be next to the test tube in position A1 on the
test tube rack. Position A1 on a test tube rack must be in the front-left corner of a
labware position on the ALP.
To add test tube racks to the Test Tube Rack ALPs:
1. Insert the labware positioning screws by screwing them clockwise into the
labware positioning screw holes on the left side of the Test Tube Rack ALP
(Figure 22-5 and Figure 22-6).
Labware positioning screws
Labware positioning screws must be
beside position A1 on the test tube rack.
Overhang
Labware
positioning screw
holes
Thumbscrew
There are two thumbscrews for
each Test Tube Rack ALP.
Labware positioning
screw holes
Locating Pins
There are two
locating pins for
each test tube
rack, one on the
short sides of the
tube racks, cattycorner to each
other.
Figure 22-5. Labware positioning screws on a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing)
ALPs User’s Manual
22-8
Test Tube Rack ALPs
Labware positioning
screws
Labware positioning
screw must always be
next to position A1 on the
test tube rack.
Labware positioning
screw holes
Labware positioning
screw holes
Overhang
Thumbscrew
There are two thumbscrews for
each Test Tube Rack ALP.
Figure 22-6. Labware positioning screws on a 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP
(right facing)
2. Orient the test tube rack so position labeled A1 on the test tue rack is on the front,
left side of the ALP (Figure 22-7 and Figure 22-8).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
22-9
3. Lower the test tube rack so the locating holes in the bottom of the rack slip over
the locating pins on the Test Tube Rack ALP (Figure 22-7 and Figure 22-8).
Labware position A1 on a
test tube rack
Labware positioning
screw holes
Test tube rack
locating hole
There are two locating holes
on each test tube rack.
Labware positioning screws
The labware positioning screw must
be next to labware position A1 on the
test tube rack.
Locating pins
There are two
locating pins for
each test tube rack.
Figure 22-7. Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP (left facing)
ALPs User’s Manual
22-10
Test Tube Rack ALPs
Labware position A1
on a test tube rack
Labware positioning screws
The labware positioning screw must
be next to labware position A1 on the
test tube rack.
Labware positioning
screw holes
Test tube rack
locating hole
There are two locating holes
on each test tube rack.
Locating pin
There are two
locating pins for
each test tube rack.
Figure 22-8. Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP (Left facing)
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
22.5
22-11
Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube
Racks to Tube Rack ALPs (NX-S8 only)
Septum piercing test tube racks must be properly added to the Test Tube Rack ALPs
so position A1 on the septum piercing test tube rack is in the front-left corner of a
labware position on the Test Tube Rack ALP. A septum piercing adaptor, consisting
of two side plates and a top adaptor plate, is attached to the ALP to securely hold and
position test tubes for piercing by septum piercing tips.
22.5.1
Adding Septum Piercing Tube Racks
To add septum piercing test tube racks to the Test Tube Rack ALP:
1. If labware positioning screws are installed on the Test Tube Rack ALP, remove
them by turning them counterclockwise.
2. Orient the test tube rack so the position labeled A1 on the test tube rack is on the
front, left side of the ALP.
3. Lower the test tube rack so the locating holes on the bottom of the rack slip over
the locating pins on the Test Tube Rack ALP.
Note: If using a partially full tube rack, place an equal number of test tubes on
each side of the test tube rack, or add blank test tubes to the opposite side to
balance it. This helps to provide a level surface for the septum piercing tips and
equalizes the force distribution when the tips press down on the septa-covered
tubes.
ALPs User’s Manual
22-12
Test Tube Rack ALPs
Septum-Piercing Test Tube Rack
Position on ALP such that position labeled
A1 is to the front and left of the position.
Figure 22-9. Septum Piercing Tube Rack positioned on ALP (left facing)
4. Position one of the side plates so that back slotted thumbscrew is aligned with the
the bottom of the screw hole on the left side of the ALP position.
5. Push up on the slotted thumbscrew to engage the threads with the screw hole and
turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise to fasten the side plate to the ALP.
6. Position the other side plate so that the front slotted thumbscrew is aligned with
the bottom of the screw hole on the right side of the ALP position.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
22-13
7. Push up on the slotted thumbscrew to engage the threads with the screw hole and
turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise to fasten the side plate to the ALP.
Side plates
Slotted thumbscrews
Fasten one of these to
screw holes on ALP base.
Figure 22-10. Septum Piercing Tube Rack with side plates (left facing)
8. Add test tubes to the test tube rack, if necessary. Once the top adaptor plate is
installed, it must be removed to add test tubes to the rack.
Note: If using a partially full tube rack, place an equal number of test tubes on
each side of the test tube rack, or add blank test tubes to the opposite side to
balance it. This helps to provide a level surface for the septum piercing tips and
equalizes the force distribution when the tips press down on the septa-covered
tubes.
ALPs User’s Manual
22-14
Test Tube Rack ALPs
9. Place the top adaptor plate above the ALP position so that the four grooves on the
adaptor slide over the four thumbscrews on the side plates. It may be necessary to
loosen one or more of the thumbscrews to allow the grooves of the top adaptor
plate to slide over them.
Note: If the septum piercing tube rack has not already been placed on the Test
Tube Rack ALP position, do so before placing the top adaptor.
Top adaptor plate
Make sure tubes are
centered between the slots.
Side plate
Slide grooves in top plate
over the thumbscrews
and fasten to secure top
adaptor plate.
Thumbscrews
Firmly press on top
adaptor plate when
fastening.
Figure 22-11. Septum Piercing Tube Rack with top adapter plate (left facing)
10. Push the top adaptor plate down until stopped by the top of the test tubes.
11. Make sure the test tubes are centered between the slots of the top adaptor plate. If
not, remove the top adaptor plate and repeat steps 7 and 8.
12. When the test tubes are centered in the slots, press firmly down on the top
adaptor plate and fasten the four thumbscrews (two on each side plate) to secure
it in place.
13. Repeat steps 1 to 10 to place another septum piercing tube rack on the Test Tube
Rack ALP.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Test Tube Rack ALPs
22.5.2
22-15
Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks
To remove a septum piercing tube rack from a Test Tube Rack ALP:
1. Loosen, but do not remove, the four thumbscrews on the side plates.
2. Lift the top adaptor plate straight up so that the grooves slide completely over the
thumbscrews and remove it from the ALP.
3. Carefully lift the test tube rack up off the locating pins and slide it out between
the side plates.
22.6
Removing Test Tube Rack ALPs from the Deck
To remove a Test Tube Rack ALP from the Biomek deck:
1. Remove test tube racks from the Test Tube Rack ALP.
¾
NX-S8 — If using a septum piercing test tube rack, the septum piercing
adaptor must be removed before removing the test tube rack from the ALP
(refer to Section 22.6.1, Removing the Septum Piercing Adaptor from Test
Tube Rack ALPs (NX-S8 only)).
2. Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Test Tube Rack ALP.
3. Lift the Test Tube Rack ALP straight up from the deck until the locating pins are
clear of the locating holes.
22.6.1
Removing the Septum Piercing Adaptor
from Test Tube Rack ALPs (NX-S8 only)
If using septum piercing on the Test Tube Rack ALP, the septum piercing adaptor
must be removed prior to removing test tube racks from the ALP.
To remove the septum piercing adaptor from the Test Tube Rack ALP:
1. Loosen, but do not remove, the four thumbscrews on the side plates.
2. Lift the top adaptor plate straight up so that the grooves slide completely over the
thumbscrews and remove it from the ALP.
3. Remove the left and right side plates by turning the slotted thumbscrews
clockwise until they disengage from the screw holes on the ALP.
22.7
Storage
Return Test Tube Rack ALPs, test tube racks, and septum piercing racks to their
original packing materials and store in a dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled
area.
¾
NX-S8 — Return the septum piercing adaptor to its original packing
materials and store in a dry, dust-free, environmentally-controlled area when
not in use.
Note: It is desirable to allow Test Tube Rack ALPs to air-dry before returning them
to their original packing materials.
ALPs User’s Manual
22-16
22.8
Test Tube Rack ALPs
Preventive Maintenance
WARNING: Test Tube Rack ALPs may be contaminated from method
solutions. Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined
by the laboratory safety officer.
To clean, wipe all surfaces on the Test Tube Rack ALPs with a soft cloth.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
23-1
23 Tip Loader ALP
23.1
Overview
The Tip Loader ALP (Figure 23-1) is an active ALP that loads disposable tips onto a
96-well head or a 384-well head mounted on a Multichannel Pod. The Biomek system
supports up to four tip loaders on the deck at one time; however, only one Tip Loader
ALP can function at a time. The Tip Loader is controlled through a Controller Area
Network (CAN).
Note: The Tip Loader ALP supports only Beckman Coulter tip boxes.
Note: The Tip Loader ALP is only intended to load and unload tips; therefore, no
labware other than tip boxes should be placed on the Tip Loader ALP. No pipetting
operations are allowed on the Tip Loader ALP.
The sections in this chapter include:
•
Installing the Tip Loader ALP (Section 23.2)
•
Framing Instructions (Section 23.3)
•
Using the Tip Loader ALP in a Method (Section 23.4)
•
Controlling the Tip Loader ALP Locking Rods Outside a Method (Section
23.5)
•
Removing the Tip Loader ALP from the Deck (Section 23.6)
•
Storage (Section 23.7)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section 23.8)
•
Troubleshooting (Section 23.9)
ALPs User’s Manual
23-2
Tip Loader ALP
Figure 23-1. Tip Loader ALP
23.1.1
Tip Loader Air Requirements
CAUTION: Clean, dry air must be provided for proper operation of the
Tip Loader ALP.
The Biomek instrument requires clean air input of 40 psi. The air is regulated to the
air output ports on both towers and increased to meet the 110-115 psi requirement for
tip loading. The Tip Loader ALP must be attached to one of the 110-115 psi ports on
the inner sides of the Biomek towers to seat tips properly.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Tip Loader ALP
23.2
23-3
Installing the Tip Loader ALP
Installing the Tip Loader ALP on the deck includes choosing the deck position and
mounting the ALP to the deck
23.2.1
Choosing a Deck Position
The size of the Tip Loader limits where it can be positioned on the deck. Since the Tip
Loader ALP covers more than one standard deck position, placement is restricted to
the outside columns and back row of the Biomek deck. These positions are used in
order to leave as many other deck positions available as possible.
Note: Use the laser etchings as guides when placing the Tip Loader ALP. Because of
the size of the ALP, the laser etchings are larger for the Tip Loader ALP than all other
ALPs.
Note: After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP,
configure the ALP in the Deck Editor (refer to the Biomek Software User’s Manual,
Chapter 5, Preparing and Managing the Deck).
23.2.2
Mounting the Tip Loader ALP to the Deck
WARNING: Use an appropriately contained environment when using
hazardous materials.
WARNING: Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory
safety officer when using toxic, pathologic, or radioactive materials.
WARNING: Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument. Wipe up any
spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the
laboratory safety officer.
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
To mount the Tip Loader ALP:
1. Turn off power to main unit before installing any active ALP.
2. Position the Tip Loader ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip
into locating holes on the deck, and the air input/output aligns horizontally with
the ALP edge.
ALPs User’s Manual
23-4
Tip Loader ALP
3. Attach the CAN communications cable (Figure 23-2) to the CAN
communications Port.
Sensor
Verifies the presence
of a tip box
CAN communications port
Address switch
Air inlet
Figure 23-2. Tip Loader ALP Connections
4. Attach the opposite end of the CAN communications cable to an available CAN
Port on the instrument tower or Device Controller.
Note: Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek FX.
5. Verify that the address switch on the outside back of the Tip Loader is preset to
zero (0) (Figure 23-2).
Note: The default setting for the address switch is zero (0). If only one Tip
Loader ALP is on the deck, the address switch should be left at the default
setting. If multiple Tip Loader ALPs are on the deck, set (or reset) the address
switch to a unique address between one (1) and F.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Tip Loader ALP
23-5
6. Attach the Tip Loader ALP air tubing to a 110-115 psi air port on the inside left
or right tower (Figure 23-3).
Note: Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the
Biomek instrument.
40 PSI output
Valve handles
110 PSI output
connections
40 PSI output
connection
Air input
connection
Valve handles
Figure 23-3. Tip Loader ALP — Pneumatic Connections on the Biomek FX Towers
7. Turn on the corresponding air valve.
23.3
Framing Instructions
Frame the Tip Loader ALP according to the instructions in the specific user’s manual
for the instrument.
ALPs User’s Manual
23-6
23.4
Tip Loader ALP
Using the Tip Loader ALP in a Method
To use the Tip Loader ALP in a method, it must be installed in Hardware Setup
(refer to Chapter 1.3, Installing and Configuring ALPs).
Note: Configuration in Hardware Setup is not necessary for the Tip Loader ALP.
An understanding of how tips are loaded in a method using the Tip Loader ALP is
necessary to ensure tips are properly seated for pipetting operations (refer to Section
23.4.1, Loading Tips).
To provide more precise control over tip loading and unloading than other steps using
a Tip Loader ALP, such as a Transfer or Load Tips step, use a Tip Loader step. A
Tip Loader step may be used when performing multiple aspirate and dispense
operations with each operation requiring a specific set of tips. Refer to the Biomek
Software User’s Manual, Chapter 22.7, Tip Loader Step (FX, NX-MC only), for
information on configuring a Tip Loader step.
23.4.1
Loading Tips
WARNING: Stay clear of the pinch point when locking rods are moving
up into the head/pod.
The force used to apply tips to the head comes from the Tip Loader, not the pod or
head.
Note: Loading tips by hand or using Manual Control is not recommended due to
inadequate and unequal pressure application.
Tips load onto the pod from a software-issued command, such as in a Transfer or
Load Tips steps, and the Biomek instrument performs the following:
•
Places a tip box on the Tip Loader ALP.
•
Raises the locking rods and rotates them to lock into the pod.
•
Raises the tip box to seat the tips on the mandrels.
Note:
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
This process takes a few seconds to seat the tips properly.
•
Unlocks and lowers the locking rods.
•
Locks the locking rods to hold the empty tip box on the Tip Loader ALP.
•
Moves the pod in the Z axis with the tips attached to the head.
Tip Loader ALP
23.5
23-7
Controlling the Tip Loader ALP Locking Rods
Outside a Method
Note: Using Manual Control to load tips for a method is not recommended due to
inadequate and unequal pressure application.
Locking rods are the rods that extend from the Tip Loader ALP (Figure 23-4) and
lock onto the pod to assist in tip loading. Advanced Manual Control controls the
locking rods for a selected Tip Loader ALP in the following manner:
•
Extend or retract the locking rods.
•
Lock or unlock the locking rods.
To control the locking rods on Tip Loader ALP outside a method, use Advanced
Manual Control to:
•
Troubleshoot the Tip Loader ALP.
•
Recover from a failed tip load.
Locking
rods
Figure 23-4. Tip Loader ALP with locking rods extended
ALPs User’s Manual
23-8
Tip Loader ALP
To manually control the locking rods:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Tiploader. Advanced Manual Control for the selected ALP
appears (Figure 23-5).
Figure 23-5. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Tip Loader ALP
4. To move the locking rods up, choose Rods Up.
OR
To move the locking rods down, choose Rods Down.
OR
To move the rods to their locked position, choose Lock Rods.
OR
To move the rods to their unlocked position, choose Unlock Rods.
5. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
6. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Tip Loader ALP
23.6
23-9
Removing the Tip Loader ALP from the Deck
To remove the Tip Loader ALP:
1. Turn off power to main unit before removing any active ALP.
2. Close the air valve where the Tip Loader ALP is attached to the Biomek tower.
3. Detach the air tubing at the unit.
4. Detach the communications cable.
5. Lift the Tip Loader ALP straight up and off of the deck so the locating pins on the
bottom of the ALP clear the locating holes on the deck.
23.7
Storage
Return the Tip Loader ALP to the original packing materials, and store in a dry, dustfree, environmentally controlled area.
Note: It is desirable to allow the Tip Loader ALP to air-dry before returning it to the
original packing materials.
23.8
Preventive Maintenance
Clean-up all spills immediately with a soft cloth that has been dampened with
appropriate cleaning compound. Keep liquids off the sensor (Figure 23-2).
ALPs User’s Manual
23-10
23.9
Tip Loader ALP
Troubleshooting
Do not attempt to repair the Tip Loader ALP. Contact a Beckman Coulter Service
Engineer for all required repairs.
Note: The following troubleshooting does not require any removal of covers or
repair.
Table 23-1. Troubleshooting the Tip Loader ALP
IF
The tips are not seating properly
THEN
Check the air supply line for leaks.
Check that the device has been
framed correctly.
Check that the pod is level.
No motion is occurring when a tip
load has been requested
Check the air pressure.
Check the communications cable.
Locating pins do not lock into
position on the pod
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Re-teach the Tip Loader position to
orient the pod to the ALP’s location
on the deck.
A-1
Appendix A: Device Controller
A.1 Overview
The Device Controller provides a means to control a number of high voltage and low
voltage digital outputs, as well as a means to monitor low voltage digital inputs. A
Controller Area Network (CAN) interface with a small microcontroller provides
control over the output ports.
High voltage devices requiring 110VAC to 220VAC are attached to a Device
Controller via a high voltage power outlet, which is supplied through the AC Power
Input. Low voltage devices (which use 24V at 100 mA) are supplied via the CAN
connection from the Biomek instrument.
Note: Several ALPs and devices, such as a wash pump or fan, associated with ALPs
require an Device Controller to operate.
The sections in this appendix include:
•
Installing a Device Controller (Section A.2)
•
Setting Address Switches (Section A.3)
•
Connecting Devices to the Device Controller (Section A.4)
•
Using Advanced Manual Control to Manually Control Device Controllers
(Section A.5)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section A.6)
•
Troubleshooting (Section A.7)
ALPs User’s Manual
A-2
Device Controller
Located on the front of the Device Controller are (Figure A-1):
•
Four (4) high voltage channel power switches allowing for Automatic,
Manual On, or Manual Off states
•
Channel indicator lights
•
System indicator light
System
indicator
light
High voltage
channel
power
switches
Figure A-1. Front of Device Controller
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Device Controller
A-3
Located on the back of the Device Controller are (Figure A-2):
•
On-off switch for AC power input
•
Device indicators for digital inputs/outputs
•
Power input module
•
Two CAN communication ports
•
Four high voltage power outputs
•
Four accessible fuses, one for each high voltage power outlet
•
Four low voltage digital input channels
•
Four low voltage digital output channels
•
Two address switches
High voltage
power outputs
High
voltage
fuses
Address
switches
Power
input
module
Low
voltage
digital
inputs
On/Off
Low
voltage
digital
outputs
Power
input
fuse box
Standard AC
power input
CAN ports
Device
indicators
Figure A-2. Back of Device Controller
ALPs User’s Manual
A-4
Device Controller
A.1.1 Device Controller Specifications
Specifications for the Device Controller are found in Table A-1.
Table A-1. Device Controller Specifications
Item
Description
Environment
Indoor use only
Input Power Requirements
US/Europe: 110-240VAC, 6.3A,
50/60Hz
*For high voltage output channels
HV1-HV4
*US/Europe: 110-240VAC, 3A,
50/60Hz
Dimensions
12 wide x 8 deep x 7.5 high
Weight
5 lbs.
Ambient Operating Temperature
5-30°C (59-86°F)
Humidity Restrictions
<85% @ 30°C (86°F)
Altitude Restrictions
Up to 2000m (6562ft)
Installation Category
Category II
Pollution Degree
2
Input Fuses
US: 250VAC, 6.3 amp, 5x20mm,
SLO-BLO, UL approved
Europe: 250VAC, 6.3 amp, 5x20mm,
SLO-BLO,
UL/IEC approved
Output Fuses
US: 250VAC, 3.15 amp, 5x20mm,
Fast Acting, UL approved
Europe: 250VAC, 3.15 amp,
5x20mm, Fast Acting,
UL/IEC approved
Communication to Biomek
instrument
Device Controller manufactured by:
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
4300 N. Harbor Boulevard
Fullerton, CA 92843-3100
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
CAN
Device Controller
A-5
A.2 Installing a Device Controller
A Device Controller can be installed anywhere that is convenient for normal
operation of the instrument.
WARNING: To prevent electrical shock, use standard electrical
precautions when plugging the Device Controller into the power supply.
WARNING: Do not remove the cover of the Device Controller.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before connecting
CAN communication cables.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
To install a Device Controller:
1. Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching the Device Controller.
2. Using an AC power cord, connect the AC Power Input on the Device Controller
to power source.
3. Using the CAN communication cable, connect the Device Controller to the CAN
communications port on a tower.
Note: Three CAN communications ports are located on each side of the Biomek
instrument. When making the decision on which CAN communications port to
use, consider the number of CAN communication ports in use and try to even the
load.
4. Connect the appropriate devices to the Device Controller.
Note: Making the power connection to an ALP varys depending on the ALP.
Each ALP has specific input/output power requirements, so each connecting wire
is labeled to ensure appropriate connections. Refer to the individual ALP
chapters for information on the appropriate connections.
ALPs User’s Manual
A-6
Device Controller
A.3 Setting Address Switches
When more than one Device Controller is attached to the system, a separate address
must be set for each one to enable the software to identify the Device Controller being
used for specific operations. Each address is set using the address switches (Figure A2).
To set Device Controller addresses:
1. Make sure the power to the Biomek instrument is off.
2. Make sure the power switch on the Device Controller is off (Figure A-2).
3. For the first Device Controller, check to make sure address switch 2 is
set to 0.
4. On the first Device Controller, using a flathead screwdriver, turn address switch 1
to 0.
5. On the second Device Controller, turn address switch 1 to 1.
6. Continue setting address switch 1 in increments of 1 for the first 16 Device
Controllers on the system.
7. To set addresses for the second 16 Device Controllers used on the system, move
address switch 2 to 1. This makes the next 16 addresses available on address
switch 1.
8. After setting address switch 2 to 1, set address switch 1 to 0 again to set the
address for the next Device Controller on the system.
9. Continue setting address switch 1 in increments of 1 for the next 15 Device
Controllers on the system.
Note: For each 16 addresses set on address switch 1, address switch 2 is moved
up an increment of 1 to open the next available set of 16 addresses on switch 1
for use. Continue this incremental process of coordinating both switches for
setting addresses for up to 128 Device Controllers; at that point, the settings for
the 128th Device Controller would be switch 1 set to F and switch 2 set to 7.
10. After setting the necessary addresses, turn on power to the Biomek instrument.
11. Turn on the Device Controller power switch.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Device Controller
A-7
A.4 Connecting Devices to the Device Controller
WARNING: To prevent electrical shock, use standard electrical
precautions when plugging the Device Controller into the power supply.
WARNING: Turn off power to the Biomek before connecting CAN
communication cables.
CAUTION: Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device
Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP.
The main power ON/OFF switch is on the rear of Device Controller. The four ON/
OFF switches on the front panel of the Device Controller are for high voltage
channels only.
Note: The Device Controller must be turned on to provide power to attached high
voltage devices. The green light on the Device Controller indicates that the Device
Controller is on.
A.4.1 Connecting High-Voltage Devices
To use a high voltage device through the Device Controller:
1. Connect power cable of high voltage device into the appropriate plug.
2. Switch channel power switch for the chosen channel to Manual On. This applies
power to the device.
3. Switch channel power switch to Automatic.
Note: The maximum current allowable per high voltage port is 3.15 amps. The
Device Controller can handle a maximum of 6.3 amps, so two ports at 3.15 amps
each can be used at any one time.
A.4.2 Connecting Digital Device Outputs
Any device that uses 24V and less than 100 milliAmps of current may be connected
to the Device Controller via the digital connections (Figure A-3)).
To connect Digital Devices:
1. Turn off system power.
2. Connect the positive wire (+) to the 24V connector on the digital output.
ALPs User’s Manual
A-8
Device Controller
3. Connect the negative wire (-) to the control connector on the digital output.
Digital
Inputs
+
S
-
Digital
Outputs
+
Figure A-3. Digital connections - attach devices here
4. Turn power to the system on and test the device.
A.4.3 Connecting Digital Device Inputs
Each Device Controller digital input channel has three connectors (Figure 38-3):
•
Positive (+) — 5V to supply a sensor
•
S — Signal from the sensor
•
Negative (-) — Ground from the sensor
There are two types of input devices:
•
Optical switch — uses three connections (+, -, and signal)
•
Contact switch — uses two connections (+, -)
A.4.3.1
Connecting an Optical Switch
To connect an optical switch:
1. Connect the positive (+) wire from the optical switch to the positive (+)
connector on the digital input.
2. Connect the ground wire from the optical switch to the negative (-) connector on
the digital input.
3. Connect the signal wire from the optical switch to the S connector on the digital
input.
A.4.3.2
Connecting a Contact Switch
To connect a contact switch:
1. Connect one lead from the contact switch to the S connector on the digital input.
2. Connect the other lead from the contact switch to the negative (-) connector on
the digital input.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Device Controller
A-9
A.5 Using Advanced Manual Control to Manually
Control Device Controllers
Use Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller to:
•
Turn the output channels on or off manually.
•
Monitor input channels.
When opened, Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller displays
which channels are on and which channels are off.
To manually control Device Controller channels:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Device Controller. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Device Controller appears (Figure A-4).
4. To toggle a channel off or on, click the button.
Note: Channels that are on are highlighted with a bright green color.
Figure A-4. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller with
channel HV3 on
5. When adjustment of channels has been completed as desired, choose Close.
Note: Choose Update to view which digital outputs or inputs are on or off.
6. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
7. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
ALPs User’s Manual
A-10
Device Controller
A.6 Preventive Maintenance
Occasional replacement of the fuses may be required. Use the following instructions
to replace power input fuse (refer to Section A.6.1, Replacing the Power Input Fuse)
and the high-voltage output fuse (refer to Section A.6.2, Replacing the High-Voltage
Output Fuse).
A.6.1 Replacing the Power Input Fuse
If the Device Controller is connected properly but does not function, check the fuses
for possible replacement. The power input contains two fuses, and each high voltage
output contains a fuse (Figure 38-2).
To replace the power input fuse:
1. Turn off the power switch on the Device Controller and unplug the unit.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse box.
3. Using only your fingers, pry the old fuses gently from the fuse box.
4. Insert a new 5X20mm 6.3 Amp Slo-Blow fuse into the fuse box.
5. Plug in the unit.
6. Turn on the power switch.
A.6.2 Replacing the High-Voltage Output Fuse
To replace a high-voltage output fuse:
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, turn the cover over the fuse 1/2 turn to the left.
2. Take pressure off the cover. The fuse cover and fuse will pop out.
3. Replace the fuse with a 5X20mm 3.15 Amp Fast Acting fuse.
4. Place the cover back over the fuse and press in the cover.
5. Turn the cover back 1/2 turn.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Device Controller
A-11
A.7 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting techniques for a Device Controller are found in Table A-2.
Table A-2. Troubleshooting a Device Controller
IF
THEN
Power is not transmitted
Check connections to make sure they
are correct and secure.
Power is not transmitted, but
connections are correct and secure
Replace the fuse (refer to Section
A.6.1, Replacing the Power Input
Fuse).
The host computer does not recognize Make sure the address switch is set to
the Device Controller
the correct device address (refer to
Section A.3, Setting Address
Switches).
ALPs User’s Manual
B-1
Appendix B: Source/Waste Sensor
B.1 Overview
When properly installed and configured in Biomek Software, the Source/Waste
Sensor indicates whether a source container is running below a specified level or a
waste container is running above a specified level.
The chapter includes the following sections:
•
Installing a Source/Waste Sensor (Section B.2)
•
Using the Source/Waste Sensor in a Method (Section B.3)
•
Controlling the Source/Waste Sensor Outside a Method (Section B.4)
•
Preventive Maintenance (Section B.5)
•
Troubleshooting (Section B.6)
ALPs User’s Manual
B-2
Source/Waste Sensor
B.2 Installing a Source/Waste Sensor
Installing the Source/Waste Sensor includes attaching the sensor with the supplied
velcro strap to the source or waste container and inserting the sensor cables to the
correct Source/Waste Sensor Controller connection. Using CAN communication
cables, the controller is connected to the Biomek instrument.
WARNING: Do not place the controller or the source or waste containers
on the Biomek instrument deck.
To install the Source/Waste Sensor:
1. Place the source and waste containers at an off-deck location.
2. Place the controller at an off-deck location near the source and waste containers
and the Biomek instrument.
3. Plug the source sensor cable into the SOURCE connection (Figure B-1).
4. Plug the waste sensor cable into the WASTE connection (Figure B-1).
Source
connection
Waste
connection
Figure B-1. Source/Waste Sensor Controller
5. Using the supplied velcro strap, secure the sensor to the source container at the
desired level. Make sure the face of the sensor is flush to the container and the
velcro is pressed against the velcro strap (Figure B-2).
Note: The sensor should be placed at a low level on the source container in
order to indicate when the container is running low.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Source/Waste Sensor
B-3
6. If desired, secure the sensor to the waste container at the desired level. Make sure
the face of the sensor is flush to the container and the velcro is pressed against the
velcro strap (Figure B-2).
Note: The sensor should be placed at a high level on the waste container in
order to indicate when the container is becoming full.
Velcro
attached to
the sensor
Figure B-2. Source/Waste Sensor
ALPs User’s Manual
B-4
Source/Waste Sensor
WARNING: Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting
CAN cables.
7. Plug the male end of the CAN communication cable into the female connector
labeled “CAN PORT” on the controller or the female end of the CAN
communication cable into the male connector (Figure B-3).
Figure B-3. Source/Waste Sensor Controller
8. Plug the other end of the CAN communication cable into connector labeled CAN
Port on the Biomek instrument.
9. Verify the ADR1 address switch is set to 1 for the first connection.
10. Set the ADR2 to a unique address between zero (0) and F, for the second
connection if a another Source/Waste Sensor is used.
11. Calibrate the sensor (refer to Section B.2.1, Calibrating the Sensor).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Source/Waste Sensor
B-5
B.2.1 Calibrating the Sensor
Every time a new container or liquid is used, the sensor must be calibrated using the
following procedure to ensure it operates properly. This process uses a small supplied
screwdriver to turn the adjustment screw on the sensor to determine the sensitivity of
the sensor. Turning the screw clockwise increases sensitivity while moving it
counterclockwise decreases sensitivity.
To calibrate the sensor:
1. Ensure the face or active surface (Figure B-4) of the sensor is attached to the
container.
2. Fill the container with liquid until approximately 75% of the active surface of the
sensor is covered.
3. Using the small supplied screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw (Figure B-4) on
the sensor counterclockwise until the LED extinguishes.
4. Turn the adjustment screw clockwise until the LED turns on again.
5. Slowly move the sensor down the container so that the entire sensor face is below
the water level. The LED should remain on.
6. Move the sensor back up the container until approximately 75% of the active
surface is covered.
7. Using the supplied screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw clockwise one full
rotation.
LED
Adjustment screw
Face or active surface on
the other side of sensor
Figure B-4. Sensor
ALPs User’s Manual
B-6
Source/Waste Sensor
B.3 Using the Source/Waste Sensor in a Method
To use the Source/Waste Sensor in a method, it must first be installed in Hardware
Setup (refer to Section 1.3.1, Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup).
There are two ways in which the Source/Waste Sensor may be used with Biomek
Software:
•
Using the Device Setup step — to allow the sensor to check the levels of
liquids of source or waste containers at specific times in a method (refer to
Section B.3.1, Using the Device Setup Step).
•
Associating the sensor with a wash ALP — to allow the sensor to check the
levels of source or waste containers going into or out of a wash ALP (refer to
Section B.3.2, Associating the Source/Waste Sensor with a Wash ALP).
B.3.1 Using the Device Setup Step
Use the Device Setup step to use the Source/Waste Sensor in a method to check the
level of liquids at a specific time in the method (refer to the Biomek Software User’s
Manual, Chapter 22.6.1.8, Configuring the Device Action Step for a Source/Waste
Sensor (FX and NX only)).
If during the execution of the Device Setup step, the sensor indicates the supply
container is too low or the waste container is too high, an error message appears (refer
to Section B.3.3, Error Messages for the Source/Waste Sensor).
B.3.2 Associating the Source/Waste Sensor with a
Wash ALP
The Source/Waste Sensor also may be associated with a wash ALP or any ALP that
uses a pump to allow the sensor to monitor the liquid level of the source and waste
containers going into and out of the wash ALP. This association is made in the Deck
Editor usually when the wash ALP is framed.
The association allows the sensor to monitor the liquid levels of the containers used
with the wash ALP whenever the ALP is used in a method, such as through a
Transfer or Wash Tips step.
If while associated with a wash ALP, the sensor indicates the supply container is too
low or the waste container is too high, an error message appears (refer to Section
B.3.3, Error Messages for the Source/Waste Sensor).
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Source/Waste Sensor
B-7
To associate the sensor with a wash ALP:
1. In the Deck Editor, double-click the selected wash ALP (Figure B-5). Position
Properties for the ALP appears (Figure B-6).
Wash ALP
Figure B-5. Deck Editor with wash ALP
Figure B-6. Position Properties for selected wash ALP
2. Choose More (Figure B-6). An expanded Position Properties appears.
ALPs User’s Manual
B-8
Source/Waste Sensor
3. In Sensor Device, choose the specific Source/Waste Sensor to associate with
the wash ALP (Figure B-7).
Figure B-7. SourceWasteSensor selected in Sensor Device
4. Choose OK. The sensor is associated with that wash ALP and monitors the liquid
levels of the supply or waste containers of the ALP.
B.3.3 Error Messages for the Source/Waste
Sensor
If the Source/Waste Sensor is properly installed, associated, and configured in a
method when the source container is running low or the waste container is running
high, an error message similar to the following appears (Figure B-8).
Figure B-8. Source/Waste Sensor error
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Source/Waste Sensor
B-9
B.4 Controlling the Source/Waste Sensor Outside a
Method
To control a selected Source/Waste Sensor outside a method, use Advanced Manual
Control to:
•
Check the Source Sensor.
•
Check the Waste Sensor.
To manually control the Source/Waste Sensors:
1. Choose Instrument>Manual Control. Manual Control appears.
2. Choose Advanced Controls.
3. Select the desired Source/Waste Sensor. Advanced Manual Control for the
selected Source/Waste Sensor appears (Figure B-9).
Figure B-9. Advanced Manual Control for a selected Source/Waste Sensor
4. In Command, choose one of the following:
•
AssertSource — checks the source container sensor for the presence
of liquid.
•
AssertWaste — checks the waste container sensor for the presence of
liquid.
5. In Sensor State, set the desired sensor action:
•
On — generates an error when liquid is not detected.
•
Off — generates an error when liquid is detected.
6. Choose Go. The command is executed.
7. Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control.
8. Choose Exit to close Manual Control.
ALPs User’s Manual
B-10
Source/Waste Sensor
B.5 Preventive Maintenance
The Source/Waste Sensor requires minimal maintenance. Observe the following
guidelines:
•
Periodically inspect the velcro strap for wear.
•
Wipe any spills on the sensor immediately.
•
Calibrate the sensor every time a new container or liquid is used to ensure it
is operating properly (refer to Section B.2.1, Calibrating the Sensor).
B.6 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting techniques for a Source/Waste Sensor are found in Table B-1.
Table B-1. Troubleshooting a Source/Waste Sensor
IF
Sensor is not sensing
THEN
Check connections to make sure they
are correct and secure.
Sensor is not sensing, but connections Calibrate the sensor (refer to Section
are correct and secure
B.2.1, Calibrating the Sensor).
No errors are generated even though
waste container is full or source
container is empty.
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Associate the sensor with the
appropriate deck position.
xxxix
Index
Numerics
8-Channel Active Wash ALP
configuring multiple wash ALPs in the
software 2-20
defined 2-1
framing 2-10
Manual Teach
framing Z-axis 2-18
using delta values 2-16
using graphic alignment tool 2-15
mounting 2-3
routing tubing 2-4
preventive maintenance 2-22
removing 2-21
storage 2-22
troubleshooting 2-22
using in a method 2-20
A
active ALPs
defined 1-2
address switches
setting A-6
ALPs
installing and configuring 1-3
installing in Hardware Setup 1-4
overview 1-2
B
Bar Code Reader ALP
aligning laser beam 3-4
applying labels to labware 3-5
deck positions 3-3
defined 3-1
framing 3-5
installing 3-3
mounting to the deck 3-3
removing 3-12
storage 3-12
supported bar codes 3-1
troubleshooting 3-12
using in a method 3-6
Bimoek NX Span-8 High-Density 4x3 ALP
storage 9-7
Biomek NX Span-8 High-Density 4x3 ALP
adding an LLS Plate 9-3
defined 9-1
framing 9-7
mounting 9-5
preventive maintenance 9-7
removing 9-7
C
circulator bath
specifications for the Heating and Cooling
ALP 7-5
D
Device Controller
connecting devices to A-7
contact switch A-8
digital device inputs A-8
digital device outputs A-7
high-voltage A-7
optical switch A-8
ALPs User’s Manual
xl
Index
defined A-1
digital inputs A-9
digital outputs A-9
high voltage outputs A-9
installation procedures A-5, B-2
manually controlling A-9
preventive maintenance A-10
replacing high-voltage output fuses A-10
replacing power input fuses A-10
setting address switches A-6
specifications A-4
troubleshooting A-11
voltage requirements A-1
Drainable/Refillable Reservoir ALP
calibrating sensor amplifier sensitivity 4-9
connecting cables to controller 4-6
controlling outside a method 4-14
defined 4-1
framing 4-10
mounting the pump head 4-4
mounting to the deck 4-3
preventive maintenance 4-18
removing from deck 4-17
routing tubing 4-5
storing 4-18
troubleshooting 4-19
using in a method 4-11
F
framing
See individual ALP chapters.
fuses
changing high-voltage output
(Device Controller) A-10
changing power input (Device Controller)
A-10
H
Half-Position Disposal ALP
defined 5-1
framing 5-14
mounting 5-3
preventive maintenance 5-14
removing 5-6
storage 5-14
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
Half-Position Disposal ALP (with Slide)
defined 5-7
mounting 5-10
Half-Position Disposal ALP (with slide)
removing 5-13
Hardware Setup
installing a Microplate Shaking ALP in
11-5
installing a Positive Position ALP in 15-8
installing a Stirring ALP in 20-4
installing a Tip Loader ALP in 23-6
installing an ALP in 1-4
installing an Orbital Shaker ALP in 14-14
installing and configuring a Magnetic Bead
ALP in 10-8
installing and configuring devices
associated with HDR Pin
Drying ALP 6-13
HDR Pin Drying ALP
adding circulating reservoir in
Instrument Setup step 6-24
adding in Biomek Software 6-17
adding in Instrument Setup step 6-20
associating a wash pump with
deck position 6-21
associating fan with deck position 6-17
circulating reservoir connections 6-12
components 6-3
connections 6-8
controlling outside a method 6-40
defined 6-1
fan assembly
defined 6-8
installing 6-8
removing 6-8
framing 6-26
installing 6-6
installing circulating reservoir on deck 6-9
installing fan assembly 6-8
installing fan guards 6-8
installing in Hardware Setup 6-13
installing reservoirs with 6-6
operating the circulating reservoir 6-12
preventive maintenance 6-43
preventive maintenance for
circulating reservoir 6-43
Index
removing 6-41
removing fan assembly 6-8
static reservoirs
preventive maintenance 6-4
storing 6-42
troubleshooting 6-44
troubleshooting the
circulating reservoir 6-44
using circulating reservoirs with 6-4
using in a method 6-27
using reservoirs with 6-3
using static reservoirs with 6-4
using the Device Action step to
configure actions 6-37
HDR Tool Cleaning Step
cleaning operations 6-28
configuring drying operations 6-34
configuring wash operations 6-29
using 6-27
Heating and Cooling ALP
circulator bath specifications 7-5
defined 7-1
framing 7-5
installing 7-3
mounting to the deck 7-3
preventive maintenance 7-6
removing 7-5
storage 7-6
troubleshooting 7-6
High-Density Passive ALPs
4 x 3 ALP
adding an LLS plate 8-4
deck positions 8-6, 8-7
defined 8-3
installing an LLS plate option 8-5
mounting to the deck 8-6
4 x 4 ALP
defined 8-2
mounting to the deck 8-8
defined 8-1
framing 8-8
installing 8-6
preventive maintenance 8-8
removing 8-8
storage 8-8
xli
L
labware
applying labels to 3-5
Labware Types
configuring for use on
Magnetic Bead ALP 10-17
LLS plate option
installing on a 1 x 1 ALP 19-4
M
Magnetic Bead ALP
adding to the Deck 10-10
clamping or unclamping labware on 10-30
configuring Device Action Step for 10-21
controlling outside a method 10-24
defined 10-1
defining per-labware offsets for 10-13
determining magnet engage height
for labware types 10-27
disengaging magnet 10-26
engaging magnet 10-25
framing 10-7
homing the magnet 10-24
how it performs automatically 10-20
installing 10-3
installing and configuring in
Hardware Setup 10-8
installing magnets 10-5
interchangeable magnets 10-5
installing 10-5
preventive maintenance 10-33
removing 10-33
removing magnets from 10-7
storage 10-33
supported interchangeable magnets 10-5
troubleshooting 10-34
using in a method 10-8
using labware with 10-17
Microplate Shaking ALP
controlling outside a method 11-6
defined 11-1
framing 11-5
installing 11-3
installing in Hardware Setup 11-5
mounting to the deck 11-3
ALPs User’s Manual
xlii
Index
preventive maintenance 11-9
removing 11-9
storage 11-9
troubleshooting 11-9
using in a method 11-5
Multichannel Disposal ALP
defined 12-1
framing 12-15
installing protective shield
blanking plate 12-11
preventive maintenance 12-16
storage 12-16
types 12-1
Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide
deck positions for 12-7
defined 12-3
installing 12-7
mounting to the deck 12-8
removing 12-16
Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide
deck positions 12-4
defined 12-2, 12-4
mounting to the deck 12-4
removing 12-15
removing bagging extension 12-15
Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs
384-Channel
defined 13-1
96-Channel
defined 13-1
configuring multiple wash stations
in the software 13-8
deck positions 13-5
framing 13-9
Framing Tool Adaptors 13-9
installing 13-4
mounting to the deck 13-5
preventive maintenance 13-14
removing 13-13
storage 13-13
supply tubing 13-5
troubleshooting 13-14
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
O
Orbital Shaker ALP
choosing Snap 14-35
clamping and unclamping labware 14-32
clamping and unclamping labware outside
a methdod 14-45
command
clamp 14-22
home 14-22
pulse 14-22
run 14-22
shake 14-22
stop 14-22
timed shake 14-22
unclamp 14-22
configuring a pulsing shake 14-29
configuring to run a profile 14-27
configuring to run a standard
shaking procedure 14-23
configuring to run for a
specified time 14-25
controlling a shaking procedure for a length
of time outside a method 14-40
controlling a standard shaking procedure
outside a method 14-39
controlling outside a method 14-37
controlling with a Device Action step 14-20
creating new labware for 14-17
defined 14-1
establishing a safe maximum speed 14-14
framing 14-5
homing the microplate platform on 14-33
homing the microplate platform
outside a method 14-46
installing 14-3
installing in Hardware Setup 14-14
labware supported 14-1
mounting to the deck 14-3
overview 14-1
preventive maintenance 14-47
profile
Cell pellet breakup 14-28
Magbead Mix 14-28
MagneSil Yellow 14-28
recommended maximum labware
shaking speeds 14-15
removing 14-47
Index
running a previously defined profile
outside a method 14-41
stopping a shaking procedure 14-31
stopping a shaking procedure
outside a method 14-44
stopping and restating a method 14-35
storage 14-47
troubleshooting 14-48
using in a method 14-14
P
passive ALPs
defined 1-2
per-labware offsets
defining for Magnetic Bead ALP 10-13
Positive Position ALP
aligning labware with the
head or probes 15-6
clamping or unclamping labware on 15-11
controlling outside a method 15-10
defined 15-1, 21-1
framing 15-7
installing 15-3
installing in Hardware Setup 15-8
leveling 15-5
preventive maintenance 15-14
removing 15-14
storage 15-14
troubleshooting 15-14
using in a method 15-8
verifying the sensor 15-12
protective shield blanking plate
installing for Multichannel
Disposal ALPs 12-11
installing for Span-8 Disposal ALPs 17-15
S
Solid Phase Extraction (SPE) ALP
components 16-3
configuring the SPE step 16-9
deck positions 16-5
defined 16-1
framing 16-7
framing the collar stand 16-7
installing 16-5
mounting 16-5
xliii
mounting collar stand 16-6
preventive maintenance 16-12
removing 16-12
removing the collar stand 16-12
storage 16-12
troubleshooting 16-12
using in a method 16-9
Source/Waste Sensor
calibrating the sensor B-5
controlling outside a method B-9
defined B-1
installing B-2
preventive maintenance B-10
troubleshooting B-10
using in a method B-6
Span-8 Disposal ALP
framing 17-18
preventive maintenance 17-20
storage 17-20
Span-8 Disposal ALP with Slide
deck positions 17-10
defined 17-1, 17-4
installing 17-10
installing protective shield
blanking plate 17-15
mounting to the deck 17-11
removing 17-20
Span-8 Disposal ALP without Slide
deck positions 17-5
defined 17-1, 17-3
installing 17-5
mounting to the deck 17-5
removing 17-19
removing the bagging extension 17-19
Span-8 High-Density 4x3 ALP
framing 9-7
storage 9-7
Span-8 Tip Wash ALP
deck positions 18-3
defined 18-1
framing 18-5
how system fluid is pumped 18-1
installing 18-3
mounting to the deck 18-4
preventive maintenance 18-12
ALPs User’s Manual
xliv
Index
removing 18-5, 18-11
storage 18-12
troubleshooting 18-12
SPE Step
defined 16-9
Standard Passive ALPs
1 x 1 ALP
defined 19-2
installing LLS plate option 19-4
LLS plate option defined 19-3
1 x 1 ALP with Indented Sides
defined 19-6
1 x 3 ALP defined 19-7
1 x 5 ALP defined 19-8
deck positions 19-9
defined 19-1
framing 19-9
installing 19-9
mounting to the deck 19-9
preventive maintenance 19-10
removing 19-9
storage 19-10
Stirring ALP
controlling outside a method 20-5
defined 20-1
framing 20-4
installing 20-3
installing in Hardware Setup 20-4
preventive maintenance 20-6
removing 20-6
setting 15-5
storage 20-6
troubleshooting 20-7
using in a method 20-4
Storage ALP
defined 21-1
Storage ALPs
configuring in the Deck Editor 21-2
configuring the Storage ALP
Move step 21-10
defined 21-1
framing 21-8
Beckman Coulter, Inc.
T
Test Tube Rack ALPs
1 x 2 deck positions 22-4
1 x 2 defined 22-2
1 x 3 defined 22-3
adding septum piercing tube racks 22-11
adding test tube racks
to the ALP 22-7, 22-11
defined 22-1
framing 22-5
installing 22-4
labware supported 22-1
mounting to the deck 22-4
preventive maintenance 22-16
removing 22-15
removing septum piercing tube racks 22-15
removing the septum
piercing adaptor 22-15
sizes 22-1
storage 22-15
supported septum piercing tube racks 22-1
supported test tube racks 22-1
Tip Loader ALP
air requirements 23-2
CAN connections 23-4
controlling locking rods
outside a method 23-7
deck positions 23-3
defined 23-1
framing 23-5
installing 23-3
installing in Hardware Setup 23-6
loading tips 23-6
mounting to the deck 23-3
pneumatic connections 23-5
preventive maintenance 23-9
removing 23-9
storage 23-9
troubleshooting 23-10
using in a method 23-6